Manual Seassoft Data Processing 7.26.8

User Manual:

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 177 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

service@seabird.com | support@seabird.com | Tel: +1 425 643 9866

Seasoft V2:

SBE Data Processing

CTD Data Processing & Plotting Software for Windows

Software Manual

Release Date

Software

09/12/2017

SBE Data Processing 7.26.8 & later

Limited Liability Statement

Extreme care should be exercised when using or servicing this equipment. It should be used or serviced

only by personnel with knowledge of and training in the use and maintenance of oceanographic

electronic equipment.

SEA-BIRD SCIENTIFIC disclaims all product liability risks arising from the use or servicing of this

system. SEA-BIRD SCIENTIFIC has no way of controlling the use of this equipment or of choosing the

personnel to operate it, and therefore cannot take steps to comply with laws pertaining to product

liability, including laws which impose a duty to warn the user of any dangers involved in operating this

equipment. Therefore, acceptance of this system by the customer shall be conclusively deemed to

include a covenant by the customer to defend, indemnify, and hold SEA-BIRD SCIENTIFIC harmless

from all product liability claims arising from the use or servicing of this system.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Table of Contents SBE Data Processing

Table of Contents

Limited Liability Statement ................................................................................ 2

Table of Contents.................................................................................................. 3

Section 1: Introduction ........................................................................................ 6

Summary ............................................................................................................6

System Requirements.........................................................................................7

Products Supported ............................................................................................7

Software Modules ..............................................................................................8

Section 2: Installation and Use ............................................................................ 9

Installation .........................................................................................................9

Getting Started ................................................................................................. 10

SBE Data Processing Window ................................................................. 10

Module Dialog Box .................................................................................. 11

File Formats ..................................................................................................... 15

Converted Data File (.cnv) Format ........................................................... 17

Editing Raw Data Files .................................................................................... 18

Section 3: Typical Data Processing Sequences .............................................. 19

Processing Profiling CTD Data (SBE 9plus, 19, 19plus, 19plus V2, 25, 25plus,

and 49) ............................................................................................................. 20

Processing SBE 16, 16plus, 16plus-IM, 16plus V2, 16plus-IM V2, 21, and 45

Data .................................................................................................................. 21

Processing SBE 37-SM, SMP, SMP-IDO, SMP-ODO, IM, IMP, IMP-IDO,

IMP-ODO, SI, SIP, SIP-IDO, and SIP-ODO Data with a .hex data file and

.xmlcon configuration file ................................................................................ 22

Processing SBE 37-SM, SMP, IM, IMP, SI, and SIP Data without a

configuration file .............................................................................................. 22

Processing SBE 39, 39-IM, and 48 Data.......................................................... 23

Processing SBE 39plus and 39plus-IM Data ................................................... 23

Processing Glider Payload CTD Data (GPCTD) ............................................. 23

Section 4: Configuring Instrument (Configure) ............................................. 24

Introduction ...................................................................................................... 24

Instrument Configuration ................................................................................. 26

SBE 9plus Configuration .......................................................................... 26

SBE 16 Seacat C-T Recorder Configuration ............................................ 28

SBE 16plus or 16plus-IM Seacat C-T Recorder Configuration ................ 29

SBE 16plus V2 or 16plus-IM V2 SeaCAT C-T Recorder Configuration 31

SBE 19 Seacat Profiler Configuration ...................................................... 33

SBE 19plus Seacat Profiler Configuration................................................ 35

SBE 19plus V2 SeaCAT Profiler Configuration ...................................... 37

SBE 21 Thermosalinograph Configuration............................................... 39

SBE 25 Sealogger Configuration .............................................................. 41

SBE 25plus Sealogger Configuration ....................................................... 43

SBE 37 MicroCAT C-T Recorder Configuration ..................................... 47

SBE 45 MicroTSG Configuration ............................................................ 49

SBE 49 FastCAT Configuration ............................................................... 50

SBE Glider Payload CTD Configuration .................................................. 51

Accessing Calibration Coefficients Dialog Boxes ........................................... 52

Importing and Exporting Calibration Coefficients ........................................... 52

Calibration Coefficients for Frequency Sensors .............................................. 53

Temperature Calibration Coefficients ....................................................... 53

Conductivity Calibration Coefficients ...................................................... 54

Pressure (Paroscientific Digiquartz) Calibration Coefficients .................. 55

Oxygen (SBE 43I) Calibration Coefficients ............................................. 55

Bottles Closed (HB - IOW) Calibration Coefficients ............................... 55

Sound Velocity (IOW) Calibration Coefficients ...................................... 55

Manual revision 7.26.8 Table of Contents SBE Data Processing

Calibration Coefficients for A/D Count Sensors.............................................. 56

Temperature Calibration Coefficients ....................................................... 56

Pressure (Strain Gauge) Calibration Coefficients ..................................... 56

Calibration Coefficients for Voltage Sensors .................................................. 57

Pressure (Strain Gauge) Calibration Coefficients ..................................... 57

Altimeter Calibration Coefficients ............................................................ 57

Fluorometer Calibration Coefficients ....................................................... 57

Methane Sensor Calibration Coefficients ................................................. 62

OBS/Nephelometer/Turbidity Calibration Coefficients ........................... 62

Oxidation Reduction Potential (ORP) Calibration Coefficients ............... 63

Oxygen Calibration Coefficients .............................................................. 64

PAR/Irradiance Calibration Coefficients .................................................. 65

Particle Size Calibration Coefficients ....................................................... 66

pH Calibration Coefficients ...................................................................... 66

Pressure/FGP (voltage output) Calibration Coefficients ........................... 66

Suspended Sediment Calibration Coefficients .......................................... 67

Transmissometer Calibration Coefficients................................................ 67

User Exponential (for user-defined sensor) Calibration Coefficients ...... 69

User Polynomial (for user-defined sensor) Calibration Coefficients ....... 69

Zaps Calibration Coefficients ................................................................... 69

Calibration Coefficients for RS-232 Sensors ................................................... 70

SBE 63 Optical Dissolved Oxygen Sensor Calibration Coefficients ........ 70

SBE 38 Temperature Sensor and SBE 50 Pressure Sensor Calibration

Coefficients ............................................................................................... 70

WET Labs Sensor Calibration Coefficients .............................................. 70

WET Labs SeaOWL UVA Sensor Calibration Coefficients .................... 71

GTD Calibration Coefficients ................................................................... 71

Aanderaa Oxygen Optode Calibration Coefficients ................................. 71

Section 5: Raw Data Conversion Modules ...................................................... 72

Data Conversion .............................................................................................. 73

Data Conversion: Creating Water Bottle (.ros) Files ................................ 76

Data Conversion: Notes and General Information .................................... 77

Bottle Summary ............................................................................................... 79

Mark Scan ........................................................................................................ 81

Section 6: Data Processing Modules................................................................. 82

Align CTD ....................................................................................................... 83

Align CTD: Conductivity and Temperature ............................................. 84

Align CTD: Oxygen ................................................................................. 86

Bin Average ..................................................................................................... 87

Bin Average: Formulas ............................................................................. 88

Buoyancy ......................................................................................................... 90

Buoyancy: Formulas ................................................................................. 91

Cell Thermal Mass ........................................................................................... 92

Cell Thermal Mass: Formulas ................................................................... 93

Derive (EOS-80; Practical Salinity) ................................................................. 94

Derive TEOS-10 .............................................................................................. 97

TEOS-10 Formulas ................................................................................... 99

Filter ............................................................................................................... 100

Filter: Formulas ...................................................................................... 101

Loop Edit ....................................................................................................... 103

Wild Edit ........................................................................................................ 105

Window Filter ................................................................................................ 107

Window Filters: Descriptions and Formulas .......................................... 108

Median Filter: Description ...................................................................... 110

Section 7: File Manipulation Modules ........................................................... 112

ASCII In ......................................................................................................... 113

ASCII Out ...................................................................................................... 114

Section ........................................................................................................... 115

Split ................................................................................................................ 116

Strip................................................................................................................ 117

Manual revision 7.26.8 Table of Contents SBE Data Processing

Translate ........................................................................................................ 118

Section 8: Data Plotting Module – Sea Plot ................................................... 119

Sea Plot File Setup Tab .................................................................................. 120

Sea Plot Plot Setup Tab.................................................................................. 121

Process Options ...................................................................................... 122

Overlay Setup ......................................................................................... 123

TS Plot Setup .......................................................................................... 125

Sea Plot Axis Setup Tabs ............................................................................... 126

X-Y Axis Setup Tabs .............................................................................. 126

TS Plot Axis Setup Tabs ......................................................................... 127

Sea Plot Header View Tab ............................................................................. 128

Viewing Sea Plot Plots................................................................................... 129

Multiple X-Y Plots, No Overlay ............................................................. 129

Multiple TS Plots, No Overlay ............................................................... 130

X-Y Overlay Plot .................................................................................... 131

Plot Menus .............................................................................................. 132

Section 9: Miscellaneous Module – SeaCalc III .................................... 133

Appendix I: Command Line Options, Command Line Operation, and

Batch File Processing ....................................................................................... 135

Command Line Options ................................................................................. 135

Command Line Operation .............................................................................. 137

Batch File Processing ..................................................................................... 138

Appendix II: Configure (.con or .xmlcon) File Format .............................. 142

.xmlcon Configuration File Format ............................................................... 142

.con Configuration File Format ...................................................................... 142

Appendix III: Generating .con or .xmlcon File Reports – ConReport.exe147

Appendix IV: Software Problems .................................................................. 148

Appendix V: Derived Parameter Formulas (EOS-80; Practical Salinity) 149

Appendix VI: Output Variable Names .......................................................... 160

Practical Salinity and related Thermodynamic Parameters (EOS-80), and

Auxiliary Sensor Data .................................................................................... 161

Absolute Salinity and related Thermodynamic Parameters (TEOS-10) ........ 173

Index................................................................................................................... 174

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 1: Introduction SBE Data Processing

Section 1: Introduction

This section includes a brief description of Seasoft V2 and its components, and

a more detailed description of SBE Data Processing.

Sea-Bird welcomes suggestions for new features and enhancements of our

products and/or documentation. Please contact us with any comments or

suggestions (seabird@seabird.com or 425-643-9866). Our business hours are

Monday through Friday, 0800 to 1700 Pacific Standard Time (1600 to 0100

Universal Time) in winter and 0800 to 1700 Pacific Daylight Time (1500 to

0000 Universal Time) the rest of the year.

Summary

Seasoft V2 consists of modular, menu-driven routines for acquisition, display,

processing, and archiving of oceanographic data acquired with Sea-Bird

equipment. Seasoft V2 is designed to work with a PC running Windows 7/8/10

(32 bit or 64 bit).

Seasoft V2 is actually several stand-alone programs:

 SeatermV2 (a launcher for Seaterm232, Seaterm485, SeatermIM, and

SeatermUSB), Seaterm, and SeatermAF terminal programs that send

commands for status, setup, data retrieval, and diagnostics to a wide

variety of Sea-Bird instruments.

Note: SeatermV2 is used with our newest generation of instruments,

which have the ability to output data in XML.

 Seasave V7 program that acquires and displays real-time and raw

archived data for a variety of Sea-Bird instruments.

 SBE Data Processing program that converts, edits, processes, and plots

data for a variety of Sea-Bird instruments.

 Plot39 program for plotting SBE 39, 39-IM, 39plus, 39plus-IM, and

48 data.

This manual covers only SBE Data Processing.

Note:

The following Seasoft-DOS

calibration modules are not available

in Seasoft V2:

 OXFIT – compute oxygen

calibration coefficients

 OXFITW – compute oxygen

calibration coefficients using

Winkler titration values

 PHFIT – compute pH coefficients

See the Seasoft-DOS manual.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 1: Introduction SBE Data Processing

System Requirements

Seasoft V2 was designed to work with a PC running Windows 7/8/10

(32 bit or 64 bit).

Products Supported

SBE Data Processing supports the following Sea-Bird products:

 SBE 9plus CTD with SBE 11plus Deck unit (often referred to as 911plus)

or with SBE 17 or 17plus Searam (often referred to as 917plus)

 SBE 16 SeaCAT C-T (optional pressure) Recorder

 SBE 16plus and 16plus-IM SeaCAT C-T (optional pressure) Recorder

 SBE 16plus V2 and 16plus-IM V2 SeaCAT C-T (optional pressure)

Recorder

 SBE 19 SeaCAT Profiler

 SBE 19plus SeaCAT Profiler

 SBE 19plus V2 SeaCATProfiler

 SBE 21 SeaCAT Thermosalinograph

 SBE 25 Sealogger CTD

 SBE 25plus Sealogger CTD

 SBE 37-SM, 37-SMP, 37-IM, 37-IMP, 37-SI, and 37-SIP MicroCAT

Conductivity and Temperature (optional pressure) Recorder

 SBE 37-SMP-IDO, 37-IMP-IDO, and 37-SIP-IDO MicroCAT

Conductivity, Temperature, and Dissolved Oxygen (optional pressure)

Recorder

 SBE37-SMP-ODO, 37-IMP-ODO, and 37-SIP-ODO MicroCAT

Conductivity, Temperature, Optical Dissolved Oxygen (optional pressure)

Recorder

 SBE 39 and 39-IM Temperature (optional pressure) Recorder

 SBE 39plus and 39plus-IM Temperature (optional pressure) Recorder

 SBE 45 MicroTSG Thermosalinograph

 SBE 48 Hull Temperature Sensor

 SBE 49 FastCAT CTD Sensor

 SBE Glider Payload CTD (GPCTD)

Additionally, SBE Data Processing supports many other sensors / instruments

interfacing with the instruments listed above, including Sea-Bird oxygen, pH,

and ORP sensors; SBE 32 Carousel Water Sampler and SBE 55 ECO Water

Sampler; and assorted equipment from third party manufacturers.

Notes:

 SBE 37-SI and 37-SIP - SBE Data

Processing can be used with data

uploaded from firmware version 3.0

and later. Earlier versions of these

MicroCATs did not have internal

memory, and SBE Data

Processing is not compatible with

real-time MicroCAT data.

 SBE 39, 39-IM, 39plus, 39plus-IM,

and 48 data - SBE Data

Processing support is limited; see

Processing SBE 39, 39-IM, and 48

Data and Processing SBE 39plus

and 39plus-IM Data in Section 3:

Typical Data Processing

Sequences.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 1: Introduction SBE Data Processing

Software Modules

SBE Data Processing includes the following modules:

Type Module Name Module Description

Instrument

configuration

See Section 4.

Configure Define instrument configuration and

calibration coefficients.

Data

conversion

See Section 5.

Data

Conversion

Convert raw .hex or .dat data to

engineering units, and store converted

data in .cnv file (all data) and/or .ros file

(water bottle data).

Bottle

Summary

Summarize data from water sampler .ros

file, storing results in .btl file.

Mark Scan Create .bsr bottle scan range file from

.mrk data file.

Data

processing

Performed on

converted data

from a .cnv file.

See Section 6.

Align CTD Align data (typically conductivity,

temperature, oxygen) relative to pressure.

Bin Average Average data, basing bins on pressure,

depth, scan number, or time range.

Buoyancy Compute Brunt Väisälä buoyancy and

stability frequency.

Cell Thermal

Mass

Perform conductivity thermal

mass correction.

Derive

Calculate salinity, density, sound

velocity, oxygen, etc. based on EOS-80

(Practical Salinity) equations.

Derive

TEOS-10

Calculate salinity, density, sound

velocity, etc. based on TEOS-10

(Absolute Salinity) equations.

Filter Low-pass filter columns of data.

Loop Edit

Mark scan with badflag if scan fails

pressure reversal or minimum

velocity test.

Wild Edit Mark data value with badflag to eliminate

wild points.

Window Filter Filter data with triangle, cosine, boxcar,

Gaussian, or median window.

File

manipulation

See Section 7.

ASCII In Add header information to .asc file

containing ASCII data.

ASCII Out

Output data and/or header from .cnv file

to ASCII file (.asc for data, .hdr for

header). Used to export converted data

for processing by non-Sea-Bird software.

Section Extract data rows from .cnv file.

Split Split data in .cnv file into upcast and

downcast files.

Strip Extract data columns from .cnv file.

Translate Convert data in .cnv file from ASCII to

binary, or vice versa.

Data plotting

Performed on

converted data

from a .cnv file.

See Section 8.

Sea Plot

Plot data (C, T, P as well as derived

variables, overlay plots, and TS contour

plots). Plots can be printed, or saved to a

file or clipboard. Can plot data at any

point after Data Conversion has been run.

Miscellaneous

Performed on

data typed in

by user.

See Section 9.

SeaCalc III

Calculate derived variables from one

user-input scan of temperature,

pressure, etc.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 2: Installation and Use SBE Data Processing

Section 2: Installation and Use

Seasoft V2 was designed to work with a PC running Windows 7/8/10

(32 bit or 64 bit).

Installation

If not already installed, install SBE Data Processing and other Sea-Bird

software programs on your computer using the supplied software CD:

1. Insert the CD in your CD drive.

2. Double click on SeasoftV2_date.exe (where date is the date the software

release was created).

3. Follow the dialog box directions to install the software.

The default location for the software is c:\Program Files\Sea-Bird. Within that

folder is a sub-directory for each program. The installation program allows

you to install the desired components. Install all the components, or just install

SBE Data Processing.

Note that the following additional software is installed with SBE Data

Processing, in the same directory as SBE Data Processing:

 StripNullChars.exe – This program removes null characters from an

uploaded SBE 25plus data file; the file can then be processed in SBE Data

Processing’s Data Conversion module.

 Run StripNullChars.exe from a DOS window, following instructions

provided in the software.

 Note that the null characters in the file also prevent uploading of the

data from the SBE 25plus via RS-232. You must open the 25plus and

upload via the internal USB connector.

 NMEATest.exe – This program simulates a NMEA navigation device;

see the manual for your deck unit (SBE 11plus, 33, or 36 Deck Unit).

 phFit.exe – This program calculates a new offset and slope for a pH

sensor; see Application Note 18-1 (www.seabird.com/document

/an18-1-sbe-18-27-and-30-amt-ph-sensor-calibration-phfit-version-21).

Note: phfit can be run from SBE Data Processing’s Run menu.

Note:

Sea-Bird supplies the current version

of our software when you purchase

an instrument. As software revisions

occur, we post the revised software

on our website.

 You may not need the latest

version. Our revisions often include

improvements and new features

related to one instrument, which

may have little or no impact on

your operation.

See our website (www.seabird.com)

for the latest software version

number, a description of the software

changes, and instructions for

downloading the software.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 2: Installation and Use SBE Data Processing

Getting Started

SBE Data Processing Window

To start SBE Data Processing:

 Double click on SBEDataProc.exe

(default location c:\Program Files\Sea-Bird\SBEDataProcessing-Win32), or

 Left click on Start and follow the path

Programs\Sea-Bird\SBEDataProcessing-Win32

The SBE Data Processing window looks like this:

The window’s menus are described below.

 Run -

 List of data processing modules, separated into categories: typical

processing for profiling CTDs (1-8), other data processing (9-13), file

manipulation (14-19), plotting (20), and seawater calculator (21).

Select the desired module to set up the module parameters and

process data. Module Dialog Box provides an overview of the module

dialog box for all modules except Sea Plot and SeaCalc III;

Sections 5 through 9 provide details for each module.

 Command Line Options: Select Command Line Options to assist in

automating processing. See Appendix I: Command Line Options,

Command Line Operation, and Batch File Processing.

 phfit: Calculate offset and slope for an SBE 18, 27, or 30 pH sensor.

 Exit: Select to exit the program.

 Configure - List of instruments that require a configuration (.con or

.xmlcon) file, which defines the number and type of sensors interfacing

with the instrument, as well as the sensor calibration coefficients. Select

the desired instrument to modify or create a .con or .xmlcon file. See

Section 4: Configuring Instrument (Configure).

 Help - General program help files as well as context-specific help.

Note:

SBE Data Processing modules can

be run from the command line.

Also, batch file processing can be

used to process a batch file to

automate data processing tasks.

See Appendix I: Command Line

Options, Command Line Operation,

and Batch File Processing.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 2: Installation and Use SBE Data Processing

Module Dialog Box

To open a module, select it in the Run menu of the SBE Data Processing

window. Each module’s dialog box has three menus:

 File –

 Start Process - begin to process data as defined in dialog box

 Open - select a different program setup (.psa) file

 Save or Save As - save all current settings to a .psa file

 Restore - reset all settings to match last saved .psa file

 Default File Setup - reset all settings on File Setup tab to defaults

 Default Data Setup - reset all settings on Data Setup tab to defaults

 Exit or Save & Exit - exit module and return to SBE Data

Processing window

 Options (where applicable) –

 Confirm Program Setup Change -

- If selected, program provides a prompt to save the program setup

(.psa) file if you make changes and click the Exit button or select Exit

in the File menu without clicking or selecting Save or Save As.

- If not selected, program changes Exit to Save & Exit; to exit

without saving changes, use the Cancel button.

 Confirm Instrument Configuration Change -

- If selected, program provides a prompt to save the configuration

(.con or .xmlcon) file if you make changes and then click the Exit

button in the Configuration dialog box without clicking Save or Save

As.

- If not selected, program changes Exit button to Save & Exit; to exit

without saving changes, use the Cancel button.

 Overwrite Output File Warning -

- If selected, program provides a warning if output data will

overwrite an existing file.

- If not selected, program automatically overwrites an existing file

with the same file name as the output file.

 Inconsistent Data Setup Warning -

- If selected, program provides a warning if the configuration (.con or

.xmlcon) file and/or the input data file are inconsistent with the

selected output variables. For example, if the user-selected output

variables include conductivity difference, but you remove the second

conductivity sensor from the configuration file, a warning will

appear. The warning details what output variable cannot be

calculated, and allows you to retain the change to the configuration

file (and remove the inconsistent output variable) or restore the

configuration file to the previous configuration.

- If not selected, program automatically changes the user-selected

output variables to be consistent with the selected configuration or

data file.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 2: Installation and Use SBE Data Processing

 Diagnostics log – If selected, brings up a Diagnostics dialog box.

- Select Keep a diagnostics log to enable diagnostics output.

- Click Select Path to select the location and name for the diagnostics

file. The default location is %USERPROFILE%\Application Data\

Sea-Bird; the default name is PostProcLog.txt

(Example c:\Documents and Settings\dbresko\Application Data\

Sea-Bird\PostProcLog.txt).

- Select the Level of diagnostics to include: Errors, Warnings (includes

Errors), or Information (includes Errors and Warnings).

- If desired, click Display Log File to display the contents of the

indicated file, using Notepad.

- If desired, click Erase Log File to erase the contents of the indicated

file. If not erased, SBE Data Processing appends diagnostics data to

the end of the file.

- Click OK.

 Help - contains general program help files as well as context-specific help

(where applicable)

Each module’s dialog box typically has three tabs - File Setup, Data Setup,

and Header View. The File Setup and Header View tabs are similar for most

modules, and are discussed below. The Data Setup tab contains input

parameters specific to the module. Additionally, Data Conversion and Derive

have a fourth tab – Miscellaneous. See the module discussions in Sections 5

through 7 for details.

Note:

The dialog box for Sea Plot and

SeaCalc III differ from the other

modules. See Section 8:

Data Plotting Module – Sea Plot

and Section 9: Miscellaneous Module

– SeaCalc III.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 2: Installation and Use SBE Data Processing

The following examples and discussion of the File Setup and Header View

tabs is for Data Conversion. The other modules (except Sea Plot and SeaCalc

III) are similar; however, not all fields are applicable to all modules.

File Setup Tab

Directory and file name for

instrument configuration

(.con or .xmlcon) file, which

defines instrument

configuration and sensor

calibration coefficients.

This file is used in Data

Conversion, Bottle

Summary, and Derive.

Select to pick a different

file, or Modify to view

and/or modify instrument

configuration.



Select to have program find .con or .xmlcon

file with same name and in same directory as

data file. For example, if processing test.dat

and this option is selected, program searches

for test.xmlcon (in same directory as test.dat);

if it does not find test.xmlcon, it searches for

test.con.

 Also select if more than 1 data file is to be

processed, and data files have different

configuration files. For example, if processing

test.dat and test1.dat, and this option is

selected, program searches for test.xmlcon

and test1.xmlcon (in same directory as test.dat

and test1.dat); if it does not find .xmlcon files,

it searches for .con files.

Directory and file names

for input data. Select to

pick a different file. To

process multiple data files

from same directory:

1. Click Select.

2. In Select dialog box,

hold down Ctrl key

while clicking on each

desired file.

If multiple files are

selected, header in each

file must contain same set

of sensors and variables.

Directory and file name for output data.

 If more than 1 data file is to be processed, Output file

field disappears

and output file name is set to match input file name. For example,

if processing test.dat and test1.dat, output files will be test.cnv

and test1.cnv.

 SBE Data Processing adds Name append to (each) output file name,

before extension. For example, if processing test.dat and test1.dat

with a Name append of datcnv, output files will be testdatcnv.cnv and

test1datcnv.cnv. Use Name append to save intermediate data files

when input and output files have same extension.

Click

Start Process

begin processing data.

Status field shows

Processing complete

when done.

Return to SBE Data Processing window.

 If Confirm Program Setup Change was selected in Options menu - If you made

changes and did not Save or Save As, program asks if you want to save changes.

 If Confirm Program Setup Change was not selected in Options menu - Button says

Save & Exit. If you do not want to save changes, use Cancel button to exit.

Directory and file name for file to store

all

information input in File Setup and Data

Setup tabs. Open to select a different .psa file, Save or Save As to save current

settings, or Restore to reset all settings to match last saved version.

See note above.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 2: Installation and Use SBE Data Processing

Header View Tab

Return to SBE Data Processing window.

 If Confirm Program Setup Change was selected in Options menu -

If you made changes in the File Setup or Data Setup tab and did not

Save or Save As, program asks if you want to save changes.

 If Confirm Program Setup Change was not selected in Options menu -

Button says Save & Exit. If you do not want to save changes made on

the File Setup or Data Setup tab, use Cancel button to exit.

Begin processing data.

Status field on File Setup tab

shows Processing complete

when done.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 2: Installation and Use SBE Data Processing

File Formats

File extensions are used by Seasoft to indicate the file type:

Extension

Description

.afm

Bottle sequence, date and time, firing confirmation, and 5 scans

of CTD data, created by Auto Fire Module (AFM) or (when used

for autonomous operation) SBE 55 ECO Water Sampler.

.asc

Data file:

 Data portion of .cnv converted data file written in ASCII by

ASCII Out

 File written by Seaterm for data uploaded from SBE 37

(firmware < 3.0), 39, 39-IM, or 48.

Notes:

1. Convert button on Seaterm’s toolbar can convert .asc file to

.cnv file that can be used by SBE Data Processing to process

data.

2. Not applicable to SBE 37 IDO or ODO MicroCATs.

 File written by SeatermV2 for data uploaded from

SBE 39plus or 39plus-IM..

.bl

Bottle log information -

output bottle file, containing bottle firing

sequence number and position, date, time, and beginning and

ending scan numbers for each bottle closure. Beginning and

ending scan numbers correspond to approximately 1.5-second

duration for each bottle. Seasave writes information to file each

time bottle fire confirmation is received from SBE 32 Carousel

Water Sampler or SBE 55 ECO Water Sampler or (only when

used with SBE 911plus) G.O. 1016 Rosette. File can be used by

Data Conversion.

.bmp Sea Plot output bitmap graphics file.

.bsr Bottle scan range file created by Mark Scan, and used by Data

Conversion to create a .ros file.

.btl

Averaged and derived bottle data from .ros file, created by Bottle

Summary.

.cnv

Converted (engineering units) data file, with ASCII header

preceding data. Created by:

 Data Conversion.

 SeatermV2’s Convert XML data file (in Tools menu of

Seaterm232 or SeatermIM, or Convert XML Data button in

SeatermUSB) for SBE 39plus or 39plus-IM.

 Upload menu in Seaterm232 (SBE Glider Payload CTD only)

 Seaterm’s Convert button (SBE 37 [firmware < 3.0], 39,

39-IM, or 48 only).

Note: Not applicable to SBE 37 IDO or ODO MicroCATs.

.con or

.xmlcon

Instrument configuration - number and type of sensors, channel

assigned to each sensor, and calibration coefficients. SBE Data

Processing uses this information to interpret raw data from

instrument. Latest version of configuration file for your

instrument is supplied by Sea-Bird when instrument is

purchased, upgraded, or calibrated. If you make changes to

instrument (add or remove sensors, recalibrate, etc.), you must

update configuration

file. Can be viewed and/or modified in SBE

Data Processing in Configure, Data Conversion, Derive, and

Bottle Summary; and in Seasave.

 .xmlcon files, written in XML format, were introduced with

SBE Data Processing and Seasave 7.20a. Instruments

introduced after that are compatible only with .xmlcon files.

.dat

Data file - binary raw data file created by older versions

(Version < 6.0) of Seasave from real-time data stream from

SBE 911plus. File includes header information.

Notes:

 Configuration files (.con or .xmlcon)

can also be opened, viewed, and

modified with DisplayConFile.exe, a

utility that is installed in the same

folder as SBE Data Processing.

Right click on the desired

configuration file, select Open With,

and select DisplayConFile. This

utility is often used at Sea-Bird to

quickly open and view a

configuration file for troubleshooting

purposes, without needing to go

through the additional steps of

selecting the file in SBE Data

Processing or Seasave.

 We recommend that you do not

open .xmlcon files with a text editor

(i.e., Notepad, Wordpad, etc.).

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 2: Installation and Use SBE Data Processing

.hdr

Header recorded when acquiring real-time data (same as header

info

rmation in data file), or header portion of .cnv converted data

file written by ASCII Out. Header information includes software

version, sensor serial numbers, instrument configuration, etc.

.hex

Data file:

 Hexadecimal raw data file created by Seasave from real-time

data stream from SBE 9plus (Seasave > 7.0), 16, 16plus,

16plus V2, 19, 19plus, 19plus V2, 21, 25, 25plus, or 49.

 Data uploaded from memory of SBE 16, 16plus, 16plus-IM,

16plus V2, 16plus-IM V2, 17plus (used with SBE 9plus

CTD), 19, 19plus, 19plus V2, 21, 25, or 37.

 Converted (engineering units) data file created by Seasave

from real-time data stream from SBE 45.

File includes header information.

.jpg Sea Plot output JPEG graphics file.

.mrk

Mark scan information - output marker file containing sequential

mark number, system time, and data for selected variables.

Information is written to file by Seasave when user clicks on

Mark Scan during real-time data acquisition to mark significant

events in the cast. File can be used by Mark Scan.

.psa

File containing input file name and data path, output data path,

and module-specific parameters used by SBE Data Processing. -

- Primary .psa file default location, if available, is:

%LOCALAPPDATA%\Sea-Bird\SBEDataProcessing-Win32\

(Example

c:\Users\dbresko\AppData\Local\Sea-Bird\SBEDataProcessing-

Win32\DatCnv.psa)

- Secondary .psa file default location is:

%APPDATA%\Sea-Bird\SBEDataProcessing-Win32\

(Example

c:\Documents and Settings\dbresko.SEABIRD\Application

Data\Sea-Bird\SBEDataProcessing-Win32\DatCnv.psa)

PostProcSuite.ini contains a list of paths and file names for

recently used .psa files. To view list, click File in module dialog

box and select Recent Setup Files.

- Primary PostProcSuite.ini file default location, if available, is:

%LOCALAPPDATA%\Sea-Bird\IniFiles\

(Example

c:\Users\dbresko\AppData\Local\Sea-Bird\IniFiles\

PostProcSuite.ini)

- Secondary PostProcSuite.ini file default location is:

%APPDATA%\Sea-Bird\IniFiles\

(Example

c:\Documents and Settings\dbresko.SEABIRD\

Application Data\Sea-Bird\IniFiles\PostProcSuite.ini)

.ros

File containing data for each scan associated with a bottle

closure, as well as data for a user-selected range of scans before

and after each closure; created by Data Conversion.

.txt



Easy-to-read file (for viewing only; cannot be modified) that

shows all parameters in .con or .xmlcon file. Created by

clicking Report in Configuration dialog box. SBE Data

Processing creates this as a temporary file; to save it to

document your settings, select Save and exit and enter desired

file name and location. Alternatively, create file by running

ConReport.exe.

 File written by Seaterm232 for data uploaded from SBE

25plus, containing data from serial sensors.

Note:

Seatermv2 version 1.1 and later

creates a .hex file from data

uploaded from an SBE 37. Earlier

versions of SeatermV2, and all

versions of Seaterm, created a .cnv

file.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 2: Installation and Use SBE Data Processing

.wmf Sea Plot output Windows metafile graphics file.

.xml



Sensor calibration coefficient file. This file can be exported

and/or imported from the dialog box for a sensor. This allows

you to move a sensor from one instrument to another and

update the instrument’s .con or .xmlcon file while eliminating

need for typing or resulting possibility of typographical

errors.

 File written by Seaterm232, Seaterm485, or SeatermIM for

data uploaded from all SBE 37 IDO and ODOs, and other

SBE 37s with firmware version 3.0 and later (Note:

Seaterm232, Seaterm485, and SeatermIM [all version 1.1 and

later] automatically convert .xml file to .hex file that can be

used by SBE Data Processing to process data).

 File written by Seaterm232, SeatermIM, or SeatermUSB for

data uploaded from SBE 39plus or 39plus-IM.

 File written by Seaterm232 for data uploaded from SBE

25plus.

.xmlcon See .con extension above.

Converted Data File (.cnv) Format

Converted files consist of a descriptive header followed by converted data in

engineering units. The header contains:

1. Header information from the raw input data file (these lines begin with *).

2. Header information describing the converted data file (these lines begin

with #). The descriptions include:

 number of rows and columns of data

 variable for each column (for example, pressure, temperature, etc.)

 interval between each row (scan rate or bin size)

 historical record of processing steps used to create or modify file

3. ASCII string *END to flag the end of the header information.

Converted data is stored in rows and columns of ASCII numbers

(11 characters per value) or as a binary data stream (4 byte binary floating

point number for each value). The last column is a flag field used to mark

scans as bad in Loop Edit.

Note:

Seatermv2 version 1.1 and later

automatically creates a .hex file from

the .xml data file uploaded from an

SBE 37. Earlier versions of

SeatermV2, and all versions of

Seaterm, created a .cnv file.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 2: Installation and Use SBE Data Processing

Editing Raw Data Files

Sometimes users want to edit the raw .hex, .dat, or .xml data file before

beginning processing, to remove data at the beginning of the file

corresponding to instrument soak time, remove blocks of bad data, edit the

header, or add explanatory notes about the cast. Editing the raw file can

corrupt the data, making it impossible to perform further processing

using Sea-Bird software. We strongly recommend that you first convert

the data to a .cnv file (using Data Conversion), and then use other

SBE Data Processing modules to edit the .cnv file as desired.

.hex Files

If the editing is not performed using this technique, SBE Data Processing

may reject the edited data file and give you an error message.

1. Make a back-up copy of your .hex data file before you begin.

2. Run WordPad.

3. In the File menu, select Open. The Open dialog box appears. For Files of

type, select All Documents (*.*). Browse to the desired .hex data file and

click Open.

4. Edit the file as desired, inserting any new header lines after the System

Upload Time line and before *END*. Note that all header lines must

begin with an asterisk (*), and *END* indicates the end of the header. An

example is shown below, with the added lines in bold:

* Sea-Bird SBE 21 Data File:

* FileName = C:\Odis\SAT2-ODIS\oct14-19\oc15_99.hex

* Software Version Seasave Win32 v1.10

* Temperature SN = 2366

* Conductivity SN = 2366

* System UpLoad Time = Oct 15 1999 10:57:19

* Testing adding header lines

* Must start with an asterisk

* Place anywhere between System Upload Time & END of header

* NMEA Latitude = 30 59.70 N

* NMEA Longitude = 081 37.93 W

* NMEA UTC (Time) = Oct 15 1999 10:57:19

* Store Lat/Lon Data = Append to Every Scan and Append to .NAV File When

<Ctrl F7> is Pressed

** Ship: Sea-Bird

** Cruise: Sea-Bird Header Test

** Station:

** Latitude:

** Longitude:

*END*

5. In the File menu, select Save (not Save As). Something similar to the

following message displays:

You are about to save the document in a Text-Only format, which

will remove all formatting. Are you sure you want to do this?

Ignore the message and click Yes.

6. In the File menu, select Exit.

.dat Files

Sea-Bird is not aware of a technique for editing a .dat file that will not

corrupt it. Opening a .dat file with any text editor corrupts the file by leaving

behind invisible characters (for example, carriage returns, line feeds, etc.)

when the file is closed. These characters, inserted semi-randomly through the

file, corrupt the data format. Sea-Bird distributes a utility program, called

Fixdat, which may repair a corrupted .dat file.

 Fixdat.exe is installed with, and located in the same directory as,

SBE Data Processing.

Note:

See Section 5: Raw Data

Conversion Modules and

Section 7: File Manipulation

Modules for converting the data

to a .cnv file and then editing

the data.

Note:

Although we provide this

technique for editing a raw .hex

file, Sea-Bird’s strong

recommendation, as described

above, is to always convert the

raw data file and then edit the

converted file.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 3: Typical Data Processing Sequences SBE Data Processing

Section 3:

Typical Data Processing Sequences

This section includes typical data processing sequences for each instrument,

broken into four categories:

 Profiling CTDs that have a configuration (.con or .xmlcon) file–

SBE 9plus, 19, 19plus, 19plus V2, 25, 25plus, and 49.

 Other instruments (moored CTDs and thermosalinographs) that have a

configuration (.con or .xmlcon) file – SBE 16, 16plus, 16plus-IM,

16plus V2, 16plus-IM V2, 21, and 45.

 MicroCATs with data uploaded using SeatermV2 version 1.1 or later,

providing a .hex data file and a .xmlcon configuration file- SBE 37-SM,

37-SMP, 37-SMP-IDO, 37-SMP-ODO, 37-IM, 37-IMP, 37-IMP-IDO,

37-IMP-ODO, 37-SI, 37-SIP, 37-SIP-IDO, and 37-SIP-ODO.

 MicroCATs with data uploaded using Seaterm or SeatermV2 version

1.00i or earlier, providing a .xml or .asc data file (and no configuration

[.con or .xmlcon] file) – SBE 37-SM, 37-SMP, 37-IM, 37-IMP, 37-SI,

and 37-SIP.

 Instruments that do not have a configuration (.con or .xmlcon) file and

have limited compatibility with SBE Data Processing –

SBE 39, 39-IM, and 48.

SBE 39plus and 39plus-IM.

 Glider Payload CTD

Notes:

 The processing sequence may

differ for your application.

 Sea Plot can display data at any

point after a .cnv file has been

created.

 Use ASCII Out to export

converted data (without header)

to other software.

 Oxygen computed by Seasave

and Data Conversion differs from

oxygen computed by Derive. Both

algorithms use the derivative of

the oxygen signal with respect to

time:

 Quick estimate - Seasave and

Data Conversion compute the

derivative looking back in time,

because Seasave cannot use

future values while acquiring

real-time data.

 Most accurate results - Derive

uses a user-input centered

window (equal number of points

before and after scan) to

compute the derivative.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 3: Typical Data Processing Sequences SBE Data Processing

Processing Profiling CTD Data (SBE 9plus, 19, 19plus, 19plus V2, 25, 25plus, and 49)

The processing sequence is based on a typical situation with a boat at low

latitude lowering an instrument at 1 meter/second.

Program / Module Function

1. Seasave,

Seaterm232,

Seaterm, or

SeatermAF

Acquire real-time raw data (Seasave) or

upload data from memory (Upload menu in

Seaterm232 for 19plus V2 or 25plus, or Upload

button in Seaterm or SeatermAF, as applicable).

2. Data

Conversion

Convert raw data to a .cnv file, selecting ASCII as

data conversion format. Converted data includes:

 pressure, temperature, and conductivity

 (if applicable) dissolved oxygen current and

dissolved oxygen temperature (SBE 13 or 23);

dissolved oxygen signal (SBE 43);

dissolved oxygen phase delay and thermistor

voltage (SBE 63)

 (if applicable) light transmission, pH,

fluorescence, etc.

3. Filter

Low-pass filter pressure to increase pressure

resolution for Loop Edit, and low-pass filter

temperature and conductivity to smooth high

frequency data.

4. Align CTD

Advance conductivity, temperature, and oxygen

relative to pressure, to align parameters in time.

This ensures that calculations of salinity, dissolved

oxygen, and other parameters are made using

measurements from same parcel of water.

5. Cell Thermal

Mass

Perform conductivity cell thermal mass correction if

salinity accuracy of better than 0.01 PSU is desired in

regions with steep gradients.

Note: Do not use Cell Thermal Mass for freshwater

data.

6. Loop Edit Mark scans where CTD is moving less than minimum

velocity or traveling backwards due to ship roll.

7. Derive

(EOS-80,

Practical

Salinity)

Compute:

 Practical Salinity, density, and other parameters

 oxygen from oxygen current and oxygen

temperature (SBE 13 or 23); oxygen signal

(SBE 43); or oxygen phase delay and thermistor

voltage (SBE 63)

Note that input file must include conductivity,

temperature, and pressure.

8. Derive TEOS-10

(TEOS-10,

Absolute

Salinity)

(optional) Compute thermodynamic properties based

on TEOS-10.

Bin Average Average data into desired pressure or depth bins.

10.

Sea Plot Plot data.

Notes:

 The example assumes that a

configuration (.con or .xmlcon) file

is available. A configuration file is

provided by Sea-Bird when the

instrument is purchased, based on

the user-specified configuration

and the factory-calibration. An

existing configuration file can be

modified in Configure, Data

Conversion, Derive, or Bottle

Summary, or in Seasave. If you do

not have a configuration file, use

SBE Data Processing’s Configure

menu to create the file.

 The order for running Bin Average

and Derive can be switched,

unless oxygen is being

computed in Derive.

 See the program modules for Sea-

Bird recommendations for typical

parameter values for filtering,

aligning, etc. Use judgment in

evaluating your data set to

determine the best values.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 3: Typical Data Processing Sequences SBE Data Processing

Processing SBE 16, 16plus, 16plus-IM, 16plus V2, 16plus-IM V2, 21, and 45 Data

Program / Module Function

1. Seasave,

Seaterm232,

Seaterm485,

SeatermIM, or

Seaterm

Acquire real-time raw data (Seasave) or

upload data from memory:

 Upload menu in Seaterm232 or Seaterm485 for

16plus V2 or SeatermIM for 16plus-IM V2;

 Upload button in Seaterm.

2. Data

Conversion

Convert raw data to a .cnv file, selecting ASCII as

data conversion format. Converted data includes:

 pressure, temperature, and conductivity

 (if applicable) dissolved oxygen current and

dissolved oxygen temperature (SBE 13 or 23);

dissolved oxygen signal (SBE 43); dissolved

oxygen phase delay and thermistor voltage (SBE

63)

 (if applicable) light transmission, pH,

fluorescence, etc.

3. Derive

(EOS-80,

Practical

Salinity)

Compute:

 Practical Salinity, density, and other parameters.

 oxygen from oxygen current and oxygen

temperature (SBE 13 or 23); oxygen signal (SBE

43); or oxygen phase delay and thermistor

voltage (SBE 63)

Note that input file must include conductivity,

temperature, and pressure.

4. Derive TEOS-10

(TEOS-10,

Absolute

Salinity)

(optional) Compute thermodynamic properties based

on TEOS-10.

Sea Plot Plot data.

Notes:

 The example assumes that a

configuration (.con or .xmlcon) file is

available. A configuration file is

provided by Sea-Bird when the

instrument is purchased, based on

the user-specified configuration and

the factory-calibration. An existing

configuration file can be modified in

Configure, Data Conversion, Derive,

or Bottle Summary, or in Seasave. If

you do not have a configuration file,

use SBE Data Processing’s

Configure menu to create the file.

 Even if your instrument does not

have a pressure sensor (SBE 21

and 45; SBE 16, 16plus, 16plus-IM,

16plus V2, and 16plus-IM V2 without

optional pressure sensor): Select

pressure as an output variable in

Data Conversion if you plan to

calculate salinity, density, or other

parameters that require pressure in

Derive or Sea Plot. For the SBE 16

series instruments, Data Conversion

inserts a column with the moored

pressure (entered in the .con or

.xmlcon file Data dialog) in the

output .cnv file. For the SBE 21 and

45, Data Conversion inserts a

column of 0’s for pressure in the

output .cnv file.

 The SBE 45 outputs data in

engineering units. However, you

must still run Data Conversion to put

the data in a format that can be

used by SBE Data Processing’s

other modules.

 For an SBE 21 or 45 with a remote

temperature sensor, Seasave,

Data Conversion, Derive, and

Derive TEOS-10 all use the remote

temperature data when calculating

density and sound velocity.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 3: Typical Data Processing Sequences SBE Data Processing

Processing SBE 37-SM, SMP, SMP-IDO, SMP-ODO, IM, IMP, IMP-IDO, IMP-ODO, SI, SIP,

SIP-IDO, and SIP-ODO Data with a .hex data file and .xmlcon configuration file

Program / Module Function

1. Seaterm232,

Seaterm485, or

SeatermIM (all

version 1.1 or

later)

For SBE 37 (without oxygen) with firmware > 3.0

and all IDO and ODO SBE 37- Use Upload menu to

upload data (in engineering units). SeatermV2

uploads data as an XML (.xml) file. It automatically

converts data to .hex format, and creates a

configuration (.xmlcon) file; .hex and .xmlcon file.

2. Data

Conversion

Convert raw data to a .cnv file, selecting ASCII as

data conversion format. Converted data includes:

 conductivity, temperature, and pressure

 (for IDO and ODO MicroCATs) dissolved

oxygen signal

3. Derive (EOS-80,

Practical

Salinity)

Compute:

 Practical Salinity, density, and other parameters.

 oxygen from oxygen signal

4. Derive TEOS-10

(TEOS-10,

Absolute

Salinity)

(optional) Compute thermodynamic properties based

on TEOS-10.

Sea Plot Plot data.

Processing SBE 37-SM, SMP, IM, IMP, SI, and SIP Data without a configuration file

Program / Module Function

1. Seaterm232,

Seaterm485, or

SeatermIM (all

version 1.00l or

earlier), or

Seaterm

Seaterm232, Seaterm485, or SeatermIM for SBE 37

(non-IDO) with firmware version > 3.0 - Use Upload

menu to upload data (in engineering units) in XML

(.xml) format. Use Convert .XML data file in Tools

menu to convert .xml to .cnv file, which can be used

by SBE Data Processing. or

Seaterm for SBE 37 (non-IDO) with firmware version

< 3.0 - Use Upload button to upload data (in

engineering units) in ASCII (.asc) format. Use

Convert button to convert .asc to .cnv file, which can

be used by SBE Data Processing.

2. Derive (EOS-80,

Practical

Salinity)

Compute Practical Salinity, density, and other

parameters.

Note: An SBE 37 stores calibration coefficients

internally, and does not have a .con or .xmlcon file.

However, Derive requires you to select a .con or

.xmlcon file before it will process data. You can use a

.con or .xmlcon file from any other Sea-Bird

instrument; the contents of the file will not affect the

results. If you do not have a .con or .xmlcon file for

another Sea-Bird instrument, create one:

1. Click SBE Data Processing’s Configure menu

and select any instrument.

2. In the Configuration dialog box, click Save As,

and save the .con or .xmlcon file with the desired

name and location.

3. Derive TEOS-10

(TEOS-10,

Absolute

Salinity)

(optional) Compute thermodynamic properties based

on TEOS-10.

Sea Plot Plot data.

Note:

SBE 37-SI and 37-SIP with firmware

version 3.0 and later have internal

memory; follow the procedure

described here to upload and

process the data. Earlier versions of

the 37-SI and 37-SIP did not have

internal memory; SBE Data

Processing cannot be used to

process the real-time data obtained

with these older instruments.

Note:

SBE 37-SI and 37-SIP with firmware

version 3.0 and later have internal

memory; follow the procedure

described here to upload and

process the data. Earlier versions of

the 37-SI and 37-SIP did not have

internal memory; SBE Data

Processing cannot be used to

process the real-time data obtained

with these older instruments.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 3: Typical Data Processing Sequences SBE Data Processing

Processing SBE 39, 39-IM, and 48 Data

Program / Module Function

1. Seaterm

Use Upload button to upload data (in engineering

units) in ASCII (.asc) format. Use Convert button to

convert .asc to .cnv file, which can be used by

SBE Data Processing.

2. Sea Plot Plot data.

Processing SBE 39plus and 39plus-IM Data

Program / Module Function

1. SeatermV2

Use Upload button in appropriate program to upload

data (in engineering units) in XML and ASCII (.asc)

format. Use Convert XML data file in Tools menu of

Seaterm232 or SeatermIM (as applicable), or Convert

XML Data button in SeatermUSB to convert to .cnv

file, which can be used by SBE Data Processing.

2. Sea Plot Plot data.

Processing Glider Payload CTD Data (GPCTD)

The processing sequence is based on a typical situation with the Glider

Payload CTD acquiring data via Continuous Sampling.

Program / Module Function

1. Seaterm232 Upload data from memory (Upload menu in

Seaterm232).

2. Filter

Low-pass filter pressure to increase pressure

resolution for low-pass filter temperature and

conductivity to smooth high frequency data.

3. Align CTD

Advance conductivity, temperature, and oxygen

relative to pressure, to align parameters in time.

This ensures that calculations of salinity, dissolved

oxygen, and other parameters are made using

measurements from same parcel of water.

4. Cell Thermal

Mass

Perform conductivity cell thermal mass correction if

salinity accuracy of better than 0.01 PSU is desired in

regions with steep gradients.

5. Derive (EOS-80,

Practical Salinity)

Compute:

 Practical Salinity, density, and other parameters

 oxygen (optional)

Note that input file must include conductivity,

temperature, and pressure.

6. Derive TEOS-10

(TEOS-10,

Absolute Salinity)

(optional) Compute thermodynamic properties based

on TEOS-10.

Sea Plot Plot data.

Note:

The .cnv file from an SBE 39, 39-IM,

or 48 cannot be processed by any

SBE Data Processing modules

other than Sea Plot and ASCII Out.

Notes:

 The example assumes that a

configuration (.xmlcon) file is

available. A configuration file is

created by Seaterm232 when data

is uploaded from memory, based

on the factory configuration and

the calibration data programmed

into the instrument. An existing

configuration file can be modified

in Configure or Derive. If you do

not have a configuration file, you

can use SBE Data Processing’s

Configure menu to create the file.

 Use judgment in evaluating your

data set to determine the best

values for filtering, aligning, etc.

Note:

The .cnv file from an SBE 39plus or

39plus-IM cannot be processed by

any SBE Data Processing modules

other than Sea Plot and ASCII Out.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 4: Configuring Instrument (Configure) SBE Data Processing

Section 4: Configuring Instrument

(Configure)

Module Name Module Description

Configure Define instrument configuration and

calibration coefficients.

Introduction

Configure creates or modifies a configuration (.con or .xmlcon) file to define

the instrument configuration and sensor calibration coefficients. The .con or

.xmlcon file is used in both SBE Data Processing and in Seasave. Configure is

applicable to the following instruments:

 SBE 9plus with SBE 11plus Deck Unit or SBE 17plus Searam

(SBE 9plus is listed as the 911/917plus in the Configure menu)

 SBE 16

 SBE 16plus (including 16plus-IM)

 SBE 16plus V2 (including 16plus-IM V2)

 SBE 19

 SBE 19plus

 SBE 19plus V2

 SBE 21

 SBE 25

 SBE 25plus

 SBE 37

 SBE 45

 SBE 49

 SBE Glider Payload CTD

The discussion of Configure is in five parts:

 Instrument Configuration covers the Configuration dialog box - number

and type of sensors on the instrument, etc. - for each of the instruments

listed above. Unless noted otherwise, SBE Data Processing supports only

one of each brand and type of auxiliary sensor (for example, you cannot

specify two Chelsea Minitracka fluorometers, but you can specify a

Chelsea Minitracka and a Chelsea UV Aquatracka fluorometer). See the

individual sensor descriptions in Calibration Coefficients for Voltage

Sensors for those sensors that SBE Data Processing supports in a

redundant configuration (two or more of the same sensor interfacing with

the CTD).

 Calibration Coefficients for Frequency Sensors covers calculation of

coefficients for each type of frequency sensor (temperature, conductivity,

Digiquartz pressure, IOW sound velocity, etc.).

 Calibration Coefficients for A/D Count Sensors covers calculation of

coefficients for A/D count sensors (temperature and strain gauge pressure)

used on the SBE 16plus (and -IM), 16plus (and -IM) V2, 19plus,

19plus V2, 37, and 49.

 Calibration Coefficients for Voltage Sensors covers calculation of

coefficients for each type of voltage sensor (strain gauge pressure, oxygen,

pH, etc.).

 Calibration Coefficients for RS-232 Sensors covers specification of an

Aanderaa Optode, which can be integrated with an SBE 19plus V2.

Notes:

 Sea-Bird supplies a .con or

.xmlcon file with each instrument.

The file must match the existing

instrument configuration and

contain current sensor

calibration information.

Exception: An .xmlcon file is

generated by Seaterm232 when

you upload data from an SBE

Glider Payload CTD; Sea-Bird

does not provide the file.

 An existing .con or .xmlcon file can

be modified in Configure; in Data

Conversion, Derive, or Bottle

Summary; or in Seasave.

 Configuration files (.con or

.xmlcon) can also be opened,

viewed, and modified with

DisplayConFile.exe, a utility that is

installed in the same folder as SBE

Data Processing. Right click on the

desired configuration file, select

Open With, and select

DisplayConFile. This utility is often

used at Sea-Bird to quickly open

and view a configuration file for

troubleshooting purposes, without

needing to go through the

additional steps of selecting the file

in SBE Data Processing or

Seasave.

 Appendix II: Configure (.con or

.xmlcon) File Format contains a

line-by-line description of the

contents of a .con configuration

file.

 An SBE 37, 39, 39-IM, 39plus,

39plus-IM, and 48 stores

calibration coefficients internally,

and does not have a .con or

.xmlcon file.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 4: Configuring Instrument (Configure) SBE Data Processing

Access Configure by selecting the desired instrument in the Configure

menu in the SBE Data Processing window.

 Before selecting the instrument, review the status of Confirm

Configuration Change in the Configure menu. If Confirm Configuration

Change is selected, the program provides a prompt to save the

configuration (.con or .xmlcon) file if you make changes and then click the

Exit button in the Configuration dialog box without clicking Save or Save

As. If not selected, the program changes the Exit button to Save &

Exit; to exit without saving changes, use the Cancel button.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 4: Configuring Instrument (Configure) SBE Data Processing

Instrument Configuration

SBE 9plus Configuration



NMEA - Select if NMEA navigation

device used, and if NMEA depth

data and NMEA time data were

also appended. Seasave adds

current latitude, longitude, and

universal time code to data

header; appends NMEA data to

every scan; and writes NMEA data

to .nav file every time Ctrl F7 is

pressed or Add to .nav File is

clicked. Note: Whether NMEA

device was connected to a deck

unit or directly to computer during

data acquisition in Seasave has no

effect on data file used by SBE

Data Processing, and therefore

has no effect on data processing.

 Surface PAR - Select if Surface

PAR sensor used; must agree with

Deck Unit setup if 11plus firmware

< 5.0. Seasave appends Surface

PAR data to every scan. Adds 2

channels to Channel/Sensor table.

Do not decrease Voltage words

suppressed to reflect this; Voltage

words suppressed reflects only

external voltages going directly to

9plus from auxiliary sensors. See

Application Note 11S.

 Scan time – Select if Seasave

appended time (seconds since

January 1, 1970 GMT) to each

data scan.

Click a sensor and click

Modify to view/change

calibration coefficients for

that sensor.

Shaded sensors cannot be

removed or changed to

another type; others are

optional.

IEEE-448 or RS-232C for

CTD data interface between

Deck Unit and computer.

Channel/Sensor table reflects this

choice. Typically:

 0 = SBE 3 or 4 plugged into JB5

on 9plus (dual redundant sensor

configuration)

 1 = SBE 3 or 4 plugged into

JB4 on 9plus and not using JB5

connector (single redundant

sensor configuration)

 2 = no redundant T or C sensors

Click a (non-shaded) sensor and click

Select

to pick a different

sensor for that channel; dialog box with list of sensors appears.

After sensor is selected, dialog box for calibration coefficients

appears. Select sensors after Frequency channels suppressed

and Voltage words suppressed have been specified above.

Channel/Sensor table reflects this choice. Voltage channel 0 in .con or .xmlcon file

corresponds to sensor wired to channel 0 on end cap connector, voltage channel 1 to

sensor wired to channel 1 on end cap connector, etc. Total voltage words is 4; each word

contains data from two 12-

bit A/D channels. Deck Unit and Searam suppress words above

highest numbered voltage word used. Words to suppress = 4 - Words to Keep.

External Voltage (not spare) 0 or 1 2 or 3 4 or 5 6 or 7

Connector AUX 1 AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 4

Words to Keep 1 2 3 4

New

to create new .con or

.xmlcon file for this CTD.

Open to select different

.con or .xmlcon file.

Save or Save As to save

current .con or .xmlcon file

settings.

Return to SBE Data Processing window.

 If Confirm Configuration Change was selected in Configure menu - If you made

changes and did not Save or Save As, program asks if you want to save changes.

 If Confirm Configuration Change was not selected in Configure menu - Button says

Save & Exit. If you do not want to save changes, use Cancel button to exit.

For full rate (24 Hz) data, set to

1. Example: If scans to

average=24, Seasave averages

24 scans, saving data to

computer at 1 scan/second.

11plus > 5.0

: Seasave sends

AddSpar= command to Deck Unit,

consistent with configuration file

selection for Surface PAR.

11plus < 5.0: Surface PAR

acquisition is set in Deck Unit with

dip switch.

17plus: Data uploaded from 17plus

memory.

None: Not using 11plus or 17plus;

see Appendix I: Command Line

Operation.

Opens a .txt file (for viewing only; cannot be

modified) that shows all parameters in .con

or .xmlcon file. For command line generation

of report, see Appendix III: Generating .con

or .xmlcon File Reports – ConReport.exe.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 4: Configuring Instrument (Configure) SBE Data Processing

Shown below is an example status (DS) response in Seaterm that corresponds

to the setup shown in the Configuration dialog box above, for an SBE 9plus

used with an SBE 11plus Deck Unit. Shown below the appropriate lines are the

commands used in Seaterm to modify the setup of parameters critical to use of

the 9plus with Seasave and processing of data with

SBE Data Processing, as well as any explanatory information.

SBE 11plus V 5.1f

Number of scans to average = 1

(11plus reads this from .con or .xmlcon file in Seasave when data acquisition is

started.)

pressure baud rate = 9600

NMEA baud rate = 4800

surface PAR voltage added to scan

(11plus reads this from .con or .xmlcon file in Seasave when data acquisition is

started.)

A/D offset = 0

GPIB address = 1

(GPIB address must be 1 [GPIB=1] to use Seasave, if Computer interface is IEEE-

488 (GPIB) in .con or .xmlcon file.)

advance primary conductivity 0.073 seconds

advance secondary conductivity 0.073 seconds

autorun on power up is disabled

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 4: Configuring Instrument (Configure) SBE Data Processing

SBE 16 Seacat C-T Recorder Configuration

Shown below is an example status (DS) response in Seaterm that corresponds

to the setup shown in the Configuration dialog box above.

Shown below the appropriate lines are the commands used in Seaterm

to modify the setup of parameters critical to use of the SBE 16 with

Seasave and processing of data with SBE Data Processing, as well as any

explanatory information.

SEACAT V4.0h SERIAL NO. 1814 07/14/95 09:52:52.082

(If pressure sensor installed, pressure sensor information appears here in status

response; must match Pressure sensor type in .con or .xmlcon file.)

clk = 32767.789, iop = 103, vmain = 8.9, vlith = 5.9

sample interval = 15 sec

(Sample interval [SI] must match Sample interval seconds in .con or .xmlcon file.)

delay before measuring volts = 4 seconds

samples = 0, free = 173880, lwait = 0 msec

SW1 = C2H, battery cutoff = 5.6 volts

no. of volts sampled = 2

(Number of auxiliary voltage sensors enabled [SVn] must match External voltage

channels in .con or .xmlcon file.)

mode = normal

logdata = NO

Time between scans. Must agree with

SBE 16 setup (SI); see reply from DS.

Select if using with deck unit

connected to NMEA navigation

device. Seasave adds current

latitude, longitude, and universal time

code to data header; appends NMEA

data to every scan; and writes NMEA

data to .nav file every time Ctrl F7 is

pressed or Add to .nav File is clicked.

Strain gauge, Digiquartz with or without temperature

compensation, or no pressure sensor. If no pressure

sensor or Digiquartz without Temp Comp is selected,

Data button accesses dialog box to input additional

parameter(s) needed to process data.

Click a sensor

and click Modify

to change

calibration

coefficients for

that sensor.

New

to create new .con

or .xmlcon file for this

CTD.

Open to select different

.con or .xmlcon file.

Save or Save As to save

current .con or .xmlcon

file settings.

Opens a .txt file (for viewing only;

cannot be modified) that shows all

parameters in .con or .xmlcon file. For

command line generation of report,

see Appendix III: Generating .con or

.xmlcon File Reports – ConReport.exe.

Channel/Sensor table reflects this

choice. Must agree with SBE 16 setup

for SVn (n=0, 1, 2, 3, 4); see reply from

DS. Voltage channel 0 in .con or

.xmlcon file corresponds to sensor

wired to channel 0 on end cap

connector, voltage channel 1

corresponds to sensor wired to channel

1 on end cap connector, etc.

Shaded sensors cannot be removed

or changed to another type of

sensor. All others are optional.

Return to SBE Data Processing window.

 If Confirm Configuration Change was selected in Configure menu - If you made

changes and did not Save or Save As, program asks if you want to save changes.

 If Confirm Configuration Change was not selected in Configure menu - Button says

Save & Exit. If you do not want to save changes, use Cancel button to exit.

See reply from

. Used to determine strain gauge

pressure sensor data format.

Click a (non-shaded) sensor and click

Select

to pick a

different sensor for that channel. A dialog box with a

list of sensors appears. Select sensors after number

of voltage channels have been specified above.

Select if Seasave appended time (seconds since

January 1, 1970 GMT) to each data scan.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 4: Configuring Instrument (Configure) SBE Data Processing

SBE 16plus or 16plus-IM Seacat C-T Recorder Configuration

The SBE 16plus can interface with one SBE 38 secondary temperature sensor,

one SBE 50 pressure sensor, or up to two Pro-Oceanus Gas Tension Devices

(GTDs) through the SBE 16plus optional RS-232 connector. Data from an

SBE 50 pressure sensor is appended to the data stream, and does not replace the

(optional) internally mounted pressure sensor data.

The SBE 16plus-IM can interface with one SBE 38 secondary temperature

sensor through the 16plus-IM optional RS-232 connector, but cannot interface

with an SBE 50 or GTD. All commands to a particular 16plus-IM are

preceded by #ii, where ii = instrument ID (0-99). Therefore, commands

mentioned in the dialog box description below have a slightly different form for

the 16plus-IM (#iiDS, #iiPType=, #iiVoltN=, and #iiSampleInterval=).

Internally mounted pressure sensor: strain gauge, Digiquartz

with temperature compensation, or no pressure sensor. If no

pressure sensor is selected, Data button accesses a dialog box

to input additional parameter needed to process data. Must

agree with 16plus setup (PType=); see reply from DS. Selection

applies only to internally mounted pressure sensor; if instrument

has no internally mounted pressure sensor but is interfacing with

SBE 50 pressure sensor, select No pressure sensor here and

then select SBE 50 in Serial RS-232C sensor field below.

Note: Digiquartz without temperature compensation is not

applicable.

Click a sensor

and click Modify

to change

calibration

coefficients for

that sensor.

New

to create new .con or

.xmlcon file for this CTD.

Open to select different

.con or .xmlcon file.

Save or Save As to save

current .con or .xmlcon file

settings.

Channel/Sensor table reflects

this choice (0, 1, 2, 3, or 4).

Must agree with 16plus setup

for VoltN= (N=0, 1, 2, and 3);

see reply from DS. Voltage

channel 0 in .con or .xmlcon file

corresponds to first external

voltage in data stream, voltage

channel 1 to second external

voltage in data stream, etc.

Shaded sensors cannot be removed or changed to

another type of sensor. All others are optional.

Return to SBE Data Processing window.

 If Confirm Configuration Change was selected in Configure menu - If you made

changes and did not Save or Save As, program asks if you want to save changes.

 If Confirm Configuration Change was not selected in Configure menu - Button says

Save & Exit. If you do not want to save changes, use Cancel button to exit.

Select if using with deck unit

connected to a NMEA

navigation device. Seasave

adds current latitude, longitude,

and universal time code to data

header; appends NMEA data to

every scan; and writes NMEA

data to .nav file every time Ctrl

F7 is pressed or Add to .nav File

is clicked.

None, 1 SBE 38 (secondary temperature),

1 SBE 50 pressure sensor, or up to 2 GTDs

(dissolved oxygen or nitrogen). Must agree with

16plus setup; see reply from DS. Channel/Sensor

table lists RS-232 sensors below voltage channels.

Time between scans.

Must agree with 16plus setup

(SampleInterval=); see reply

from DS.

Click a (non-shaded) sensor and click

Select

to pick a different sensor for

that channel. A dialog box with a list of sensors appears. Select sensors

after number of voltage channels have been specified above.

Opens a .txt file (for viewing only; cannot

be modified) that shows all parameters in

.con or .xmlcon file. For command line

generation of report, see Appendix III:

Generating .con or .xmlcon File Reports –

ConReport.exe.

Note:

The SBE 16plus is available with an

optional RS-485 interface. All

commands to a particular 16plus with

RS-485 are preceded by #ii, where

ii = instrument ID (0-99). Therefore,

commands mentioned in the dialog

box description below have a slightly

different form for the RS-485 version

(#iiDS, #iiPType=, #iiVoltn=, and

#iiSampleInterval=).

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 4: Configuring Instrument (Configure) SBE Data Processing

Shown below is an example status (DS) response in Seaterm for a 16plus with

standard RS-232 interface that corresponds to the setup shown in the

Configuration dialog box above. Shown below the appropriate lines are the

commands used in Seaterm to modify the setup of parameters critical

to use of the SBE 16plus with Seasave and processing of data with

SBE Data Processing, as well as any explanatory information.

SBE 16plus V 1.6e SERIAL NO. 4300 03 Mar 2005 14:11:48

vbatt = 10.3, vlith = 8.5, ioper = 62.5 ma,

ipump = 21.6 ma, iext01 = 76.2 ma, iserial = 48.2 ma

status = not logging

sample interval = 10 seconds, number of measurements

per sample = 2

(Sample interval [SampleInterval=] must match Sample interval seconds in

.con or .xmlcon file.)

samples = 823, free = 465210

run pump during sample, delay before sampling =

2.0 seconds

transmit real-time = yes

(Real-time data transmission must be enabled [TxRealTime=Y] to acquire data

in Seasave.)

battery cutoff = 7.5 volts

pressure sensor = strain gauge, range = 1000.0

(Internal pressure sensor [PType=] must match Pressure sensor type in .con or

.xmlcon file.)

SBE 38 = yes, SBE 50 = no, Gas Tension Device = no

(Selection/enabling of RS-232 sensors [SBE38=, SBE50=, GTD=, DualGTD=] must

match Serial RS-232C sensor in .con or .xmlcon file.)

Ext Volt 0 = yes, Ext Volt 1 = yes, Ext Volt 2 = no, Ext

Volt 3 = no

(Number of external voltage sensors enabled [Volt0= through Volt3=] must match

External voltage channels in .con or .xmlcon file.)

echo commands = yes

output format = raw HEX

(Output format must be set to raw Hex [OutputFormat=0] to acquire data in

Seasave.)

serial sync mode disabled

(Serial sync mode must be disabled [SyncMode=N] to acquire data in Seasave.)

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 4: Configuring Instrument (Configure) SBE Data Processing

SBE 16plus V2 or 16plus-IM V2

SeaCAT C-T Recorder Configuration

Through the CTD’s RS-232 sensor connector, the SBE 16plus V2 and 16plus-

IM V2 can interface with an SBE 38 secondary temperature sensor, SBE 50

pressure sensor, SBE 63 Optical Dissolved Oxygen Sensor, WET Labs sensor

[single, dual, or triple channel ECO; WETStar; or C-Star], WET Labs SeaOWL

UV-A, Optode, or up to two Pro-Oceanus Gas Tension Devices (GTDs). This

data is appended to the data stream; SBE 38 and SBE 50 data does not replace

the internal CTD data.

All commands to a particular 16plus-IM V2 are preceded by #ii, where ii =

instrument ID (0-99). Therefore, commands mentioned in the dialog box

description below have a slightly different form for the 16plus-IM V2

(#iiGetCD, #iiDS, #iiPType=, #iiVoltN=, and #iiSampleInterval=).

Note:

The Satlantic SeaFET pH sensor and

WET Labs SeaOWL are not currently

compatible with the SBE 16plus-IM

V2. We expect to add compatibility in

the future.

Internally mounted pressure sensor: strain gauge, Digiquartz

with temperature compensation, or no pressure sensor. If no

pressure sensor is selected, Data button accesses dialog box to

input additional parameter needed to process data. Must agree

with 16plus V2 setup (PType=); see reply from GetCD or DS.

Selection applies only to internally mounted pressure sensor; if

16plus V2 has no internally mounted pressure sensor but is

interfacing with SBE 50 pressure sensor, select No pressure

sensor here and then select SBE 50 in Serial RS-232C sensor

field below. Note: Digiquartz without temperature compensation

is not applicable.

Click a sensor

and click Modify

to change

calibration

coefficients for

that sensor.

New

to create new .con or

.xmlcon file for this CTD.

Open to select different

.con or .xmlcon file.

Save or Save As to save

current .con or .xmlcon file

settings.

Channel/Sensor table reflects

this choice (0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6).

Must agree with 16plus V2

setup for VoltN= (N=0, 1, 2, 3,

4, and 5); see reply from GetCD

or DS. Voltage channel 0 in .con

or .xmlcon file corresponds to

first external voltage in data

stream, voltage channel 1 to

second external voltage in data

stream, etc.

Shaded sensors cannot be removed or changed to

another type of sensor. All others are optional.

Return to SBE Data Processing window.

 If Confirm Configuration Change was selected in Configure menu - If you made

changes and did not Save or Save As, program asks if you want to save changes.

 If Confirm Configuration Change was not selected in Configure menu - Button says

Save & Exit. If you do not want to save changes, use Cancel button to exit.

Select if using with deck unit

connected to a NMEA

navigation device. Seasave

adds current latitude, longitude,

and universal time code to data

header; appends NMEA data to

every scan; and writes NMEA

data to .nav file every time Ctrl

F7 is pressed or Add to .nav File

is clicked.

None, SBE 38 (secondary temperature), SBE 50

(pressure), SBE 63 (optical DO), WET Labs sensor

(up to 3 channels), WET Labs SeaOWL UV-A , up to

2 GTDs (DO or nitrogen), or Optode. Must agree with

16plus V2 setup; see reply from GetCD or DS.

Channel/Sensor table lists RS-232 sensors below

voltage channels.

Time between scans. Must

agree with 16plus V2 setup

(SampleInterval=); see reply

from GetCD or DS.

Click a (non-shaded) sensor and click

Select

to pick a different sensor for

that channel. A dialog box with a list of sensors appears. Select sensors

after number of voltage channels have been specified above.

Opens a .txt file (for viewing only; cannot

be modified) that shows all parameters in

.con or .xmlcon file. For command line

generation of report, see Appendix III:

Generating .con or .xmlcon File Reports –

ConReport.exe.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 4: Configuring Instrument (Configure) SBE Data Processing

Shown below is an example status (DS) response in a terminal program for a

16plus V2 with RS-232 interface that corresponds to the setup shown in the

Configuration dialog box above. Shown below the appropriate lines are the

commands used in the terminal program to modify the setup of parameters

critical to use of the SBE 16plus V2 with Seasave and processing of data with

SBE Data Processing, as well as any explanatory information.

SBE 16plus V 3.1.8 SERIAL NO. 50175 13 Apr 2016 14:11:48

vbatt = 10.3, vlith = 8.5, ioper = 62.5 ma,

ipump = 21.6 ma, iext01 = 76.2 ma, iserial = 48.2 ma

status = not logging

samples = 0, free = 3463060

sample interval = 10 seconds, number of measurements

per sample = 1

(Sample interval [SampleInterval=] must match Sample interval seconds in

.con or .xmlcon file.)

pump = run pump during sample, delay before sampling =

2.0 seconds, delay after sampling = 0.0 seconds

transmit real-time = yes

(Real-time data transmission must be enabled [TxRealTime=Y] to acquire data

in Seasave.)

battery cutoff = 7.5 volts

pressure sensor = strain gauge, range = 1000.0

(Internal pressure sensor [PType=] must match Pressure sensor type in .con or .xmlcon

file.)

SBE 38 = yes, SBE 50 = no, WETLABS = no, OPTODE = no,

SBE63 = no, Gas Tension Device = no

(Selection/enabling of RS-232 sensors [SBE38=, SBE50=, WetLabs=, Optode=, SBE63=,

GTD=, DualGTD=] must match Serial RS-232C sensor in .con or .xmlcon file.)

Ext Volt 0 = yes, Ext Volt 1 = yes,

Ext Volt 2 = no, Ext Volt 3 = no,

Ext Volt4 = no, Ext Volt 5 = no

(Number of external voltage sensors enabled [Volt0= through Volt5=] must match

External voltage channels in .con or .xmlcon file.)

echo characters = yes

output format = raw HEX

(Output format must be set to raw Hex [OutputFormat=0] to acquire data in Seasave.)

serial sync mode disabled

(Serial sync mode must be disabled [SyncMode=N] to acquire data in Seasave.)

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 4: Configuring Instrument (Configure) SBE Data Processing

SBE 19 Seacat Profiler Configuration

Seasave and SBE Data Processing always treat the SBE 19 as if it is a Profiling

instrument (i.e., it is in Profiling mode). If your SBE 19 is in Moored Mode,

you must treat it like an SBE 16 (when setting up the .con or .xmlcon file,

select the SBE 16).

See reply from

. Used to determine strain

gauge pressure sensor data format.

Number of 0.5 second intervals

between samples. Must agree with

SBE 19 setup (SR); see reply from DS.



NMEA - Select if NMEA navigation device

used, and if NMEA depth data and NMEA time

data were also appended. Seasave adds

current latitude, longitude, and universal time

code to data header; appends NMEA data to

every scan; and writes NMEA data to .nav file

every time Ctrl F7 is pressed or Add to .nav

File is clicked.

Note: Whether NMEA device was connected to

a deck unit or directly to computer during data

acquisition in Seasave has no effect on data

file used by SBE Data Processing, and

therefore has no effect on data processing.

 Surface PAR - Select if using with deck unit

connected to Surface PAR sensor. Seasave

appends Surface PAR data to every scan.

Adds 2 channels to Channel/Sensor table.

Do not increase External voltage channels

to reflect this; External voltage channels

reflects only external voltages going

directly to SBE 19 from auxiliary sensors.

See Application Note 47.

 Scan time added - Select if Seasave

appended time (seconds since January 1,

1970 GMT) to each data scan.

Strain gauge or Digiquartz with

temperature compensation.

Click a sensor

and click Modify

to change

calibration

coefficients for

that sensor.

New

to create new

.con or .xmlcon file

for this CTD.

Open to select

different .con or

.xmlcon file.

Save or Save As to

save current .con or

.xmlcon file settings.

Shaded sensors

cannot be

removed or

changed to

another type of

sensor. All others

are optional.

Return to SBE Data Processing window.

 If Confirm Configuration Change was selected in

Configure menu - If you made changes and did

not Save or Save As, program asks if you want to

save changes.

 If Confirm Configuration Change was not selected

in Configure menu - Button says Save & Exit. If

you do not want to save changes, use Cancel

button to exit.

Opens a .txt file (for viewing only;

cannot be modified) that shows all

parameters in .con or .xmlcon file. For

command line generation of report, see

Appendix III: Generating .con or

.xmlcon File Reports – ConReport.exe.

Click a (non-shaded) sensor and click

Select

to pick a different sensor

for that channel. A dialog box with a list of sensors appears. Select

sensors after number of voltage channels have been specified above.

Channel/Sensor table reflects this choice.

Must

agree with SBE 19 setup for SVn (n=0, 2, or

4); see reply from DS. Voltage channel 0 in

.con or .xmlcon file corresponds to sensor

wired to channel 0 on end cap connector,

voltage channel 1 corresponds to sensor wired

to channel 1 on end cap connector, etc.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 4: Configuring Instrument (Configure) SBE Data Processing

Shown below is an example status (DS) response in Seaterm that corresponds

to the setup shown in the Configuration dialog box above.

Shown below the appropriate lines are the commands used in Seaterm

to modify the setup of parameters critical to use of the SBE 19 with

Seasave and processing of data with SBE Data Processing, as well as any

explanatory information.

SEACAT PROFILER V3.1B SN 936 02/10/94 13:33:23.989

strain gauge pressure sensor: S/N = 12345,

range = 1000 psia, tc = 240

(Pressure sensor (strain gauge or Digiquartz) must match Pressure sensor type in

.con or .xmlcon file.)

clk = 32767.766 iop = 172 vmain = 8.1 vlith = 5.8

mode = PROFILE ncasts = 0

(Mode must be profile [MP] if setting up .con or .xmlcon file for SBE 19; create

.con or .xmlcon file for SBE 16 for SBE 19 in moored mode [MM].)

sample rate = 1 scan every 0.5 seconds

(Sample rate [SR] must match 0.5 second intervals in .con or .xmlcon file.)

minimum raw conductivity frequency for pump turn on =

3206 hertz

pump delay = 40 seconds

samples = 0 free = 174126 lwait = 0 msec

battery cutoff = 7.2 volts

number of voltages sampled = 2

(Number of auxiliary voltage sensors enabled [SVn] must match External voltage

channels in .con or .xmlcon file.)

logdata = NO

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 4: Configuring Instrument (Configure) SBE Data Processing

SBE 19plus Seacat Profiler Configuration

Must agree with 19plus setup (

for Profiing

mode, MM for Moored mode); see reply from DS.



NMEA - Select if NMEA navigation

device used, and if NMEA depth

data and NMEA time data were

also appended. Seasave adds

current latitude, longitude, and

universal time code to data

header; appends NMEA data to

every scan; and writes NMEA data

to .nav file every time Ctrl F7 is

pressed or Add to .nav File is

clicked.

Note: Whether NMEA device was

connected to a deck unit or directly

to computer during data

acquisition in Seasave has no

effect on data file used by SBE

Data Processing, and therefore

has no effect on data processing.

 Surface PAR - Select if using with

deck unit connected to Surface

PAR sensor. Seasave appends

Surface PAR data to every scan.

Adds 2 channels to

Channel/Sensor table. Do not

increase External voltage channels

to reflect this; External voltage

channels reflects only external

voltages going directly to 19plus

from auxiliary sensors. See

Application Note 47.

 Scan time added - Select if

Seasave appended time (seconds

since January 1, 1970 GMT) to

each data scan.

Strain gauge (only selection

applicable to 19plus).

Click a (non-shaded) sensor and click

Select

to pick a

different sensor for that channel. Dialog box with a list of

sensors appears. Select sensors after number of voltage

channels have been specified above.

Click a sensor

and click

Modify to

change

calibration

coefficients for

that sensor.

New

to create new

.con or .xmlcon file

for this CTD.

Open to select

different .con or

.xmlcon file.

Save or Save As

to save current

.con or .xmlcon file

settings.

Channel/Sensor table reflects this

choice (0, 1, 2, 3, or 4). Must agree

with 19plus setup for VoltN=

(N=0, 1, 2,and 3); see reply from

DS. Voltage channel 0 in .con or

.xmlcon file corresponds to first

external voltage in data stream,

voltage channel 1 to second

external voltage in data stream,

etc.

Shaded sensors

cannot be

removed or

changed to

another type of

sensor. All others

are optional.

Return to SBE Data Processing window.

 If Confirm Configuration Change was selected in

Configure menu - If you made changes and did not Save

or Save As, program asks if you want to save changes.

 If Confirm Configuration Change was not selected in

Configure menu - Button says Save & Exit. If you do not

want to save changes, use Cancel button to exit.

Interval between scans in

Moored

mode. Must agree with 19plus

setup (SampleInterval=

); see reply

from DS.

Number of samples to average (samples at 4 Hz)

in Profiling mode. Must agree with 19plus setup

(NAvg=); see reply from DS.

Opens a .txt file (for viewing only;

cannot be modified) that shows all

parameters in .con or .xmlcon file.

For command line generation of

report, see Appendix III:

Generating .con or .xmlcon File

Reports – ConReport.exe.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 4: Configuring Instrument (Configure) SBE Data Processing

Shown below is an example status (DS) response in Seaterm that corresponds

to the setup shown in the Configuration dialog box above.

Shown below the appropriate lines are the commands used in Seaterm

to modify the setup of parameters critical to use of the 19plus with

Seasave and processing of data with SBE Data Processing, as well as any

explanatory information.

SeacatPlus V 1.5 SERIAL NO. 4000 22 May 2005 14:02:13

vbatt = 9.6, vlith = 8.6, ioper = 61.2 ma,

ipump = 25.5 ma, iext01 = 76.2 ma, iext23 = 65.1 ma

status = not logging

number of scans to average = 1

(Scans to average [NAvg=] must match Scans to Average in .con or .xmlcon file.)

samples = 0, free = 381300, casts = 0

mode = profile, minimum cond freq = 3000,

pump delay = 60 sec

(Mode [MP for profile or MM for moored] must match Mode in .con or .xmlcon

file.)

autorun = no, ignore magnetic switch = no

battery type = ALKALINE, battery cutoff = 7.3 volts

pressure sensor = strain gauge, range = 1000.0

(Pressure sensor [PType=] must match Pressure sensor type in .con or .xmlcon file.)

SBE 38 = no, Gas Tension Device = no

(RS-232 sensors (which are used for custom applications only) must be disabled to

use Seasave.)

Ext Volt 0 = yes, Ext Volt 1 = yes, Ext Volt 2 = yes,

Ext Volt 3 = yes

(Number of external voltage sensors enabled [Volt0= through Volt3=] must match

External voltage channels in .con or .xmlcon file.)

echo commands = yes

output format = raw Hex

(Output format must be set to raw Hex [OutputFormat=0] to acquire data

in Seasave.)

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 4: Configuring Instrument (Configure) SBE Data Processing

SBE 19plus V2 SeaCAT Profiler Configuration

Through the CTD’s RS-232 sensor connector, the SBE 19plus V2 can interface

with an SBE 38 secondary temperature sensor, SBE 63 Optical Dissolved

oxygen sensor, WET Labs sensor [single, dual, or triple channel ECO;

WETStar; or C-Star], WET Labs SeaOWL UV-A, Optode, or up to two Pro-

Oceanus Gas Tension Devices (GTDs). This data is appended to the data

stream; SBE 38 data does not replace the internal

19plus V2 temperature data.

Must agree with 19

plus

V2 setup (

for Profiing mode,

MM for Moored mode); see reply from GetCD or DS.



NMEA - Select if NMEA navigation

device used, and if NMEA depth

data and NMEA time data were

also appended. Seasave adds

current latitude, longitude, and

universal time code to data

header; appends NMEA data to

every scan; and writes NMEA data

to .nav file every time Ctrl F7 is

pressed or Add to .nav File is

clicked.

Note: Whether NMEA device was

connected to a deck unit or directly

to computer during data

acquisition in Seasave has no

effect on data file used by SBE

Data Processing, and therefore

has no effect on data processing.

 Surface PAR - Select if using with

deck unit connected to Surface

PAR sensor. Seasave appends

Surface PAR data to every scan.

Adds 2 channels to

Channel/Sensor table. Do not

increase External voltage channels

to reflect this; External voltage

channels reflects only external

voltages going directly to

19plus V2 from auxiliary sensors.

See Application Note 47.

 Scan time added - Select if

Seasave appended time (seconds

since January 1, 1970 GMT) to

each data scan.

Strain gauge or Digiquartz with

temperature compensation.

Click a (non-shaded) sensor and click

Select

to pick a

different sensor for that channel. Dialog box with a list of

sensors appears. Select sensors after number of voltage

channels have been specified above.

Click a sensor

and click

Modify to

change

calibration

coefficients for

that sensor.

New

to create new

.con or .xmlcon file

for this CTD.

Open to select

different .con or

.xmlcon file.

Save or Save As

to save current

.con or .xmlcon file

settings.

Channel/Sensor table reflects this

choice (0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6). Must

agree with 19plus V2 setup for

VoltN=

(N=0, 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5); see

reply from GetCD or DS. Voltage

channel 0 in .con or .xmlcon file

corresponds to first external

voltage in data stream, voltage

channel 1 to second external

voltage in data stream, etc.

Shaded sensors

cannot be removed

or changed to

another type of

sensor. All others are

optional.

Return to SBE Data Processing window.

 If Confirm Configuration Change was selected in Configure menu - If you made

changes and did not Save or Save As, program asks if you want to save changes.

 If Confirm Configuration Change was not selected in Configure menu - Button says

Save & Exit. If you do not want to save changes, use Cancel button to exit.

Interval between scans in

Moored

mode. Must agree with 19plus V2

setup (SampleInterval=

); see reply

from GetCD or DS.

Number of samples to average (samples at 4 Hz)

in Profiling mode. Must agree with 19plus V2

setup (NAvg=); see reply from GetCD or DS.

None, SBE 38 (secondary temperature), SBE 63

(optical DO), WET Labs sensor (up to 3 channels),

WET Labs SeaOWL UV-A , up to 2 GTDs (DO or

nitrogen), or Optode. Must agree with 19plus V2

setup; see reply from GetCD or DS. Channel/Sensor

table lists RS-232 sensors below voltage channels.

Opens a .txt file (for viewing only; cannot

be modified) that shows all parameters in

.con or .xmlcon file. For command line

generation of report, see Appendix III:

Generating .con or .xmlcon File Reports –

ConReport.exe.

Note:

Pro-Oceanus Gas Tension Device

can only be used when 19plus V2 is

in Moored mode.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 4: Configuring Instrument (Configure) SBE Data Processing

Shown below is an example status (DS) response in a terminal program that

corresponds to the setup shown in the Configuration dialog box above.

Shown below the appropriate lines are the commands used in the terminal

program to modify the setup of parameters critical to use of the 19plus V2 with

Seasave and processing of data with SBE Data Processing, as well as any

explanatory information.

SBE 19plus V 3.1.8 SERIAL NO. 4000 13 Apr 2016 14:02:13

vbatt = 9.6, vlith = 8.6, ioper = 61.2 ma,

ipump = 25.5 ma, iext01 = 76.2 ma, iext2345 = 65.1 ma

status = not logging

number of scans to average = 1

(Scans to average [NAvg=] must match Scans to Average in .con or .xmlcon file.)

samples = 0, free = 4386532, casts = 0

mode = profile, minimum cond freq = 3000,

pump delay = 60 sec

(Mode [MP for profile or MM for moored] must match Mode in .con or .xmlcon

file.)

autorun = no, ignore magnetic switch = no

battery type = ALKALINE, battery cutoff = 7.5 volts

pressure sensor = strain gauge, range = 1000.0

(Pressure sensor [PType=] must match Pressure sensor type in .con or .xmlcon file.)

SBE 38 = no, WETLABS = no, OPTODE = no, SBE63 = no,

Gas Tension Device = no

(Selection/enabling of RS-232 sensors [SBE38=, WetLabs=, Optode=, SBE63=,

GTD=, DualGTD=] must match Serial RS-232C sensor in .con or .xmlcon file.)

Ext Volt 0 = yes, Ext Volt 1 = yes,

Ext Volt 2 = yes, Ext Volt 3 = yes,

Ext Volt 4 = no, Ext Volt 5 = no

(Number of external voltage sensors enabled [Volt0= through Volt3=] must match

External voltage channels in .con or .xmlcon file.)

echo characters = yes

output format = raw Hex

(Output format must be set to raw Hex [OutputFormat=0] to acquire data

in Seasave.)

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 4: Configuring Instrument (Configure) SBE Data Processing

SBE 21 Thermosalinograph Configuration

In July 2009, Sea-Bird updated the SBE 21 electronics and firmware. As a

result, there were some changes in capabilities and in commands.

 Firmware version < 5.0 – Depending on serial number, these SBE 21s

may be integrated with an SBE 38 remote temperature sensor (if SBE 21

equipped with 4-pin remote temperature connector) or an SBE 3 remote

temperature sensor (if SBE 21 equipped with 3-pin remote temperature

connector).

 Firmware version > 5.0 – These SBE 21s are compatible with an SBE 38

remote temperature sensor, and are not compatible with an SBE 3 remote

temperature sensor.

Channel/Sensor table reflects this choice.

Must agree with SBE 21 setup for SV=x (firmware > 5.0) or

SVx (firmware < 5.0) (x=0, 1, 2, 3, or 4 channels); see reply

from DS. Voltage channel 0 in .con or .xmlcon file

corresponds to sensor wired to channel 0 on end cap

connector, voltage channel 1 corresponds to sensor wired

to channel 1 on end cap connector, etc.

NMEA

- Select if NMEA

navigation device used, and if

NMEA depth data and NMEA

time data were also appended.

Seasave adds current latitude,

longitude, and universal time

code to data header; appends

NMEA data to every scan; and

writes NMEA data to .nav file

every time Ctrl F7 is pressed or

Add to .nav File is clicked.

Note: NMEA time can only be

appended if NMEA device

connected to computer.

Note: Whether NMEA device

was connected to a deck unit

or directly to computer during

data acquisition in Seasave

has no effect on data file used

by SBE Data Processing,

and therefore has no effect on

data processing.

Click a sensor

and click Modify

to change

calibration

coefficients for

that sensor.

New

to create new .con

or .xmlcon file for this

CTD.

Open to select different

.con or .xmlcon file.

Save or Save As to

save current .con or

.xmlcon file settings.

Opens a .txt file (for viewing

only;

cannot be modified) that shows

all parameters in .con or .xmlcon

file. For command line

generation of report, see

Appendix III: Generating .con or

.xmlcon File Reports –

ConReport.exe.

Channel/Sensor table reflects this choice (shows RS-232 channel if SBE 38 selected, or additional

frequency-based temperature channel if SBE 3 selected). Must agree with SBE 21 setup (SBE38=

and SBE3=); see reply from DS. If remote temperature is selected, Seasave, Data Conversion, and

Derive use remote temperature data when calculating density and sound velocity.

Shaded sensors cannot be removed or changed to

another type of sensor. All others are optional.

Return to SBE Data Processing window.

 If Confirm Configuration Change was selected in

Configure menu - If you made changes and did

not Save or Save As, program asks if you want to

save changes.

 If Confirm Configuration Change was not selected

in Configure menu - Button says Save & Exit. If

you do not want to save changes, use Cancel

button to exit.

Click a (non-shaded) sensor and click

Select

to pick a different sensor for that

channel. A dialog box with a list of sensors appears. Select sensors after

number of voltage and frequency channels have been specified above.

Time between scans. Must agree with

SBE 21 setup (SI= for firmware > 5.0 or SI

for firmware < 5.0); see reply from DS.

Select if Seasave appended time (seconds since

January 1, 1970 GMT) to each data scan.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 4: Configuring Instrument (Configure) SBE Data Processing

Shown below is an example status (DS) response in Seaterm that corresponds

to the setup shown in the Configuration dialog box above.

Shown below the appropriate lines are the commands used in Seaterm

to modify the setup of parameters critical to use of the SBE 21 with

Seasave and processing of data with SBE Data Processing, as well as any

explanatory information.

SEACAT THERMOSALINOGRAPH V5.0 SERIAL NO. 4300 07/15/2009

14:23:14

ioper = 50.7 ma, vmain = 11.4, vlith = 8.8

samples = 0, free = 5981649

sample interval = 5 seconds, no. of volts sampled = 1

(Sample interval [SI=] must match Sample interval seconds in .con or .xmlcon file.

Number of auxiliary voltage sensors enabled [SV=] must match External voltage

channels in .con or .xmlcon file.)

sample external SBE 38 temperature sensor

(External temperature sensor [SBE38=] must match Remote temperature in .con or

.xmlcon file, this line appears only if SBE 38 is enabled [SBE38=Y])

output format = SBE21

(Output format must be set to SBE 21 [F1] to acquire data in Seasave.)

start sampling when power on = yes

average data during sample interval = yes

logging data = no

voltage cutoff = 7.5 volts

Note:

The status response shown is for an

SBE 21 with firmware > 5.0. The

response, and the commands used

to change the sample interval and the

number of auxiliary voltage sensors,

differs for older firmware.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 4: Configuring Instrument (Configure) SBE Data Processing

SBE 25 Sealogger Configuration

Channel/Sensor table reflects this choice (0 - 7). Must

agree with SBE 25 setup (CC); see reply from DS.

Voltage channel 0 in .con or .xmlcon file corresponds to

first external voltage in data stream, voltage channel 1 to

second external voltage in data stream, etc.

Used to determine strain gauge

pressure sensor data format. See

reply from DS.



NMEA - Select if NMEA navigation

device used, and if NMEA depth

data and NMEA time data were

also appended. Seasave adds

current latitude, longitude, and

universal time code to data

header; appends NMEA data to

every scan; and writes NMEA data

to .nav file every time Ctrl F7 is

pressed or Add to .nav File is

clicked.

Note: Whether NMEA device was

connected to a deck unit or directly

to computer during data

acquisition in Seasave has no

effect on data file used by SBE

Data Processing, and therefore

has no effect on data processing.

 Surface PAR - Select if using with

deck unit connected to Surface

PAR sensor. Seasave appends

Surface PAR data to every scan.

Adds 2 channels to

Channel/Sensor table. Do not

increase External voltage channels

to reflect this; External voltage

channels reflects only external

voltages going directly to SBE 25

from auxiliary sensor See

Application Note 47.

 Scan time added - Select if

Seasave appended time (seconds

since January 1, 1970 GMT) to

each data scan.

Click a sensor

and click Modify

to change

calibration

coefficients for

that sensor.

New

to create new .con

or .xmlcon file for this

CTD.

Open to select different

.con or .xmlcon file.

Save or Save As to save

current .con or .xmlcon

file settings.

Shaded sensors

cannot be removed

or changed to

another type of

sensor. All others

are optional.

Return to SBE Data Processing window.

 If Confirm Configuration Change was selected in

Configure menu - If you made changes and did

not Save or Save As, program asks if you want to

save changes.

 If Confirm Configuration Change was not selected

in Configure menu - Button says Save & Exit. If

you do not want to save changes, use Cancel

button to exit.

Opens a .txt file (for viewing

only; cannot be modified)

that shows all parameters in

.con or .xmlcon file.

For command line generation

of report, see Appendix III:

Generating .con or

.xmlcon File Reports –

ConReport.exe.

Click a (non-shaded) sensor and click

Select

to pick a different sensor for that channel.

A dialog box with a list of sensors appears.

Select sensors after number of voltage

channels have been specified above.

1, 2, 4, or 8 scans/second. Must agree with

SBE 25 setup (CC); see reply from DS.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 4: Configuring Instrument (Configure) SBE Data Processing

Shown below is an example status (DS) response in Seaterm that corresponds

to the setup shown in the Configuration dialog box above.

Shown below the appropriate lines are the commands used in Seaterm

to modify the setup of parameters critical to use of the SBE 25 with

Seasave and processing of data with SBE Data Processing, as well as any

explanatory information.

SBE 25 CTD V 4.1a SN 323 04/26/02 14:02:13

external pressure sensor, range = 5076 psia, tcval = -55

xtal=9437363 clk=32767.107 vmain=10.1 iop=175 vlith=5.6

ncasts=0 samples=0 free = 54980 lwait = 0 msec

stop upcast when CTD ascends 30 % of full scale pressure

sensor range (2301 counts)

CTD configuration:

number of scans averaged=1, data stored at 8 scans

per second

real time data transmitted at 1 scans per second

(real-time data transmission [CC] must match Real time data output rate in

.con or .xmlcon file.)

minimum conductivity frequency for pump turn on = 2950

pump delay = 45 seconds

battery type = ALKALINE

2 external voltages sampled

(Number of auxiliary voltage sensors enabled [CC] must match External voltage

channels in .con or .xmlcon file.)

stored voltage #0 = external voltage 0

stored voltage #1 = external voltage 1

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 4: Configuring Instrument (Configure) SBE Data Processing

SBE 25plus Sealogger Configuration

Return to SBE Data Processing window.

 If Confirm Configuration Change was selected in

Configure menu - If you made changes and did

not Save or Save As, program asks if you want to

save changes.

 If Confirm Configuration Change was not selected

in Configure menu - Button says Save & Exit. If

you do not want to save changes, use Cancel

button to exit.

Opens a .txt file (for viewing

only; cannot be modified)

that shows all parameters in

.con or .xmlcon file.

For command line generation

of report, see Appendix III:

Generating .con or

.xmlcon File Reports –

ConReport.exe.



New to create new .xmlcon file for

this CTD.

 Open to select different .xmlcon file.

 Save or Save As to save current

.xmlcon file settings.

Shaded

sensors cannot

be removed or

changed to

another type of

sensor.

Click a (non-

shaded) sensor and

click Select to pick

a different sensor

for that channel. A

dialog box with a

list of sensors

appears.

Click a sensor and

click Modify to

change calibration

coefficients for that

sensor.



.XML file – if selected,

selections on Real-

Time Options tab are

grayed out.

 .HEX file - if selected,

selections on Serial

Sensors tab are

grayed out.

If processing .HEX file collected in Seasave, must match settings used in Seasave for real-

time data acquisition. If processing .XML file uploaded from memory, selections of real-time

data from voltage channels have no effect.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 4: Configuring Instrument (Configure) SBE Data Processing

If you selected Process .XML file uploaded from CTD memory, click the Serial

Sensors tab.

Note:

This tab is grayed out if you selected

Collect real-time data with Seasave

and/or process real-time .HEX file on

the first tab, because the 25plus does

not transmit real-time serial sensor

data.

25plus collected serial sensor data

ifSetEnableSer1=Y. Serial sensor data

was included in CTD .xml data file in

memory if SetInlineSer1=Y. Otherwise, it

was placed in a separate .txt file (which

cannot be processed by SBE Data

Processing); if in a .txt file, all selections

are grayed out.

25plus collected serial sensor data

ifSetEnableSer2=Y. Serial sensor data

was included in CTD .xml data file in

memory if SetInlineSer2=Y. Otherwise, it

was placed in a separate .txt file (which

cannot be processed by SBE Data

Processing); if in a .txt file, all selections

are grayed out.

Select serial sensor that is on

each serial channel: None,

SBE 38, SBE 50, SBE 63,

WET Labs sensor (up to

3 channels), or WET Labs

SeaOWL UV-A.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 4: Configuring Instrument (Configure) SBE Data Processing

If you selected Collect real-time data with Seasave and/or process real-time

.HEX file, click the Real-Time Options tab.

Note:

This tab is grayed out if you selected

Process .XML file uploaded from CTD

memory on the first tab, because data

is memory is always saved at 16 Hz,

and NMEA, Surface PAR, and scan

time data is not available in an

uploaded file.

Must agree with

SetHistoricRate=

25plus. See reply from GetCD.

NMEA

Select if NMEA navigation device

used, and whether NMEA device is

connected directly to Deck Unit or to

computer. You can also append NMEA

depth data (3 bytes) and NMEA time data

(4 bytes) after Lat/Lon data. Seasave

adds current latitude, longitude, and

universal time code to data header;

appends NMEA data to every scan; and

writes NMEA data to .nav file every time

Ctrl F7 is pressed or Add to .nav File is

clicked. Note: Whether NMEA device was

connected to a deck unit or directly to

computer during data acquisition in

Seasave has no effect on data file used

by SBE Data Processing, and therefore

has no effect on data processing.

Select if Seasave

appended time

(seconds since

January 1, 1970

GMT) to each

data scan.

Select if using with deck

unit connected to Surface

PAR sensor. Seasave

appends Surface PAR

data to every scan.

Enter/verify calibration

coefficients for Surface PAR

sensor. See Application Note 47.

Select if deck unit used, and select

baud rate at which CTD was set to

communicate.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 4: Configuring Instrument (Configure) SBE Data Processing

Shown below is an example status (GetCD) response in Seaterm232 that

corresponds to the setup shown in the Configuration dialog box above.

Shown below the appropriate lines are the commands used in Seaterm 232

to modify the setup of parameters critical to use of the SBE 25plus with

Seasave and processing of data with SBE Data Processing, as well as any

explanatory information.

S>getcd

</SerialPort0>

(serial sensor 1 setup data)

</SerialPort1>

(serial sensor 2 setup data)

</SerialPort2>

</Serial>

(assorted settings)

</Settings>

</RealTimeOutput>

</ConfigurationData>

(Number of auxiliary voltage sensors enabled [SetVOut#=] must match real-time

output selection in .xmlcon file.)

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 4: Configuring Instrument (Configure) SBE Data Processing

SBE 37 MicroCAT C-T Recorder Configuration

The .xmlcon file for the SBE 37 is created by SeatermV2 (version 1.1 and later)

when you upload data from the SBE 37. Note that you cannot save the SBE 37

configuration as a .con file.

Notes:

 The SBE 37 is available with an

RS-232, Inductive Modem (IM

series), or RS-485 interface. All

commands to a particular 37 with IM

or RS-485 interface are preceded by

#ii, where ii = instrument ID

(0-99). Therefore, commands

mentioned in the dialog box

description below have a slightly

different form for these versions

(#iiGetCD, #iiDS, #iiDC, etc.).

 Commands shown here are for the

current SBE 37 firmware versions.

See the appropriate SBE 37 manual

for commands for your instrument.

Note:

For 37-SI, SIP: Sample interval seconds in the .xmlcon file is based on:

 If SampleMode=2: SampleInterval=

 If SampleMode=3:

Firmware < 4.0 - 1 sec if SBE 37 has no pressure sensor, 1.5 sec if SBE 37 has pressure sensor

Firmware > 4.0 – 0.9 sec if SBE 37 has no pressure sensor, 1.3 sec if SBE 37 has pressure sensor

Click a sensor and

click Modify to

change calibration

coefficients for that

sensor.

New

to create new .con or

.xmlcon file for this CTD.

Open to select different

.con or .xmlcon file.

Save or Save As to save

current .con or .xmlcon file

settings.

Indicates if SBE 37 includes integrated

dissolved oxygen sensor and type of sensor

(IDOs use SBE 43; ODOs use SBE 63); see

reply from GetCC or DS.

Return to SBE Data Processing window.

 If Confirm Configuration Change was selected in Configure menu - If you made

changes and did not Save or Save As, program asks if you want to save changes.

 If Confirm Configuration Change was not selected in Configure menu - Button says

Save & Exit. If you do not want to save changes, use Cancel button to exit.

Latitude is needed to calculate local gravity,

used in calculation of salt water depth. If

enabled, software uses input latitude in salt

water depth calculation. If disabled, software

uses Latitude on Miscellaneous tab of Data

Conversion or Derive in salt water depth

calculation.

Time between scans. Must agree with

SBE 37 setup (SampleInterval=); see

reply from GetCD or DS. For 37-SI, SIP,

and SIP-IDO, see note below.

Indicates if SBE 37 includes

optional pressure sensor. Must

agree with factory setup; see reply

from DC (display calibration

coefficients); if pressure sensor is

included, response includes

pressure sensor coefficients.

If no pressure sensor included,

additional field for deployment

pressure is used to calculate

conductivity (and derived

variables such as salinity and

sound velocity). Value shown is

based on ReferencePressure=

that was programmed into

SBE 37; you can change this

value in

.xmlcon file, if you have

updated deployment depth

information.

Opens a .txt file (for viewing only; cannot

be modified) that shows all parameters in

.con or .xmlcon file. For command line

generation of report, see Appendix III:

Generating .con or .xmlcon File Reports –

ConReport.exe.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 4: Configuring Instrument (Configure) SBE Data Processing

Shown below is an example status (DS) response in a terminal program for a

SBE 37-SMP-IDO with standard RS-232 interface that corresponds to the setup

shown in the Configuration dialog box above. Shown below the appropriate

lines are the commands used in the terminal program to modify the setup of

parameters critical processing of to SBE 37-SMP-IDO data with SBE Data

Processing, as well as any explanatory information.

SBE37SMP-ODO-232 1.0 SERIAL NO. 12345 20 Sep 2012 00:48:50

(‘IDO’ indicates MicroCAT includes integrated oxygen sensor; must match oxygen

sensor enable/disable in .xmlcon file.)

vMain = 13.31, vLith = 3.19

samplenumber = 1728, free = 522560

not logging, stop command

sample interval = 60 seconds

(Sample interval [SampleInterval=] must match Sample interval seconds in .xmlcon file.)

data format = converted engineering

transmit real-time data = yes

sync mode = no

minimum conductivity frequency = 3000.0

adaptive pump control enabled

If no pressure sensor is installed, a line in the DS response provides user-input

reference pressure information; if the pressure sensor is installed, that line is

missing (as shown in the above example response). This must match the

pressure sensor enable/disable in the .xmlcon file.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 4: Configuring Instrument (Configure) SBE Data Processing

SBE 45 MicroTSG Configuration

The SBE 45 transmits ASCII converted data in engineering units. It converts

the raw data internally to engineering units, based on the programmed

calibration coefficients. See the SBE 45 manual.

Shown below is an example status (DS) response in Seaterm that corresponds

to the setup shown in the Configuration dialog box above.

Shown below the appropriate lines are the commands used in Seaterm

to modify the setup of parameters critical to use of the SBE 45 with

Seasave and processing of data with SBE Data Processing, as well as any

explanatory information.

SBE45 V 1.1 SERIAL NO. 1258

logging data

sample interval = 1 seconds

(Sample interval [Interval=] must match Sample interval seconds in .con or .xmlcon

file.)

output conductivity with each sample

(Enabling of conductivity output [OutputCond=] must match Output conductivity

in .con or .xmlcon file.)

do not output salinity with each sample

(Enabling of salinity output [OutputSal=] must match Output salinity in

.con or .xmlcon file.)

do not output sound velocity with each sample

(Enabling of sound velocity output [OutputSV=] must match Output sound velocity

in .con or .xmlcon file.)

start sampling when power on

do not power off after taking a single sample

(Power off after taking a single sample must be disabled [SingleSample=N] to

acquire data in Seasave.)

do not power off after two minutes of inactivity

A/D cycles to average = 2

Define data in SBE 45 data

stream:

 Output conductivity - Must

agree with SBE 45 setup

(OutputCond=).

 Output salinity – Must agree

with SBE 45 setup

(OutputSal=).

 Output sound velocity –

Must agree with SBE 45

setup (OutputSV=).

See reply from DS for setup

programmed into SBE 45.



Use junction box - Select if SBE 45 data is transmitted to computer

through optional 90402 – SBE 45 Interface Box. Interface Box can

append optional SBE 38 and NMEA data to SBE 45 data stream.

 SBE 38 temperature added – Select if 90402 – SBE 45 Interface

Box is connected to SBE 38 remote temperature sensor. Seasave

appends SBE 38 data to data stream. Seasave, Data Conversion,

and Derive use remote temperature data when calculating density

and sound velocity.

 NMEA data added - Select if 90402 – SBE 45 Interface Box is

connected to NMEA navigation device.

Seasave adds current latitude,

longitude, and universal time code to data header; appends NMEA

data to every scan; and writes NMEA data to .nav file every time Ctrl

F7 is pressed or Add to .nav File is clicked.

New

to create new .con

or .xmlcon file for this

CTD.

Open to select different

.con or .xmlcon file.

Save or Save As to save

current .con or .xmlcon

file settings.

Return to SBE Data Processing

window.

 If Confirm Configuration Change

was selected in Configure menu -

If you made changes and did not

Save or Save As, program asks if

you want to save changes.

 If Confirm Configuration Change

was not selected in Configure

menu - Button says Save & Exit.

If you do not want to save

changes, use Cancel button to

exit.

Time between scans. Must agree with SBE 45

setup (Interval=); see reply from DS.

Opens a .txt file (for

viewing only; cannot

be modified) that

shows all parameters

in .con or .xmlcon file.

For command line

generation of report,

see Appendix III:

Generating .con or

.xmlcon File Reports

– ConReport.exe.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 4: Configuring Instrument (Configure) SBE Data Processing

SBE 49 FastCAT Configuration

Shown below is an example status (DS) response in Seaterm that corresponds

to the setup shown in the Configuration dialog box above.

Shown below the appropriate lines are the commands used in Seaterm

to modify the setup of parameters critical to use of the SBE 49 with

Seasave and processing of data with SBE Data Processing, as well as any

explanatory information.

SBE 49 FastCAT V 1.2 SERIAL NO. 0055

number of scans to average = 1

(Scans to average [NAvg=] must match Scans to average in .con or .xmlcon file.)

pressure sensor = strain gauge, range = 1000.0

minimum cond freq = 3000, pump delay = 30 sec

start sampling on power up = yes

output format = raw HEX

(Output format must be set to raw Hex [OutputFormat=0] to acquire data

in Seasave.)

temperature advance = 0.0625 seconds

celltm alpha = 0.03

celltm tau = 7.0

real-time temperature and conductivity correction disabled

Number of samples to average per scan. SBE 49 samples at 16 Hz

(0.0625 seconds), averages data, and transmits averaged data real-

time. Must agree with SBE 49 setup (NAvg=); see reply from DS.

Click a sensor and

click Modify to

change calibration

coefficients for that

sensor.

New

to create new .con

or .xmlcon file for this

CTD.

Open to select different

.con or .xmlcon file.

Save or Save As to

save current .con or

.xmlcon file settings.

Return to SBE Data Processing window.

 If Confirm Configuration Change was selected in Configure

menu - If you made changes and did not Save or Save As,

program asks if you want to save changes.

 If Confirm Configuration Change was not selected in

Configure menu - Button says Save & Exit. If you do not

want to save changes, use Cancel button to exit.



NMEA - Select if NMEA navigation

device used, and if NMEA depth data

and NMEA time data were also

appended. Seasave adds current

latitude, longitude, and universal time

code to data header; appends NMEA

data to every scan; and writes NMEA

data to .nav file every time Ctrl F7 is

pressed or Add to .nav File is

clicked.

Note: Whether NMEA device was

connected to a deck unit or directly

to computer during data acquisition

in Seasave has no effect on data file

used by SBE Data Processing, and

therefore has no effect on data

processing.

 Surface PAR - Select if used with

deck unit connected to Surface PAR

sensor. Seasave appends Surface

PAR data to every scan. Adds 2

channels to Channel/Sensor table.

See Application Note 47.

 Scan time - Select if Seasave

appended time (seconds since

January 1, 1970 GMT) to each data

scan.

Opens a .txt file (for viewing

only; cannot be modified) that

shows all parameters in .con

or .xmlcon file. For command

line generation of report, see

Appendix III: Generating .con

or .xmlcon File Reports –

ConReport.exe.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 4: Configuring Instrument (Configure) SBE Data Processing

SBE Glider Payload CTD Configuration

Shown below is an example status (DS) response in Seaterm232 that

corresponds to the setup shown in the Configuration dialog box above.

Shown below the appropriate lines are the commands used in Seaterm232

to modify the setup of parameters critical to processing of Glider Payload CTD

data with SBE Data Processing, as well as any explanatory information.

SBE Glider Payload CTD 1.0 SERIAL NO. 12345 27 Apr 2010 09:38:22

vMain = 9.37, vLith = 3.04

autorun = no

samplenumber = 57, free = 559183, profiles = 3

not logging

sample every 1 seconds

(must match Sample interval seconds in .xmlcon file.)

sample mode is continuous

data format = raw Decimal

do not force on RS232 transmitter

transmit real time data

acquire SBE 43 oxygen

(must match Oxygen sensor installed in .xmlcon file.)

minimum conductivity frequency = 3011.0

custom pump mode disabled

Click a sensor and

click Modify to change

calibration coefficients

for that sensor.

New

to create new

.xmlcon file for this CTD.

Open to select different

.xmlcon file.

Save or Save As to

save current .xmlcon file

settings.

Return to SBE Data Processing window.

 If Confirm Configuration Change was selected in Configure

menu - If you made changes and did not Save or Save As,

program asks if you want to save changes.

 If Confirm Configuration Change was not selected in

Configure menu - Button says Save & Exit. If you do not

want to save changes, use Cancel button to exit.

Select if GPCTD is

integrated with optional

SBE 43F Dissolved

Oxygen sensor.

Must agree with

GPCTD setup

(OxygenInstalled=);

see reply from DS.

Opens a .txt file (for viewing only;

cannot be modified) that shows all

parameters in .con or .xmlcon file. For

command line generation of report, see

Appendix III: Generating .con or

.xmlcon File Reports – ConReport.exe.

Number of seconds between

samples. Must agree with GPCTD

setup (Interval=); see reply from DS.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 4: Configuring Instrument (Configure) SBE Data Processing

Accessing Calibration Coefficients Dialog Boxes

1. In the Configure menu, select the desired instrument.

2. In the Configuration dialog box, click Open. Browse to the desired .con or

.xmlcon file and click Open.

3. In the Configuration dialog box, click a sensor and click Modify to change

the calibration coefficients for that sensor (or right click on the sensor and

select Modify . . Calibration, or double click on the sensor); the calibration

coefficients dialog box for the sensor appears (example is shown for a

pH sensor).

Importing and Exporting Calibration Coefficients

Calibration coefficient dialog boxes contain Import and Export buttons, which

can be used to simplify entering calibration coefficients. These buttons are

particularly useful when swapping sensors from one instrument to another,

allowing you to enter calibration coefficients without the need for typing or the

resulting possibility of typographical errors. An example dialog box is shown

above for a pH sensor.

The Export button allows you to export coefficients for the selected sensor to

an .XML file. If you move that sensor onto another instrument, you can then

import the coefficients from the .XML file when setting up the .con or .xmlcon

configuration file for that instrument.

The Import button allows you to import coefficients for the selected sensor

from another .con or .xmlcon file or from an .XML file. When you click the

Import button, a dialog box appears. Select the desired file type, and then

browse to and select the file:

 .con or .xmlcon configuration file – opens a .con or .xmlcon file,

retrieves the calibration coefficients from the file for the type of sensor you

selected, and enters the coefficients in the calibration coefficients dialog

box. If the .con or .xmlcon file contains more than one of that type of

sensor (for example, SBE Data Processing can process data for an

instrument interfacing with up to two SBE 43 oxygen sensors, so the .con

or .xmlcon file could contain coefficients for two SBE 43 sensors), a dialog

box allows you to select the desired sensor by serial number. If the .con or

.xmlcon file does not contain any of that type of sensor, SBE Data

Processing responds with an error message.

 .XML file – imports an .XML file that contains calibration coefficients for

one sensor. If the .XML file you select is not compatible with the selected

sensor type, SBE Data Processing responds with an error message.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 4: Configuring Instrument (Configure) SBE Data Processing

Calibration Coefficients for Frequency Sensors

View and/or modify the sensor calibration coefficients by selecting the sensor

and clicking the Modify button in the instrument Configuration dialog box. For

all calibration dialog boxes, enter the sensor serial number and calibration date.

Many sensor calibration equations contain an offset term. Unless noted

otherwise, use the offset (default = 0.0) to make small corrections for sensor

drift between calibrations.

Calibration coefficients are discussed below for each type of sensor.

Temperature, conductivity, and Digiquartz pressure sensors are covered first,

followed by the remaining frequency sensor types in alphabetical order.

Temperature Calibration Coefficients

Enter g, h, i, j (or a, b, c, d), and f0 from the calibration sheet.

Enter values for slope (default = 1.0) and offset (default = 0.0) to make small

corrections for temperature sensor drift between calibrations:

Corrected temperature = (slope * computed temperature) + offset

where

slope = true temperature span / instrument temperature span

offset = (true temperature – instrument reading) * slope; measured at 0 °C

Temperature Slope and Offset Correction Example

At true temperature = 0.0 °C, instrument reading = 0.0015 °C

At true temperature = 25.0 °C, instrument reading = 25.0005 °C

Calculating the slope and offset:

Slope = (25.0 – 0.0) / (25.0005 – 0.0015) = + 1.000040002

Offset = (0.0 – 0.0015) * 1.000040002 = - 0.001500060

Sea-Bird temperature sensors usually drift by changing offset, typically

resulting in higher temperature readings over time for sensors with serial

number less than 1050 and lower temperature readings over time for sensors

with serial number greater than 1050. Sea-Bird’s data indicates that the drift is

smooth and uniform with time, allowing users to make very accurate

corrections based only on pre- and post-cruise laboratory calibrations.

Calibration checks at sea are advisable to ensure against sensor malfunction;

however, data from reversing thermometers is rarely accurate enough to make

calibration corrections that are better than those possible from shore-based

laboratory calibrations.

Sea-Bird temperature sensors rarely exhibit span errors larger than  0.005 °C

over the range –5 to +35 °C (0.005 °C/(35 -[-5])C/year = 0.000125 °C/C/year),

even after years of drift. A span error that increases more than

 0.0002 °C/C/year may be a symptom of sensor malfunction.

Notes:

 Coefficients g, h, i, j, and f0

provide ITS-90 (T90)

temperature; a, b, c, d, and f0

provide IPTS-68 (T68)

temperature. The relationship

between them is:

T68 = 1.00024 T90

 See Application Note 31 for

computation of slope and offset

correction coefficients from pre-

and post-cruise calibrations

supplied by Sea-Bird.

 See Calibration Coefficients for

A/D Count Sensors below for

information on temperature

sensors used in the

SBE 16plus (and -IM),

16plus (and -IM) V2, 19plus,

19plus V2, 37, and 49.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 4: Configuring Instrument (Configure) SBE Data Processing

Conductivity Calibration Coefficients

Enter g, h, i, j, Ctcor (or a, b, c, d, m) and Cpcor from the calibration sheet.

 Cpcor makes a correction for the highly consistent change in dimensions of

the conductivity cell under pressure. The default is the compressibility

coefficient for borosilicate glass (-9.57e-08). Some sensors fabricated

between 1992 and 1995 (serial numbers between 1100 and 1500) exhibit a

compression that is slightly less than pure borosilicate glass. For these

sensors, the (hermetic) epoxy jacket on the glass cell is unintentionally

strong, creating a composite pressure effect of borosilicate and epoxy.

For sensors tested to date, this composite pressure coefficient ranges from -

9.57e-08 to -6.90e-08, with the latter value producing a correction to deep

ocean salinity of 0.0057 PSU in 5000 dbars pressure (approximately

0.001 PSU per 1000 dbars).

Before modifying Cpcor, confirm that the sensor behaves differently from

pure borosilicate glass. Sea-Bird can test your cell and calculate Cpcor.

Alternatively, test the cell by comparing computed salinity to the salinity

of water samples from a range of depths, calculated using an AutoSal.

Enter values for slope (default = 1.0) and offset (default = 0.0) to make small

corrections for conductivity sensor drift between calibrations:

Corrected conductivity = (slope * computed conductivity) + offset

where

slope = true conductivity span / instrument conductivity span

offset = (true conductivity – instrument reading) * slope; measured at 0 S/m

Conductivity Slope and Offset Correction Example

At true conductivity = 0.0 S/m, instrument reading = -0.00007 S/m

At true conductivity = 3.5 S/m, instrument reading = 3.49965 S/m

Calculating the slope and offset:

Slope = (3.5 – 0.0) / (3.49965 - [- 0.00007]) = + 1.000080006

Offset = (0.0 - [-0.00007]) * 1.000080006 = + 0.000070006

The sensor usually drifts by changing span (slope of the calibration curve),

typically resulting in lower conductivity readings over time. Offset error

(error at 0 S/m) is usually due to electronics drift, and is typically less than

0.0001 S/m per year. Because offsets greater than 0.0002 S/m are a

symptom of sensor malfunction, Sea-Bird recommends that drift corrections be

made by assuming no offset error, unless there is strong evidence to the

contrary or a special need.

Wide-Range Conductivity Sensors

A wide-range conductivity sensor has been modified to provide conductivity

readings over a wider range by inserting a precision resistor in series with the

conductivity cell. Therefore, the equation used to fit the calibration data is

different from the standard equation. The sensor’s documentation includes the

equation as well as the cell constant and series resistance to be entered in the

program.

If the conductivity sensor serial number on the conductivity calibration sheet

includes a w (an indication that it is a wide-range sensor; for example, 4216w):

1. After you enter the calibration coefficients and click OK, the Wide Range

Conductivity dialog box appears.

2. Enter the cell constant and series resistance (from the instrument’s

documentation) in the dialog box, and click OK.

Note:

See Application Note 31 for

computation of slope and offset

correction coefficients from pre-

and post-cruise calibrations

supplied by Sea-Bird or from

salinity bottle samples taken at

sea during profiling.

Note:

Use coefficients g, h, i, j, Ctcor,

and Cpcor (if available on

calibration sheet) for most

accurate results; conductivity for

older sensors was calculated

based on a, b, c, d, m, and Cpcor.

Note:

See Application Note 94 for

information on wide-range

calibrations.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 4: Configuring Instrument (Configure) SBE Data Processing

Pressure (Paroscientific Digiquartz) Calibration Coefficients

Enter the sets of C, D, and T coefficients from the calibration sheet. Enter zero

for any higher-order coefficients that are not listed on the calibration sheet.

Enter values for slope (default = 1.0; do not change unless sensor has been

recalibrated) and offset (default = 0.0) to make small corrections for

sensor drift.

 For the SBE 9plus, also enter AD590M and AD590B coefficients from the

configuration sheet.

Oxygen (SBE 43I) Calibration Coefficients

The SBE 43I is the Integrated Dissolved Oxygen sensor used on the SBE 37

(37-SMP-IDO, 37-IMP-IDO, and 37-SIP-IDO). The calibration coefficients for

this sensor are as described for the SBE 43 voltage sensor (see Calculation

Coefficients for Voltage Sensors below).

Bottles Closed (HB - IOW) Calibration Coefficients

No calibration coefficients are entered for this parameter.

The number of bottles closed is calculated by Data Conversion

based on frequency range.

Sound Velocity (IOW) Calibration Coefficients

Enter coefficients a0, a1, and a2.

Value = a0 + a1 * frequency + a2 * frequency 2

Note:

See Calibration Coefficients for

A/D Count Sensors below for

information on strain gauge

pressure sensors used on the

SBE 16plus (and -IM),

16plus (and -IM) V2, 19plus,

19plus V2, and 49.

See Calibration Coefficients for

Voltage Sensors below for

information on strain gauge

pressure sensors used on

other instruments.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 4: Configuring Instrument (Configure) SBE Data Processing

Calibration Coefficients for A/D Count Sensors

View and/or modify the sensor calibration coefficients by selecting the sensor

and clicking the Modify button in the instrument Configuration dialog box. For

all calibration dialog boxes, enter the sensor serial number and calibration date.

Many sensor calibration equations contain an offset term. Unless noted

otherwise, use the offset (default = 0.0) to make small corrections for sensor

drift between calibrations.

Calibration coefficients are discussed below for each type of sensor:

temperature and strain gauge pressure sensor.

Temperature Calibration Coefficients

For SBE 16plus (and -IM), 16plus (and-IM) V2, 19plus, 19plus V2, 37, and 49:

Enter a0, a1, a2, and a3 from the calibration sheet.

Enter values for slope (default = 1.0) and offset (default = 0.0) to make small

corrections for temperature sensor drift between calibrations:

Corrected temperature = (slope * computed temperature) + offset

where

slope = true temperature span / instrument temperature span

offset = (true temperature – instrument reading) * slope; measured at 0 °C

Temperature Slope and Offset Correction Example

At true temperature = 0.0 °C, instrument reading = 0.0015 °C

At true temperature = 25.0 °C, instrument reading = 25.0005 °C

Calculating the slope and offset:

Slope = (25.0 – 0.0) / (25.0005 – 0.0015) = + 1.000040002

Offset = (0.0 – 0.0015) * 1.000040002 = - 0.001500060

Sea-Bird temperature sensors usually drift by changing offset, typically

resulting in lower temperature readings over time. Sea-Bird’s data indicates that

the drift is smooth and uniform with time, allowing users to make very accurate

corrections based only on pre- and post-cruise laboratory calibrations.

Calibration checks at sea are advisable to ensure against sensor malfunction;

however, data from reversing thermometers is rarely accurate enough to make

calibration corrections that are better than those possible from shore-based

laboratory calibrations.

Sea-Bird temperature sensors rarely exhibit span errors larger than  0.005 °C

over the range –5 to +35 °C (0.005 °C/(35 -[-5])C/year = 0.000125 °C/C/year),

even after years of drift. A span error that increases more than

 0.0002 °C/C/year may be a symptom of sensor malfunction.

Pressure (Strain Gauge) Calibration Coefficients

For SBE 16plus (and -IM), 16plus (and IM) V2, 19plus, and 19plus V2

configured with a strain gauge pressure sensor, and for all SBE 37s and 49s:

Enter pA0, pA1, pA2, ptempA0, ptempA1, ptempA2, pTCA0, pTCA1, pTCA2,

pTCB0, pTCB1, and pTCB2 from the calibration sheet. Offset is normally zero,

but may be changed for non-zero sea-surface condition. For example, if the in-

air pressure reading is negative, enter an equal positive value.

Notes:

 These coefficients provide

ITS-90 (T90) temperature.

 See Application Note 31 for

computation of slope and offset

correction coefficients from pre-

and post-cruise calibrations

supplied by Sea-Bird.

Note:

See Calibration Coefficients for

Voltage Sensors below for

information on strain gauge

pressure sensors used on other

instruments. See Calibration

Coefficients for Frequency

Sensors above for information

on Paroscientific Digiquartz

pressure sensors.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 4: Configuring Instrument (Configure) SBE Data Processing

Calibration Coefficients for Voltage Sensors

View and/or modify the sensor calibration coefficients by selecting the sensor

and clicking the Modify button in the instrument Configuration dialog box. For

all calibration dialog boxes, enter the sensor serial number and calibration date.

Many sensor calibration equations contain an offset term. Unless noted

otherwise, use the offset (default = 0.0) to make small corrections for sensor

drift between calibrations.

Calibration coefficients are discussed below for each type of sensor. Strain

gauge pressure sensors are covered first, followed by the remaining voltage

sensor types in alphabetical order.

Pressure (Strain Gauge) Calibration Coefficients

Enter coefficients:

 Pressure sensor without temperature compensation

 Enter A0, A1, and A2 coefficients from the calibration sheet

 For older units with a linear fit pressure calibration, enter M (A1) and

B (A0) from the calibration sheet, and set A2 to zero.

 For all units, offset is normally zero, but may be changed for non-zero

sea-surface condition. For example, if the in-air pressure reading is

negative, enter an equal positive value.

 Pressure sensor with temperature compensation

Enter ptempA0, ptempA1, ptempA2, pTCA0, pTCA1, pTCA2, pTCB0,

pTCB1, pTCB2, pA0, pA1, and pA2 from the calibration sheet.

Altimeter Calibration Coefficients

Enter the scale factor and offset.

altimeter height = [300 * voltage / scale factor] + offset

where

scale factor = full scale voltage * 300/full scale range

full scale range is dependent on the sensor (e.g., 50m, 100m, etc.)

full scale voltage is from calibration sheet (typically 5V)

Fluorometer Calibration Coefficients

 Biospherical Natural Fluorometer

Enter Cfn (natural fluorescence calibration coefficient), A1, A2, and B

from calibration sheet.

natural fluorescence Fn = Cfn * 10V

production = A1 * Fn / (A2 + PAR)

chlorophyll concentration Chl = Fn / (B * PAR)

where

V is voltage from natural fluorescence sensor

Note:

In Seasave, enter the altimeter

alarm set point, alarm hysteresis,

and minimum pressure to enable

alarm.

Note:

See Calibration Coefficients for A/D

Count Sensors above for information

on strain gauge pressure sensors

used on the SBE 16plus (and -IM),

16plus (and -IM) V2, 19plus,

19plus V2, and 49.

See Calibration Coefficients for

Frequency Sensors above for

information on Paroscientific

Digiquartz pressure sensors.

Note:

Unless noted otherwise, SBE Data

Processing supports only one of each

auxiliary sensor model on a CTD (for

example, you cannot specify two

Chelsea Minitracka fluorometers, but

you can specify a Chelsea Minitracka

and a Chelsea UV Aquatracka

fluorometer. See the sensor

descriptions below for those sensors

that SBE Data Processing supports

in a redundant configuration (two or

more of the same model interfacing

with the CTD).

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 4: Configuring Instrument (Configure) SBE Data Processing

 Chelsea Aqua 3

Enter VB, V1, Vacetone, slope, offset, and SF.

Concentration (μg/l) = slope*[(10.0(V/SF) - 10.0VB)/(10.0V1 - 10.0Vacetone)]

+ offset

where

VB, V1, and Vacetone are from calibration sheet

Slope (default 1.0) and offset (default 0.0) adjust readings to conform to

measured concentrations

Scale factor SF = 1.0 if CTD gain is 1; SF = 2 if CTD gain is 2.0

V is output voltage measured by CTD

Note: SBE Data Processing can process data for an instrument interfacing

with up to two Chelsea Aqua 3 fluorometers.

Chelsea Aqua 3 Example - Calculation of Slope and Offset

Current slope = 1.0 and offset = 0.0

Two in-situ samples:

Sample 1 Concentration–

from SBE Data Processing = 0.390, from water sample = 0.450

Sample 2 Concentration–

from SBE Data Processing = 0.028, from water sample = 0.020

Linear regression to this data yields slope = 1.188 and offset = - 0.013

 Chelsea Minitracka

Enter Vacetone, Vacetone100, and offset.

Concentration = (100 *[V - Vacetone]/[Vacetone100 - Vacetone]) + offset

where

Vacetone (voltage with 0 µg/l chlorophyll) and Vacetone100 (voltage with

100 µg/l chlorophyll) are from calibration sheet

 Chelsea UV Aquatracka

Enter A and B.

Concentration (μg/l) = A * 10.0 V - B

where

A and B are from calibration sheet

V is output voltage measured by CTD

Note: SBE Data Processing can process data for an instrument interfacing

with up to two Chelsea UV Aquatracka fluorometers.

 Dr Haardt Fluorometer - Chlorophyll a, Phycoerythrin, or

Yellow Substance

Enter A0, A1, B0, and B1.

These instruments may have automatic switching between high and low

gains. Select the gain range switch:

 Output Voltage Level if the instrument indicates gain by output voltage

level (< 2.5 volts is low gain, > 2.5 volts is high gain)

Low gain: value = A0 + (A1 * V)

High gain: value = B0 + (B1 * V)

 Modulo Bit if the instrument has control lines custom-wired to bits in

the SBE 9plus modulo word

Bit not set: value = A0 + (A1 * V)

Bit set: value = B0 + (B1 * V)

 None if the instrument does not change gain

value = A0 + (A1 * V)

where

V = voltage from sensor

Dr Haardt Voltage Level Switching Examples

Example: Chlorophyll a

Low range scale = 10 mg/l and Gain = 10/2.5 = 4 mg/l/volt

A0 = 0.0 A1 = 4.0

High range scale = 100 mg/l and Gain = 100/2.5 = 40 mg/l/volt

B0 = -100 B1 = 40.0

Note:

See Application Note 39 for

calculation of Chelsea Aqua 3

calibration coefficients.

Note:

See Application Note 61 for

calculation of Chelsea Minitracka

calibration coefficients.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 4: Configuring Instrument (Configure) SBE Data Processing

 Seapoint

Enter gain and offset.

Concentration = (V * 30/gain) + offset

where

Gain is dependent on cable used (see cable drawing, pins 5 and 6)

Note: SBE Data Processing can process data for an instrument interfacing

with up to two Seapoint fluorometers.

 Seapoint Rhodamine

Enter gain and offset.

Concentration = (V * 30/gain) + offset

where

Gain is dependent on cable used (see cable drawing, pins 5 and 6)

 Seapoint Ultraviolet

Enter range and offset.

Concentration = (V * range / 5) + offset

Note: SBE Data Processing can process data for an instrument interfacing

with up to two Seapoint ultraviolet fluorometers.

 Sea Tech and WET Labs Flash Lamp Fluorometer (FLF)

Enter scale factor and offset.

Concentration = (voltage * scale factor / 5) + offset

where

Scale factor is dependent on fluorometer range:

Fluorometer Switch-Selectable Range

(milligrams/m3 or micrograms/liter)

Scale

Factor

Sea Tech

0 – 3 3

0 – 10 (default) 10

0 - 30 30

0-100 100

0-300 300

0-1000 1000

WET Labs

FLF

0 – 100 100

0 – 300 (default) 300

0 - 1000 1000

Offset is calculated by measuring voltage output when the light sensor is

completely blocked from the strobe light with an opaque substance

such as heavy black rubber:

offset = - (scale factor * voltage) / 5

 Turner 10-005

This sensor requires two channels - one for the fluorescence voltage and

one for the range voltage. Select both when configuring the instrument.

For the fluorescence voltage channel, enter scale factor and offset.

concentration = [fluorescence voltage * scale factor / (range * 5)] + offset

where

range is defined in the following table

Range Voltage Range

< 0.2 volts 1.0

> 0.2 volts and < 0.55 volts 3.16

> 0.55 volts and < 0.85 volts 10.0

> 0.85 volts 31.0

Note:

See Application Note 54 for

calculation of Seapoint fluorometer

calibration coefficients.

Notes:

 See Application Note 9 for

calculation of WET Labs FLF and

Sea Tech fluorometer calibration

coefficients.

 Offset and scale factor may be

adjusted to fit a linear regression of

fluorometer responses to known

chlorophyll a concentrations.

Note:

See Application Note 77 for

calculation of Seapoint ultraviolet

fluorometer calibration coefficients.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 4: Configuring Instrument (Configure) SBE Data Processing

 Turner 10-AU-005

Enter full scale voltage, zero point concentration, and full scale

concentration from the calibration sheet.

concentration = [(1.195 * voltage * (FSC – ZPC)) / FSV] + ZPC

where

voltage = measured output voltage from fluorometer

FSV = full scale voltage; typically 5.0 volts

FSC = full scale concentration

ZPC = zero point concentration

 Turner Cyclops

Enter scale factor and offset, and select measured parameter (chlorophyll,

rhodamine, fluorescein, .phycocyanin, phycoerythrin, CDOM, crude oil,

optical brighteners, or turbidity)

concentration = (scale factor * voltage) + offset

where

scale factor = range / 5 volts

offset = - scale factor * blank voltage

Range and blank voltage are from calibration sheet.

Output units are dependent on selected measured parameter.

Note: SBE Data Processing can process data for an instrument interfacing

with up to seven Turner Cyclops fluorometers.

 Turner SCUFA

Enter scale factor, offset, units, mx, my, and b from the calibration sheet.

chlorophyll = (scale factor * voltage) + offset

corrected chlorophyll = (mx * chlorophyll) + (my * NTU) + b

where

NTU = results from optional turbidity channel in SCUFA (see Turner

SCUFA in OBS equations below)

Note: SBE Data Processing can process data for an instrument interfacing

with up to two Turner SCUFA sensors.

 WET Labs AC3

This sensor requires two channels - one for fluorometer voltage (listed

under fluorometers in the dialog box) and one for transmissometer voltage

(listed under transmissometers). Select both when configuring the

instrument.

Enter kv, Vh2o, and A^X.

concentration (mg/m3) = kv * (Vout - Vh20) / A^X

where

Vout = measured output voltage

kv = absorption voltage scaling constant (inverse meters/volt)

Vh20 = measured voltage using pure water

A^X = chlorophyll specific absorption coefficient

Notes:

 To enable entry of the mx, my,

and b coefficients, you must

first select the Turner SCUFA

(OBS/Nephelometer/Turbidity).

 See Application Note 63 for

calculation of Turner SCUFA

calibration coefficients.

Note:

See Application Note 74 for

calculation of Turner Cyclops

fluorometer calibration coefficients.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 4: Configuring Instrument (Configure) SBE Data Processing

 WET Labs ECO-AFL and ECO-FL

Enter Dark Output and scale factor.

Concentration (units) = (V – Dark Output) * scale factor

where

V = in situ voltage output

Dark Output = clean water voltage output with black tape on detector

Scale factor = multiplier (units/Volt)

The calibration sheet lists either:

 Dark Output and scale factor, OR

 Vblank (old terminology for Dark Output) and Scale Factor, OR

 Vblank (old terminology for Dark Output) and Vcopro (voltage output

measured with known concentration of coproporphyrin tetramethyl

ester). Determine an initial value for the scale factor by using the

chlorophyll concentration corresponding to Vcopro:

scale factor = chlorophyll concentration / (Vcopro - Vblank)

Perform calibrations using seawater with phytoplankton populations that

are similar to what is expected in situ.

Note: SBE Data Processing can process data for an instrument interfacing

with up to six ECO-AFL (or ECO-FL) sensors.

 WET Labs ECO CDOM (Colored Dissolved Organic Matter)

Enter Dark Output and scale factor.

Concentration (ppb) = (V – Dark Output) * Scale Factor

where

V = in situ voltage output

Dark Output = clean water voltage output with black tape on detector

Scale Factor = multiplier (ppb/Volt)

Calibration sheet lists Dark Output and Vcdom (voltage output measured

with known concentration of colored dissolved organic matter). Determine

an initial scale factor value by using colored dissolved organic matter

concentration corresponding to Vcdom:

scale factor = cdom concentration / (Vcdom – Dark Output)

Perform calibrations using seawater with CDOM types similar to what is

expected in situ.

Note: SBE Data Processing can process data for an instrument interfacing

with up to six ECO CDOM sensors.

 WET Labs WETStar

Enter Blank Output and Scale Factor.

Concentration (units) = (V – Blank Output) * Scale Factor

where

V = in situ voltage output

Blank Output = clean water blank voltage output

Scale Factor = multiplier (units/Volt)

The calibration sheet lists either:

 Blank Output and Scale Factor, OR

 Vblank (old terminology for Blank Output) and Scale Factor, OR

 Vblank (old terminology for Blank Output) and Vcopro (voltage

output measured with known concentration of coproporphyrin

tetramethyl ester). Determine an initial value for the scale factor by

using the chlorophyll concentration corresponding to Vcopro:

scale factor = chlorophyll concentration / (Vcopro - Vblank)

Perform calibrations using seawater with phytoplankton populations that

are similar to what is expected in situ.

Note: SBE Data Processing can process data for an instrument interfacing

with up to six WET Labs WETStar sensors.

Notes:

 Units are dependent on the

substance measured by the

fluorometer. For example, units are

µg/l for chlorophyll, ppb for

Rhodamine, ppt for Phycocyanin,

etc.

 See Application Note 62 for

calculation of ECO-AFL/ -FL

calibration coefficients.

 For ECO-FL-NTU, a second

channel is required for turbidity.

Set up the second channel as a

WET Labs ECO-NTU, as

described below for

OBS/Nephelometer/Turbidity

sensors.

Notes:

 Units are dependent on the

substance measured by the

fluorometer. For example, units are

µg/l for chlorophyll, ppb for

Rhodamine, ppt for Phycocyanin,

etc.

 See Application Note 41 for

calculation of WETStar calibration

coefficients.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 4: Configuring Instrument (Configure) SBE Data Processing

Methane Sensor Calibration Coefficients

The Franatech(formerly Capsum) METS sensor requires two channels – one

for methane concentration and oner for temperature measured by the sensor.

Select both when configuring the instrument.

For the concentration channel, enter D, A0, A1, B0, B1, and B2.

Methane concentration

= exp {D ln [(B0 + B1 exp ) * ( – )]} [mol / l]

where

Vt = temperature voltage Vm = methane concentration voltage

For the temperature channel, enter T1 and T2.

Gas temperature = (Vt * T1) + T2 [°C]

OBS/Nephelometer/Turbidity Calibration Coefficients

In general, turbidity sensors are calibrated to a standard (formazin). However,

particle size, shape, refraction, etc. in seawater varies. These variations affect

the results unless field calibrations are performed on typical water samples.

 Downing & Associates [D&A] OBS-3 Backscatterance

Enter gain and offset.

output = (volts * gain) + offset

where

gain = range/5; see calibration sheet for range

Note: SBE Data Processing can process data for an instrument interfacing

with up to two OBS-3 sensors.

 Downing & Associates [D & A] OBS-3+

Enter A0, A1, and A2.

output = A0 + (A1 * V) + (A2 * V2)

where

V = voltage from sensor (milliVolts)

A0, A1, and A2 = calibration coefficients from D & A calibration sheet

Note: SBE Data Processing can process data for an instrument interfacing

with up to two OBS-3+ sensors.

 Chelsea

Enter clear water value and scale factor.

turbidity [F.T.U.] = (10.0V – C) / scale factor

where

V = voltage from sensor

See calibration sheet for C (clear water value) and scale factor.

 Dr. Haardt Turbidity

Enter A0, A1, B0, and B1. Select the gain range switch:

 Output Voltage Level if the instrument indicates gain by output voltage

level (< 2.5 volts is low gain, > 2.5 volts is high gain)

Low gain: value = A0 + (A1 * V)

High gain: value = B0 + (B1 * V)

 Modulo Bit if the instrument has control lines custom-wired to bits in

the SBE 9plus modulo word

Bit not set: value = A0 + (A1 * V)

Bit set: value = B0 + (B1 * V)

 None if the instrument does not change gain

value = A0 + (A1 * V)

where

V = voltage from sensor

Note:

See Application Note 16 for

calculation of OBS-3 calibration

coefficients.

-Vt

A0 – A1 * Vt

Note:

 See Application Note 81 for

calculation of OBS-3+ calibration

coefficients.

 You can interface to two OBS-3+

sensors, or to both the 1X and 4X

ranges on one OBS-3+ sensor,

providing two channels of

OBS-3+ data.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 4: Configuring Instrument (Configure) SBE Data Processing

 IFREMER

This sensor requires two channels - one for direct voltage and one for

measured voltage. Select both when configuring the CTD.

For the direct voltage channel, enter vm0, vd0, d0, and k.

diffusion = [k * (vm – vm0) / (vd – vd0)] – d0

where

k = scale factor vm = measured voltage

vm0 = measured voltage offset vd = direct voltage

vd0 = direct voltage offset d0 = diffusion offset

 Seapoint Turbidity

Enter gain setting and scale factor.

output = (volts * 500 * scale factor)/gain

where

Scale factor is from calibration sheet

Gain is dependent on cable used (see cable drawing)

Note: SBE Data Processing can process data for an instrument interfacing

with up to two Seapoint Turbidity sensors.

 Seatech LS6000 and WET Labs LBSS

Enter gain setting, slope, and offset.

Output = [volts * (range / 5) * slope] + offset

where

Slope is from calibration sheet.

Range is based on sensor ordered (see calibration sheet) and cable-

dependent gain (see cable drawing to determine if low or high gain):

High Gain: 2.25, 7.5, 75, 225, 33; Low Gain: 7.5, 25, 250, 750, 100

Note: SBE Data Processing can process data for an instrument interfacing

with up to two Seatech LS6000 or WET Labs LBSS sensors.

 Turner SCUFA

Enter scale factor and offset.

NTU = (scale factor * voltage) + offset

corrected chlorophyll = (mx * chlorophyll) + (my * NTU) + b

where

mx, my, and b = coefficients entered for Turner SCUFA fluorometer

chlorophyll = results from fluorometer channel in SCUFA (see Turner

SCUFA in fluorometer equations above)

Note: SBE Data Processing can process data for an instrument interfacing

with up to two Turner SCUFA sensors.

 WET Labs ECO-BB

Enter Scale Factor and Dark Output.

β(Θc) [m -1 sr -1]= (V – Dark Output) * Scale Factor

where

V = voltage from sensor

Scale Factor and Dark Output are from calibration sheet.

Note: SBE Data Processing can process data for an instrument interfacing

with up to five WET Labs ECO-BB sensors.

 WET Labs ECO-NTU

Enter scale factor and Dark Output.

NTU = (V – Dark Output) * Scale Factor

where

V = voltage from sensor

Scale Factor and Dark Output are from calibration sheet.

Note: SBE Data Processing can process data for an instrument interfacing

with up to five WET Labs ECO-NTU sensors.

Oxidation Reduction Potential (ORP) Calibration Coefficients

Enter M, B, and offset (mV).

Oxidation reduction potential = [(M * voltage) + B] + offset

Enter M and B from calibration sheet.

Note:

See Application Note 48 for

calculation of Seapoint Turbidity

calibration coefficients.

Note:

See Application Note 19 for

calculation of ORP calibration

coefficients.

Notes:

 To enable entry of the mx, my,

and b coefficients for the

SCUFA fluorometer, you must

first select the Turner SCUFA

(OBS/Nephelometer/Turbidity).

 See Application Note 63 for

calculation of Turner SCUFA

calibration coefficients.

Note:

See Application Note 87 for

calculation of WET Labs ECO-BB

calibration coefficients.

Note:

See Application Note 62 for

calculation of WET Labs ECO-NTU

calibration coefficients.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 4: Configuring Instrument (Configure) SBE Data Processing

Oxygen Calibration Coefficients

Enter the coefficients, which vary depending on the type of oxygen sensor,

from the calibration sheet:

 Beckman- or YSI-type sensor (manufactured by Sea-Bird or other

manufacturer) - These sensors require two channels - one for oxygen

current (enter m, b, soc, boc, tcor, pcor, tau, and wt) and one for oxygen

temperature (enter k and c). Select both when configuring the instrument.

Note: SBE Data Processing can process data for an instrument interfacing

with up to two Beckman- or YSI-type oxygen sensors.

 IOW sensor - These sensors require two channels - one for oxygen current

(enter b0 and b1) and one for oxygen temperature (enter a0, a1, a2, and

a3). Select both when configuring the instrument.

Value = b0 + [b1 * (a0 +a1 * T + a2 * T2 + a3 * T3) * C]

where T is oxygen temperature voltage, C is oxygen current voltage

 Sea-Bird sensor (SBE 43) - This sensor requires only one channel.

In Spring of 2008, Sea-Bird began using a new equation, the Sea-Bird

equation, for calibrating the SBE 43. Calibration sheets for SBE 43s

calibrated after this date will only include coefficients for the Sea-Bird

equation, but our software (Seasave-Win32, Seasave V7, and SBE Data

Processing) supports both equations. We recommend that you use the

Sea-Bird equation for best results.

Sea-Bird: Enter Soc, Voffset, A, B, C, E, Tau20, D1, D2, H1, H2, and H3.

OX =

Soc * [V + Voffset + tau(T,P) * V/t] * OxSOL(T,S) *

1.0 + A*T + B*T2 + C*T3) * e (E*P / K)

where

- OX = dissolved oxygen concentration (ml/l)

- T, P = measured temperature (ºC) and pressure (decibars) from CTD

- S = calculated salinity from CTD (PSU)

- V = temperature-compensated oxygen signal (volts)

- Soc = linear scaling calibration coefficient

- Voffset = voltage at zero oxygen signal

- tau(T,P) = sensor time constant at temperature and pressure

- tau20 = sensor time constant tau(T,P) at 20 C, 1 atmosphere, 0 PSU;

slope term in calculation of tau(T,P)

- D1, D2 = calibration terms used in calculation of tau(T,P)

- V/t = time derivative of oxygen signal (volts/sec)

- H1, H2, H3 = calibration terms used for hysteresis correction

- K = absolute temperature (Kelvin)

- Oxsol(T,S) = oxygen saturation (ml/l); a parameterization from Garcia

and Gordon (1992)

Owens-Millard: Enter Soc, Boc, Voffset, tcor, pcor, and tau.

OX =

[Soc*{(V+Voffset)+(tau* dV/dt)}+Boc*exp(-0.03T)]*exp(tcor*T+pcor*P)*Oxsat(T,S)

where

OX = dissolved oxygen concentration (ml/l)

T = measured temperature from CTD (ºC)

P = measured pressure from CTD (decibars)

S = calculated salinity from CTD (PSU)

V = temperature-compensated oxygen signal (volts)

dV/dt = derivative of oxygen signal (volts/sec)

Oxsat(T,S) = oxygen saturation (ml/l)

Note: SBE Data Processing can process data for an instrument interfacing

with up to two SBE 43 oxygen sensors.

Notes:

 See Application Notes 13-1 and 13-3

for calibration coefficients for

Beckman- or YSI-type sensors.

 See Application Notes 64 and 64-2

for SBE 43 calibration coefficients.

 The Tau correction ([tau(T,P) * V/t]

in the SBE 43 or [tau * doc/dt] in the

SBE 13 or 23) improves response of

the measured signal in regions of

large oxygen gradients. However,

this term also amplifies residual

noise in the signal (especially in

deep water), and in some situations

this negative consequence

overshadows the gains in signal

responsiveness. To perform this

correction, select Apply Tau

correction on Data Conversion’s or

Derive’s Miscellaneous tab.

 If the Tau correction is enabled,

oxygen computed by Seasave and

Data Conversion differ from values

computed by Derive. Both

algorithms compute the derivative of

the oxygen signal with respect to

time, and require a user-input

window size:

 Quick estimate -

Seasave and Data Conversion

compute the derivative looking

back in time, because they share

common code and Seasave

cannot use future values while

acquiring real-time data.

 Most accurate results -

Derive uses a centered window

(equal number of points before

and after scan) to compute

the derivative.

In Data Conversion or Derive, the

window size is input on the

Miscellaneous tab.

 A hysteresis correction can be

applied in Data Conversion for the

SBE 43. To perform this correction,

select Apply hysteresis correction on

Data Conversion’s Miscellaneous

tab. H1, H2, and H3 coefficients for

hysteresis correction (entered in the

.con or .xmlcon file) are available on

calibration sheets for SBE 43s

calibrated after October 2008.

 See Calibration Coefficients for

RS-232 Sensors below for the

SBE 63 Optical Dissolved Oxygen

Sensor and Aanderaa Optode

Oxygen sensor.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 4: Configuring Instrument (Configure) SBE Data Processing

PAR/Irradiance Calibration Coefficients

Underwater PAR Sensor

 PAR/Irradiance, Biospherical/Licor

Enter M, B, calibration constant, multiplier, and offset.

PAR = [multiplier * (109 * 10(V-B) / M) / calibration constant] + offset

where

calibration constant, M, and B are dependent on sensor type;

multiplier = 1.0 for units of μEinsteins/m2 sec

o Biospherical PAR sensor

- PAR sensor with built-in log amplifier (QSP-200L, QSP-2300L,

QCP-2300L, or MCP-2300)]:

Typically, M = 1.0 and B = 0.0.

Calibration constant

= 10 5 / wet calibration factor from Biospherical calibration sheet.

- PAR sensor without built-in log amplifier (QSP-200PD, QSP-2200

(PD),

or QCP 2200 (PD)):

M and B are taken from Sea-Bird calibration sheet.

Calibration constant

= CS calibration coefficient from Sea-Bird calibration sheet

= 10 9 / calibration coefficient from Biospherical calibration sheet

o LI-COR PAR sensor

Calibration constant is in water calibration constant (in units of

μamps/1000 μmoles/m2.sec) from Licor or Sea-Bird calibration sheet.

M and B are taken from Sea-Bird calibration sheet.

o Chelsea PAR sensor

Calibration constant

= 10 9 / 0.01

M = 1.0 / (log e * A1 * 1000) = 1.0 / (0.43429448 * A1 * 1000)

B = - M * log e * A0 = - M * 0.43429448 * A0

where A0 and A1 are constants from Chelsea calibration sheet with an

equation of form: PAR = A0 + (A1 * mV)

Note: SBE Data Processing can process data for an instrument interfacing

with up to two PAR/irradiance Biospherical/Licor sensors.

 Satlantic Logarithmic PAR sensor

Enter a0, a1, and lm from Satlantic calibration sheet.

PAR = multiplier * Im * 10 (V –a0) / a1

where multiplier = 1.0 for units of µmol photons/ m2 sec.

Surface PAR Sensor

Select a surface PAR sensor by clicking Surface PAR voltage added in the

Configure dialog box.

 Biospherical Surface PAR Sensor

Enter conversion factor and ratio multiplier.

 Satlantic Linear Surface PAR Sensor

Enter a0, a1, and Im from Satlantic calibration sheet. Enter conversion

factor and ratio multiplier.

PAR = conversion factor * Im * a1 (V − a0)

 Satlantic Logarithmic Surface PAR Sensor

Enter a0, a1, and Im from Satlantic calibration sheet. Enter conversion

factor and ratio multiplier.

PAR = conversion factor * Im * 10 (V –a0) / a1

Notes:

 See Application Note 11General to

convert units from μEinsteins/m2 sec

or μmol photons/m2 sec (which are

equivalent). Conversion unit

selection for all PAR sensors

appears in the data file header, but

it does not modify the calculated

values.

 See Application Notes 11QSP-L

(Biospherical sensor with built-in log

amplifier), 11QSP-PD (Biospherical

sensor without built-in log amplifier),

11Licor, and 11Chelsea for

calculation of calibration coefficients

for those underwater PAR sensors.

 Selection of Par / Irradiance,

Biospherical / Licor as the voltage

sensor is also applicable to the

Chelsea PAR sensor.

 See Application Note 11S

(SBE 11plus Deck Unit) or

47 (SBE 33 or 36 Deck Unit) for

calculation of calibration coefficients

for Biospherical surface PAR

sensors.

 See Application Note 96 for

calculation of calibration coefficients

for Satlantic underwater and surface

PAR sensors.

 Surface PAR ratio multiplier is used

in Corrected Irradiance (CPAR)

calculation; see Appendix V: Derived

Parameter Formulas (EOS-80;

Practical Salinity).

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 4: Configuring Instrument (Configure) SBE Data Processing

Particle Size Calibration Coefficients

The Sequoia LISST-200X sensor requires two channels – one for total

concentration output and one for Sauter Mean Diameter (SMD) output. Select

both when configuring the instrument.

Total Volume Concentration = 0.01 * 10 (2.0 * VC) [ppm]

Sauter Mean Diameter = 200 * (VD – 0.5) [microns]

where:

VC = voltage from total volume concentration channel

VD = voltage from mean diameter channel

The mean diameter and total concentration calculated from the LISST-200X

analog output are approximations, provided for convenient real-time display.

For full accuracy and detail, you must upload and process the digital data from

the LISST-200X’s memory (disconnect LISST-200X from CTD and connect it

to computer; use Sequoia software to upload and process).

pH Calibration Coefficients

For the SBE 18, SBE 27, SBE 30, and AMT pH sensors, enter the slope and

offset from the calibration sheet:

pH = 7 + (Vout – offset) / (°K * 1.98416e-4 * slope)

where

°K = temperature in degrees Kelvin

Pressure/FGP (voltage output) Calibration Coefficients

Enter scale factor and offset.

output [Kpa] = (volts * scale factor) + offset

where:

scale factor = 100 * pressure sensor range [bar] / voltage range [volts]

Note: SBE Data Processing can process data for an instrument interfacing with

up to eight pressure/fgp sensors.

Notes:

 See Application Notes 18-1 and

18-2 for calculation of pH

calibration coefficients.

 Seasoft-DOS < version 4.008

ignored temperature compensation

of a pH electrode. The relationship

between the two methods is:

pH = pH old + (7 – 2087/°K)

For older sensors, run pHfit version

2.0 (in Seasoft-DOS) using Vout,

pH, and temperature values from

the original calibration sheet to

compute the new values for offset

and slope.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 4: Configuring Instrument (Configure) SBE Data Processing

Suspended Sediment Calibration Coefficients

 Sequoia LISST-25

The LISST-25 sensor requires two channels – one for scattering output and

one for transmission output. Select both when configuring the instrument.

For the scattering channel, enter Total volume concentration constant

(Cal), Sauter mean diameter calibration (), Clean H2O scattering output

(VS0), and Clean H2O transmission output (VT0) from the calibration sheet.

For the transmission channel, no additional coefficients are required; they

are all defined for the scattering channel.

Optical transmission =  = VT / VT0

Beam C = - ln () / 0.025 [1 / meters]

Total Volume Concentration = TV = Cal * [ ( VS / ) - VS0 ] [liters / liter]

Sauter Mean Diameter = SMD =  * [ TV / ( - ln ( ) ] [microns]

where

VT = transmission channel voltage output

VS = scattering channel voltage output

The calibration coefficients supplied by Sequoia are based on water

containing spherical particles. Perform calibrations using seawater with

particle shapes that are similar to what is expected in situ.

 Sequoia LISST-ABS

Enter Calibration factor.

Concentration (mg/L) = calibration factor * 10 2 (Volts -1)

where

The calibration factor can be set to 1.0 for uncalibrated concentration.

Perform calibrations as described in Sequoia’s user manual.

Transmissometer Calibration Coefficients

 Sea Tech and Chelsea (Alphatracka)

Enter M, B, and path length (in meters)

Path length (distance between lenses) is based on sensor size

(for example, 25 cm transmissometer = 0.25m path length, etc.).

light transmission (%) = M * volts + B

beam attenuation coefficient (c) = - (1/z) * ln (light transmission [decimal])

where

M = ( Tw / [W0 – Y0] ) (A0 – Y0) / (A1 – Y1) B = - M * Y1

A0 = factory voltage output in air (manufacturer factory calibration)

A1 = current (most recent) voltage output in air

Y0 = factory dark or zero (blocked path) voltage (manufacturer factory

calibration)

Y1 = current (most recent) dark or zero (blocked path) voltage

W0 = factory voltage output in pure water (manufacturer factory calibration)

Tw = % transmission in pure water

(for transmission relative to water, Tw = 100%; or

for transmission relative to air, Tw is defined by table below.

Tw = % Transmission in Pure Water (relative to AIR)

Wavelength 10 cm Path Length 25 cm Path Length

488 nm (blue) 99.8% 99.6%

532 nm (green) 99.5% 98.8%

660 nm (red) 96.0 - 96.4% 90.2 - 91.3%

Transmissometer Example

(from calibration sheet) A0 = 4.743 V, Y0 = 0.002 V, W0 = 4.565 Volts

Tw = 100% (for transmission relative to water)

(from current calibration) A1 = 4.719 volts and Y1 = 0.006 volts

M = 22.046 B = - 0.132

Note: SBE Data Processing can process data for an instrument interfacing

with up to two transmissometers in any combination of Sea Tech and

Chelsea Alphatracka,

Note:

See Application Note 7 for

calculation of M and B.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 4: Configuring Instrument (Configure) SBE Data Processing

 WET Labs AC3

This sensor requires two channels - one for fluorometer voltage (listed

under fluorometers in the dialog box) and one for transmissometer voltage

(listed under transmissometers). Select both when configuring the

instrument.

Enter Ch2o, Vh2o, VDark, and X from calibration sheet.

Beam attenuation = {[log (Vh2o - VDark) - log (V - VDark)] /X} + Ch2o

Beam transmission (%) = exp ( -beam attenuation * X) * 100

 WET Labs C-Star

Enter M, B, and path length (in meters)

Path length (distance between lenses) is based on sensor size

(for example, 25 cm transmissometer = 0.25m path length, etc.).

light transmission (%) = M * volts + B

beam attenuation coefficient (c) = - (1/z) * ln (light transmission [decimal])

where

M = ( Tw / [W0 – Y0] ) (A0 – Y0) / (A1 – Y1) B = - M * Y1

A0 = Vair = factory voltage output in air (manufacturer factory calibration)

A1 = current (most recent) voltage output in air

Y0 = Vd = factory dark or zero (blocked path) voltage (manufacturer

factory calibration)

Y1 = current (most recent) dark or zero (blocked path) voltage

W0 = Vref = factory voltage output in pure water (manufacturer factory

calibration)

Tw = % transmission in pure water

(for transmission relative to water, Tw = 100%; or

for transmission relative to air, Tw is defined by table below.

Tw = % Transmission in Pure Water (relative to AIR)

Wavelength 10 cm Path Length 25 cm Path Length

488 nm (blue) 99.8% 99.6%

532 nm (green) 99.5% 98.8%

660 nm (red) 96.0 - 96.4% 90.2 - 91.3%

Transmissometer Example

(from calibration sheet) Vair = 4.743 V, Vd = 0.002 V, Vref = 4.565 V

Tw = 100% (for transmission relative to water)

(from current calibration) A1 = 4.719 volts and Y1 = 0.006 volts

M = 22.046 B = - 0.132

Note: SBE Data Processing can process data for an instrument interfacing

with up to six WET Labs C-Stars.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 4: Configuring Instrument (Configure) SBE Data Processing

User Exponential (for user-defined sensor)

Calibration Coefficients

The user exponential allows you to define an equation to relate the sensor

output voltage to calculated engineering units, if your sensor is not pre-defined

in Sea-Bird software. This equation is useful for an exponential/logarithmic

relationship between output voltage and converted units.

Enter scaling factor and exponent factor.

Val = scaling factor * 10 (exponent factor * V)

where:

V = voltage from sensor

Scaling and exponent factors = user-defined sensor exponential coefficients

If desired, enter the sensor name and sensor units. These will appear in the data

file header.

Note: SBE Data Processing can process data for an instrument interfacing with

up to three sensors defined with user exponential.

Example

A manufacturer defines the output voltage V of their sensor as:

V = 0.5 * log10 (100C), where C is the value in engineering units.

Converting this to an exponential equation:

C = 0.01 * 10 2V

Set this equal to user exponential equation and calculate scaling and exponent factor.

0.01 * 10 2V = scaling factor * 10 (exponent factor * V)

scaling factor = 0.01 exponent factor = 2

User Polynomial (for user-defined sensor)

Calibration Coefficients

The user polynomial allows you to define an equation to relate the sensor

output voltage to calculated engineering units, if your sensor is not pre-defined

in Sea-Bird software. This equation is useful for a polynomial relationship

between output voltage and converted units.

Enter a0, a1, a2, and a3.

Val = a0 + (a1 * V) + (a2 * V2) + (a3 * V3)

where:

V = voltage from sensor

a0, a1, a2, and a3 = user-defined sensor polynomial coefficients

If desired, enter the sensor name. This name will appear in the data file header.

Note: SBE Data Processing can process data for an instrument interfacing with

up to three sensors defined with user polynomials.

Example

A manufacturer defines the output of their sensor as:

NTU = (Vsample – Vblank) * scale factor

Set this equal to user polynomial equation and calculate a0, a1, a2, and a3.

(Vsample – Vblank) * scale factor = a0 + (a1 * V) + (a2 * V2) + (a3 * V3)

Expanding left side of equation and using consistent notation (Vsample = V):

scale factor * V – scale factor * Vblank = a0 + (a1 * V) + (a2 * V2) + (a3 * V3)

Left side of equation has no V2 or V3 terms, so a2 and a3 are 0; rearranging:

(– scale factor * Vblank) + (scale factor * V) = a0 + (a1 * V)

a0 = – scale factor * Vblank a1 = scale factor a2 = a3 = 0

Zaps Calibration Coefficients

Enter M and B from calibration sheet.

z = (M * volts) + B [nmoles]

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 4: Configuring Instrument (Configure) SBE Data Processing

Calibration Coefficients for RS-232 Sensors

Unless otherwise noted, SBE Data Processing supports only one of each auxiliary

sensor model (for example, you cannot specify two Aanderaa Optodes).

SBE 63 Optical Dissolved Oxygen Sensor Calibration

Coefficients

The SBE 63 must be set up to output data in a format compatible with Sea-Bird

CTDs (SetFormat=1). The SBE 63 manual lists the equation for calculating

dissolved oxygen and the calibration coefficients (see the manual on our

website). Enter the serial number, calibration date, and calibration coefficients.

SBE 38 Temperature Sensor and

SBE 50 Pressure Sensor Calibration Coefficients

The SBE 38 must be set up to output converted data (°C) when integrated with

a CTD. The SBE 50 must be set up to output converted data (psia) when

integrated with a CTD. Therefore, calibration coefficients are not required in

SBE Data Processing; just enter the serial number and calibration date.

Note: SBE Data Processing can process data for an SBE 25plus interfacing

with up to two SBE 38s or two SBE 50s.

WET Labs Sensor Calibration Coefficients

If you select the WET Labs RS-232 sensor, SBE Data Processing adds three

lines to the Channel/Sensor table. If integrating an ECO Triplet, select sensors

for all three channels. If integrating a dual ECO sensor (such as the FLNTU),

select sensors for the first two channels, and leave the third channel Free. If

integrating a single sensor, select the sensor for the first channel, and leave the

second and third channels Free.

The following WET Labs sensors are available as RS-232 output sensors:

 Fluorometers – ECO CDOM, ECO-AFL/FL, and WETStar

 Transmissometers – C-Star

 Turbidity Meters – ECO-BB and ECO NTU

These sensors are also available as voltage sensors; calibration coefficient

information for these sensors is detailed above in Calibration Coefficients for

Voltage Sensors. Values for the calibration coefficients are listed on the WET

Labs calibration sheets in terms of both analog output (voltage) and digital

output (counts); use the digital output values when calculating / entering

calibration coefficients for the RS-232 sensors. SBE Data Processing calculates

the converted sensor output based on the counts output (instead of the voltage

output) by the sensor. For all sensors, enter the serial number, calibration date,

and calibration coefficients.

Note: SBE Data Processing can process data for an SBE 25plus interfacing

with up to two RS-232 WET Labs sensors.

Notes:

 WET Labs RS-232 sensors are

compatible only with the

SBE 16plus V2, 16plus-IM V2,

19plus V2, and 25plus. See the CTD

manual for required setup for the

WET Labs RS-232 sensor.

 See below for WET Labs SeaOWL

sensor.

Notes:

 The SBE 38 is compatible only with

the SBE 16plus V2, 16plus-IM V2,

19plus V2, and 25plus.

 The SBE 50 is compatible only with

the SBE 16plus V2, 16plus-IM V2,

and 25plus.

See the CTD manual for required

setup for the SBE 38 and SBE 50.

Note:

The SBE 63 is compatible only with

the SBE 16plus V2, 19plus V2, 25plus,

and ODO MicroCATs (37-SMP-ODO,

SIP-ODO, IMP-ODO). See the CTD

manual for required setup for the

SBE 63.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 4: Configuring Instrument (Configure) SBE Data Processing

WET Labs SeaOWL UVA Sensor Calibration Coefficients

If you select the WET Labs SeaOWL UVA sensor, SBE Data Processing adds

three lines to the Channel/Sensor table. Enter the serial number, calibration

date, and calibration coefficients Dark Output and scale factor for each channel

(chlorophyll fluorometer, turbidity meter, and FDOM fluorometer).

Concentration (units) = (V – Dark Output) * scale factor

where

V = in situ voltage output

Dark Output = clean water voltage output with black tape on detector

Scale factor = multiplier (units/count)

In general, turbidity sensors are calibrated to a standard (formazin). However,

particle size, shape, refraction, etc. in seawater varies. These variations affect

the results unless field calibrations are performed on typical water samples.

Perform calibrations using seawater with typical water sample (i.e., particles,

phytoplankton populations, etc. that are similar to what is expected in situ).

Note: SBE Data Processing can process data for an SBE 25plus interfacing

with up to two WET Labs SeaOWL sensors.

GTD Calibration Coefficients

The GTD must be set up to output converted data (millibars) when integrated

with a CTD. Therefore, calibration coefficients are not required in SBE Data

Processing; just enter the serial number and calibration date.

Aanderaa Oxygen Optode Calibration Coefficients

Enter the serial number, calibration date, and information required for salinity

and depth corrections. The internal salinity must match the value you

programmed into the Optode (the value is ignored if you do not enable the

Salinity correction). If you enable Salinity correction, SBE Data Processing

corrects the oxygen output from the Optode based on the actual salinity

(calculated from the CTD data). If you enable Depth correction, SBE Data

Processing corrects the oxygen output from the Optode based on the depth

(calculated from the CTD data).

Notes:

 The Optode is compatible only with

the SBE 16plus V2, 16plus-IM V2,

and 19plus V2. See the CTD manual

for required setup for the Optode.

 See Calibration Coefficients for

Voltage Sensors above for voltage-

output Oxygen sensors, including

the SBE 43.

Notes:

 The GTD is compatible only with the

SBE 16plus V2, 16plus-IM V2, and

19plus V2. See the CTD manual for

required setup for the GTD.

 SBE Data Processing supports

single or dual GTDs.

Notes:

 WET Labs SeaOWL UV-A™ is

compatible only with the SBE 16plus

V2, 19plus V2, and 25plus. See the

CTD manual for required setup for

the WET Labs SeaOWL.

 See above for other WET Labs

RS-232 sensors.

 For the SBE 18, SBE 27, SBE 30,

and AMT pH sensors, see

Calibration Coefficients for Voltage

Sensors.



Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 5: Raw Data Conversion Modules SBE Data Processing

Section 5: Raw Data Conversion Modules

Module Name Module Description

Data

Conversion

Convert raw data from CTD (.hex, .dat, or .xml file) to

engineering units, storing the converted data in

.cnv file (all data) and/or .ros file (water bottle data).

Note:

.xml file conversion only applicable to SBE 25plus.

Bottle

Summary

Summarize data from water sampler bottle .ros file,

storing the results in .btl file.

Mark Scan Create .bsr bottle scan range file from .mrk data file.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 5: Raw Data Conversion Modules SBE Data Processing

Data Conversion

Data Conversion:

1. Converts raw data to engineering units from:

 .dat file from SBE 911plus, acquired with Seasave versions < 6.0, or

 .hex file from SBE 911plus, acquired with Seasave versions > 7.0, or

 hex file from other CTDs, acquired with any version of Seasave or by

uploading data from memory (if applicable), or

 .xml file uploaded from SBE 25plus.

2. Stores the converted data in a .cnv file and (optional) .ros file.

The File Setup tab in the dialog box looks like this:

Notes:

Algorithms used for calculation of

derived parameters in Data

Conversion, Derive, Sea Plot,

SeaCalc III [EOS-80 (Practical

Salinity) tab], and Seasave are

identical, except as noted in

Appendix V: Derived Parameter

Formulas (EOS-80; Practical

Salinity), and are based on EOS-80

equations.

Location to store all information

input in File Setup and Data

Setup tabs. Open to select

different .psa file, Save or

Save As to save current

settings, or Restore to reset

all settings to match last saved

version. See note above.

Instrument configuration file

location. Select to pick a

different .con or .xmlcon file, or

Modify to view and/or modify

instrument configuration.

See Section 4: Configuring

Instrument (Configure).

Directory and file names for

raw data (.hex, .dat, or .xml).

Select to pick a different file.

To process multiple raw data

files from same directory:

1. Click Select.

2. In Select dialog box, hold

down Ctrl key while clicking

on each desired file.

Directory and file names for converted output (.cnv) data.

 If more than 1 data file is to be processed, Output file field

disappears and output file name is set to match input file

name. For example, if processing test.dat and test1.dat,

output files will be named test.cnv and test1.cnv.

 SBE Data Processing adds Name append to (each) output

file name, before .cnv extension. For example, if processing

test.dat and test1.dat with a Name append of 06-20-00,

output files will be test06-20-00.cnv and test106-20-00.cnv.

Click

Start Process

to begin

processing data. Status field

shows Processing complete

when done.

Return to SBE Data Processing window.

 If Confirm Program Setup Change was selected in Options menu - If you made

changes and did not Save or Save As, program asks if you want to save changes.

 If Confirm Program Setup Change was not selected in Options menu - Button says

Save & Exit. If you do not want to save changes, use Cancel button to exit.



Select to have program find .con or .xmlcon

file with same name and in same directory

as data file. For example, if processing

test.dat and this option is selected, program

searches for test.xmlcon (same directory as

test.dat); if it does not find test.xmlcon, it

searches for test.con.

 Also select if more than 1 data file is to be

processed, and data files have different

configuration files. For example, if

processing test.dat and test1.dat, and this

option is selected, program searches for

test.xmlcon and test1.xmlcon (same

directory as test.dat and test1.dat); if it does

not find .xmlcon files, it searches for .con

files.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 5: Raw Data Conversion Modules SBE Data Processing

The Data Setup tab in the dialog box looks like this:

Program skips first scans to skip

over scans.

 If Process scans to end of file

selected: process all

remaining scans (upcast

and downcast scans if Upcast

and downcast selected;

downcast scans only if

downcast selected).

 If Process scans to end of file

not selected: process next

scans to process.

Define scans from CTD data

file to be included in bottle

file. See Data Conversion:

Creating Water Bottle (.ros)

Files below.

Begin processing data.

Status field on File Setup

tab shows Processing

complete when done.

Return to SBE Data Processing window.

 If Confirm Program Setup Change was selected in Options

menu - If you made changes and did not Save or Save As,

program asks if you want to save changes.

 If Confirm Program Setup Change

was not selected in Options

menu - Button says Save & Exit. If you do not want to save

changes, use Cancel button to exit.

Create converted data file only,

bottle file only (for subsequent

processing by Bottle Summary),

or both.

Convert downcast data, or upcast and downcast data.



Binary - smaller file, processed faster than ASCII

file by other SBE Data Processing modules.

 ASCII - larger file, can be viewed with a text editor.

Translate can translate converted data file from

binary to ASCII or vice versa.

Source of data for creating bottle

file:

 In same directory as input data

file, with same file name - auto

fire module or ECO .afm file,

bottle log .bl file, or bottle scan

range .bsr file, or

 Scans marked with bottle

confirm bit in input data file

See Data Conversion: Creating

Water Bottle (.ros) Files below.

Select to have software prompt you to modify start time to put

in output .cnv header (instead of using one of sources for start

time listed above), or to add a note to output .cnv header.

Select to replace existing header

in input file with header in .hdr file.

Program looks for a file with a

matching name (but .hdr

extension) in same directory as

input file.

Select which variables to convert

and output (see dialog box below).

Select start time source for header:

 Instrument’s time stamp –

instrument’s time stamp in first

data scan (if available) or in

header of input raw data file.

 NMEA time – time from a NMEA

device that was integrated with

system; time in first data scan (if

available) or in header of input

raw data file.

 System UTC – computer time in

first data scan (if available) or in

header of input raw data file.

 Upload time – time that data was

uploaded from instrument’s

memory.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 5: Raw Data Conversion Modules SBE Data Processing

The Select Output Variables dialog box (which appears when you click

Select Output Variables on the Data Setup tab) looks like this:

The Miscellaneous tab in the Data Conversion dialog box looks like this:

The Miscellaneous tab defines parameters required for output of specific

variables (depth, average sound velocity, plume anomaly, potential

temperature anomaly, oxygen, descent rate, and acceleration). Entries are used

only if you are calculating and outputting the associated variable to the .cnv

file. For example, if you do not select Oxygen in the Select Output Variables

dialog box, Data Conversion ignores the Oxygen window size and the

enabling of hysteresis and Tau corrections on the Miscellaneous tab.



Add variable: click blank field in Variable Name column, click desired

variable in list, click Add.

 Change variable: click existing variable in Variable Name column,

click desired variable in list, click Change.

 Insert variable: click existing variable below desired sequence # in

Variable Name column, click desired variable in list, click Insert.

If Data Conversion requires additional information to compute a variable,

a dialog box appears after variable is selected, with fields for required

user-input parameters.

List includes all variables

that can be converted from

input data file or derived

from variables in input

data file.

Click

Data

to view/modify user-input parameters for selected variable (if

applicable). Some variables share a user-input parameter, so changing a

parameter for one variable automatically changes it for the other:

 Depth and average sound velocity use same latitude (if NMEA data

unavailable).

 Descent rate and acceleration use same time window size.

 A

ll SBE 13, 23, and 43 oxygen sensors use same time window size, Tau

correction, and (SBE 43 only) hysteresis correction.

Note: An alternate method of entering these parameters is on

Miscellaneous tab in Data Conversion dialog box.

Note:

Values for these parameters can be

changed on the Miscellaneous tab

or by double clicking on the output

variable in the Select Output

Variables dialog box (above);

changes made in one location are

automatically made in the other

location.

Oxygen selections apply to

SBE 43 and Beckman/YSI

sensors. They do not apply

to SBE 63 or Aanderaa

Oxygen Optode.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 5: Raw Data Conversion Modules SBE Data Processing

Data Conversion: Creating Water Bottle (.ros) Files

A .ros water bottle file contains:

 data for each scan associated with a bottle firing, and

 data for user-selected range of scans before and after each bottle firing

Scan range data for creation of a water bottle file can come from:

 Scans marked with bottle confirm bit in input data file - if used

- SBE 9plus with an SBE 11plus Deck Unit and G.O. 1015 Rosette, or

- SBE 9plus with an SBE 17plus Searam and SBE 32 Carousel

Water Sampler.

For these systems, the bottle confirm bit in the input (.hex or .dat) data file

is set for all scans within a 1.5-second duration after a bottle firing

confirmation is received from the water sampler.

 Bottle log (.bl) file - if used Seasave to interface with

- SBE 9plus with SBE 11plus Deck Unit and G.O. 1016 Rosette or

SBE 32 Carousel Water Sampler, or

- SBE 19, 19plus, 19plus V2, 25, or 49 with SBE 33 Deck Unit and

SBE 32 Carousel Water Sampler, or

- SBE 19, 19plus, 19plus V2, 25, or 49 with SBE 33 Deck Unit and SBE

55 ECO Water Sampler.

For these systems, Seasave creates the .bl file. Each time a bottle fire

confirmation is received, the bottle sequence number, position, date, time,

and beginning and ending scan numbers (1.5-second duration for each

bottle) are written to the .bl file.

 Auto Fire Module or ECO (.afm) file - if used

- Carousel Auto Fire Module (AFM) with SBE 19, 19plus, 19plus V2,

25, or 50 and SBE 32 Carousel Water Sampler, or

- SBE 19, 19plus, 19plus V2, 25, or 50 and SBE 55 ECO Water Sampler

(autonomous operation).

For these systems, the .afm file contains five scans of data recorded by the

AFM or SBE 55 ECO Water Sampler for each bottle firing.

 Bottle scan range (.bsr) file - if used Mark Scan feature in Seasave during

data acquisition to create a .mrk file; use Mark Scan to convert the .mrk

file to a .bsr file before running Data Conversion. The format for the .bsr

file is:

beginning scan # for bottle #1, ending scan # for bottle #1

…

beginning scan # for last bottle, ending scan # for last bottle

Example: test.bsr contains -

1000, 1020

2000, 2020

4000, 4020

The .ros file created using test.bsr would contain scans 1000 - 1020 for

bottle #1, 2000 - 2020 for bottle #2, and 4000 - 4020 for bottle #3.

The amount of data written to the .ros file is based on:

 Scan range offset - determines the first scan output to the .ros file for

each bottle, relative to the first scan with a confirmation bit set or written

to a .afm, .bsr, or .bl file.

 Scan range duration - determines the number of scans output to the .ros

file for each bottle.

Example: A bottle confirmation for an SBE 911plus is received at scan 10,000

(scan 10,000 and subsequent scans for 1.5 seconds have confirmation bit set).

In Data Conversion, Scan range offset is set to -2 seconds, and Scan range

duration is set to 5 seconds. If the scan rate is 24 scans/second,

10,000 - 2 second offset (24 scans/second) = 9,952

9,952 + 5 second duration (24 scans/second) = 10,072

Therefore, scans 9,952 through 10,072 will be written to the .ros file.

Notes:

 You may have more than one

source of scan range data

available. For example, if Seasave

is used with an SBE 911plus and

SBE 32 Carousel Water Sampler,

a bottle log (.bl) file is created.

Additionally, if you used the Mark

Scan feature in Seasave, a .mrk

file is created.

 If scan range data is defined by a

.afm file, Data Conversion creates

a .bl file (same name as input data

file, with .bl extension). The .bl file

is used when processing the

water bottle data in Bottle

Summary.

 You can create a .bsr file in a text

editor if scan range data is not

available in any of these forms.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 5: Raw Data Conversion Modules SBE Data Processing

Data Conversion: Notes and General Information

Data Conversion was written to accommodate most sensors that have been

installed on Sea-Bird products. See the configuration page at the beginning of

your instrument manual for the sensors that were installed on your system.

 If you plan to process the data with other modules, select only the primary

variables to be converted, and then use Derive to compute derived

parameters such as salinity, density, sound velocity, and oxygen.

 If desired, you can select the same variable multiple times for the output

.cnv file. If you do, data processing operations on that variable in other

modules will use the last occurrence of the variable in the file.

Example: Select Primary Conductivity, Primary Temperature, Pressure,

and Primary Conductivity (again) for output variables (columns 1, 2, 3,

and 4 respectively). Then, if you run Cell Thermal Mass, it will correct the

conductivity in column 4 only, leaving column 1 uncorrected; you could

plot the corrected and uncorrected conductivity to see the changes. If you

then run Derive to calculate salinity, it will use the corrected conductivity

in column 4 in the salinity calculation.

 If you will use Derive to compute:

 Salinity, density, or other parameters that depend on salinity -

include pressure, temperature, and conductivity in the output file.

For a moored instrument without optional pressure sensor (SBE 16,

16plus, 16plus-IM, 16plus V2, or 16plus-IM V2), if you select

pressure as an output variable, Data Conversion inserts a column with

the moored pressure (entered in the configuration file Data dialog) in

the output .cnv file. For a thermosalinograph (SBE 21 or 45), if you

select pressure as an output variable, Data Conversion inserts a

column of 0’s for the pressure in the output .cnv file. The pressure

column is needed for Derive to calculate salinity, density, etc.

 Oxygen - include in the output file (along with pressure, temperature,

and conductivity)

For SBE 13 or 23 - oxygen current and oxygen temperature

For SBE 43 - oxygen value

 If you will use Bin Average:

 With depth bins - include depth in the output file

 With pressure bins - include pressure in the output file

 Pressure temperature is computed using a backward-looking, 30-second

running average, to prevent bit transitions in pressure temperature from

causing small jumps in computed pressure. Because the heavily insulated

pressure sensor has a thermal time constant on the order of one hour,

the 30-second average does not significantly alter the computed

pressure temperature.

 Oxygen, descent rate, and acceleration computed by Seasave and Data

Conversion are somewhat different from values computed by Derive,

because the algorithms calculate the derivative of the signal (oxygen

signal for oxygen, pressure signal for descent rate and acceleration) with

respect to time, using a linear regression to determine the slope. Seasave

and Data Conversion compute the derivative looking backward in time,

since they share common code and Seasave cannot use future values while

acquiring data in real time. Derive uses a centered window (equal number

of points before and after the scan; time window size is user input) to

obtain a better estimate of the derivative. Use Seasave and Data

Conversion to obtain a quick look at oxygen, descent rate, and

acceleration; use Derive to obtain the most accurate values.

 For an SBE 21 or 45 with a remote temperature sensor, Seasave,

Data Conversion, Derive, and Derive TEOS-10 all use the remote

temperature data when calculating density and sound velocity.

Note:

If you choose to compute derived

parameters in Data Conversion,

note that the algorithms are the

same as used in Derive (with the

exception of the oxygen, descent

rate, and acceleration calculations);

see Appendix V: Derived

Parameter Formulas for

algorithms for derived variables.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 5: Raw Data Conversion Modules SBE Data Processing

Data Conversion has the following /x parameters when run from the Command

Line Options dialog box, from the command line, or with batch file processing:

/x Parameter Description

/xdatcnv:skipN N = number of scans to skip.

/xdatcnv:pump For SBE 911plus, do not output scans if

pump status = off.

/xdatcnv:nomatch

Disable matching of header information to .con or .xmlcon

configuration file - program continues to run even if there is

a discrepancy in header information.

See Appendix I: Command Line Options, Command Line Operation, and Batch File Processing

for details on using parameters.

Data Conversion adds the following to the data file header for a

.cnv converted data file:

Label Description

Nquan

Number of columns (fields) of converted data.

Note: Data Conversion automatically adds 1 field to number

selected by user (i.e., if user selects 3 variables to convert,

then nquan=4). This added field, initially set to 0, is used by

Loop Edit to mark bad scans.

Nvalues Number of scans converted.

Units Specified (indicates units are specified separately for each

variable).

Name n Sensor (and units) associated with data in column n.

Span n Span (highest - lowest value) of data in column n.

Interval Scan rate (seconds).

Start_time Data start time.

Bad_flag For information only; value that Loop Edit and Wild Edit

will use to mark bad scans and bad data values.

Sensors Sensor description, serial number, and calibration date and

coefficients, all in XML format.

Datcnv_date Date and time that module was run. Also shows how many

columns of data output (not including flag column).

Datcnv_in Input .hex (or .dat) data file and .con or .xmlcon

configuration file.

Datcnv_skipover Number of scans to skip over in processing.

Datcnv_ox_

hysteresis_correction

Whether hysteresis correction was performed on oxygen

data.

Datcnv_ox_tau_

correction Whether tau correction was performed on oxygen data.

File type Selected output file type - ASCII or binary.

Data Conversion adds the following to the data file header for a

.ros water bottle file:

Label Description

Nquan

Number of columns (fields) of converted data.

Note: Data Conversion automatically adds 1 field to number

selected by user (i.e., if user selects 3 variables to convert,

then nquan=4). This added field, initially set to 0, is used by

Loop Edit to mark bad scans.

Nvalues Number of scans converted.

Units Specified (indicates units are specified separately for each

variable).

Name n Sensor (and units) associated with data in column n.

Interval Scan rate (seconds).

Start_time Data start time.

Sensors Sensor description, serial number, and calibration date and

coefficients, all in XML format.

Datcnv_date Date and time that module was run.

Datcnv_in Input .hex (or .dat) data file and .con or .xmlcon

configuration file.

Datcnv_bottle_

scan_range_source

Source of data for creating bottle file, and scan range offset

and duration.

Datcnv_scans_

per_bottle

Number of data scans/bottle in .ros file; based on scan range

offset and duration, and CTD sampling rate

Notes:

 Each SBE Data Processing

module that modifies a .cnv

file adds information to the

header and updates nquan,

nvalues, name n, span n,

interval, and file_type, as

applicable.

 Calibration coefficients were

added to the file header for a

.cnv file and for a .ros water

bottle file in SBE Data

Processing version 7.19.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 5: Raw Data Conversion Modules SBE Data Processing

Bottle Summary

Bottle Summary reads a .ros file created by Data Conversion and writes a

bottle data summary to a .btl file. The .ros file must contain (as a minimum)

temperature, pressure, and conductivity (or salinity).

The output .btl file includes:

 Bottle position, optional bottle serial number, and date/time

 User-selected derived variables - computed for each bottle from mean

values of input variables (temperature, pressure, conductivity, etc.)

 User-selected averaged variables - computed for each bottle from

input variables

The maximum number of scans processed per bottle is 1440.

In addition to the .ros input file:

 If a .bl file (same name as input data file, with .bl extension) is found in

the input file directory, Bottle Summary uses bottle position data from the

.bl file. The bottle position data defines the bottle firing sequence - the .bl

file contains the bottle firing sequence number, bottle position, date and

time, and beginning and ending scan number for each bottle.

 If a .sn file (same name as input data file, with .sn extension) is found in

the input file directory, bottle serial numbers are inserted between the

bottle position and date/time columns in the .btl file output. The format

for the .sn file is:

Bottle position, serial number (with a comma separating the two fields)

Note:

You can create a .sn file in a text

editor.

Note:

Bottle Summary was previously

called Rosette Summary.

Note:

A .bl file is created by:

 Seasave, during real-time data

acquisition, or

 Data Conversion, if the source of

scan rage data was a .afm file.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 5: Raw Data Conversion Modules SBE Data Processing

The Data Setup tab in the dialog box looks like this:

Bottle Summary adds the following to the data file header:

Label* Description

Bottlesum_date Date and time that module was run.

Bottlesum_in Input .ros bottle data file and .con or .xmlcon

configuration file.

Bottlesum_ox_

tau_correction

Tau correction applied to oxygen data? Only appears if

oxygen is derived.

*Labels were previously rossum_date and rossum_in.

Note:

The File Setup tab and

Header View tab are similar

for all modules; see Section 2:

Installation and Use.

Select input variables to be averaged. Mean and

standard deviation will be calculated and output for

each bottle.

 If Output min/max values for averaged variables

is selected, minimum and maximum values will

also be output for each bottle.

Return to SBE Data Processing window.

 If Confirm Program Setup Change was selected in Options menu - If you made

changes and did not Save or Save As, program asks if you want to save changes.

 If Confirm Program Setup Change was not selected in Options menu - Button says

Save & Exit. If you do not want to save changes, use Cancel button to exit.

Begin processing data. Status field

on File Setup tab shows

Processing complete when done.

Select variables to derive from input data. Derived

variables are computed from mean values of input

variables (temperature, conductivity, pressure, etc.)

for each bottle.

 Oxygen can be derived if oxygen data (oxygen

current and temperature for SBE 13 or 23; oxygen

signal for SBE 43) is in the .ros file.

Bottle Summary calculates derivative of oxygen

current (or signal), using a least squares fit to all

the oxygen data for each bottle. Oxygen is

calculated using mean values for temperature,

pressure, and salinity, derivative, and scan-by-

scan values of oxygen current and temperature (or

signal).

Ignored if not computing oxygen in derived

variables:

Tau correction ([tau(T,P) * V/t] in SBE 43 or

[tau * doc/dt] in SBE 13 or 23) improves

response of measured signal in regions of large

oxygen gradients. However, this term also

amplifies residual noise in signal (especially in

deep water), and in some situations this

negative consequence overshadows gains in

signal responsiveness.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 5: Raw Data Conversion Modules SBE Data Processing

Mark Scan

Mark Scan creates a bottle scan range (.bsr) file from a .mrk data file created

in Seasave. The data in the .bsr file can be used by Data Conversion to create a

.ros file, and the .ros file can be used by Bottle Summary to create a bottle data

summary .btl file.

The input .mrk file contains one scan with the mark number, system time,

and scan number for each time Mark Scan was clicked while in Seasave’s

Mark Scan Control dialog box (accessed by selecting Mark Scan Control in

Seasave’s Real-Time Control menu). Mark Scan’s output .bsr file points to a

user-defined range of adjacent scans for each marked scan. Note that the

output .bsr file only contains the pointers to the scans, and does not contain

the data.

The Data Setup tab in the dialog box looks like this:

Mark Scan’s output .bsr file does not have a header.

Note:

Alternatively, an ASCII text editor can

be used to create the .bsr file. The

format for the output .bsr file is:

Beginning scan for bottle 1, ending scan for

bottle 1

Beginning scan for bottle 2, ending scan for

bottle 2

Beginning scan for last bottle, ending scan

for last bottle

Note that a comma must separate the

beginning and ending scan numbers.

Define the range of scans around each scan in

the .mrk file to include in the .bsr file.

 offset - number of scans before or after scan

in .bsr file for starter pointer

 duration - number of scans to include in .bsr

file for each scan in .mrk file

Example: Offset is -5 scans and duration is

10 scans. If .mrk file contains scans 16 and

128, .bsr file will look like this:

11, 21 (16-5=11; 11+10=21)

123, 133 (128-5=123; 123+10=133)

Return to SBE Data Processing window.

 If Confirm Program Setup Change was selected in Options menu - If you made

changes and did not Save or Save As, program asks if you want to save changes.

 If Confirm Program Setup Change was not selected in Options menu - Button says

Save & Exit. If you do not want to save changes, use Cancel button to exit.

Begin processing data. Status field

on File Setup tab shows

Processing complete when done.

Note:

The File Setup tab is similar

for all modules; see Section 2:

Installation and Use.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 6: Data Processing Modules SBE Data Processing

Section 6: Data Processing Modules

All data processing is performed on converted data from a .cnv file.

Module Name Module Description

Align CTD Align data relative to pressure (typically used for

conductivity, temperature, and oxygen).

Bin Average Average data, basing bins on pressure, depth, scan

number, or time range.

Buoyancy Compute Brunt Väisälä buoyancy and

stability frequency.

Cell Thermal

Mass Perform conductivity thermal mass correction.

Derive

Calculate salinity, density, sound velocity, oxygen,

potential temperature, dynamic height, etc. based on

EOS-80 (Practical Salinity) equations.

Derive

TEOS-10

Calculate thermodynamic properties based on TEOS-10

(Absolute Salinity).

Filter Low-pass filter columns of data.

Loop Edit Mark a scan with badflag if scan fails pressure reversal or

minimum velocity tests.

Wild Edit Mark a data value with badflag to eliminate wild points.

Window

Filter

Filter data with triangle, cosine, boxcar, Gaussian, or

median window.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 6: Data Processing Modules SBE Data Processing

Align CTD

Align CTD aligns parameter data in time, relative to pressure. This ensures

that calculations of salinity, dissolved oxygen concentration, and other

parameters are made using measurements from the same parcel of water.

Typically, Align CTD is used to align temperature, conductivity, and oxygen

measurements relative to pressure.

There are three principal causes of misalignment of CTD measurements:

 physical misalignment of the sensors in depth

 inherent time delay (time constants) of the sensor responses

 water transit time delay in the pumped plumbing line - the time it takes

the parcel of water to go through the plumbing to each sensor (or, for free-

flushing sensors, the corresponding flushing delay, which depends on

profiling speed)

When measurements are properly aligned, salinity spiking (and density) errors

are minimized, and oxygen data corresponds to the proper pressure (e.g.,

temperature vs. oxygen plots agree between down and up profiles).

The Data Setup tab in the dialog box looks like this:

The Enter Advance Values dialog box looks like this:

Define alignment times.

Diagram shows sign

convention for Advance. If

0 seconds is entered,

alignment relative to

pressure (and time) remains

unchanged for that variable.

See discussion below to

determine appropriate

alignment times for

conductivity, temperature,

and oxygen.

Note:

Align CTD cannot be run on files that

have been averaged into pressure or

depth bins in Bin Average. If

alignment is necessary, run Align

CTD before running Bin Average.

- Advance

(delay)

+ Advance

Time

Upcast and Downcast mismatch with

Respect to Pressure

Define alignment times for all data.

Return to SBE Data Processing window.

 If Confirm Program Setup Change was selected in Options menu - If you made

changes and did not Save or Save As, program asks if you want to save changes.

 If Confirm Program Setup Change was not selected in Options menu - Button says

Save & Exit. If you do not want to save changes, use Cancel button to exit.

Begin processing data. Status field

on File Setup tab shows

Processing complete when done.

Note:

The File Setup tab and

Header View tab are similar

for all modules; see Section 2:

Installation and Use.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 6: Data Processing Modules SBE Data Processing

Align CTD: Conductivity and Temperature

Temperature and conductivity are often misaligned with respect to pressure.

Shifting temperature and conductivity relative to pressure can compensate.

As shown in the figures, indications of misalignment include:

 Depth mismatch between downcast and upcast data

 Spikes in the calculated salinity (which is dependent on temperature,

conductivity, and pressure) - caused by misalignment of temperature and

conductivity with each other

The best diagnostic of proper alignment is the elimination of salinity spikes

that coincide with very sharp temperature steps. To determine the best

alignment, plot 10 meters of temperature and salinity data at a depth that

contains a very sharp temperature step. For the downcast, when temperature

and salinity decrease with increasing pressure:

 A negative salinity spike at the conductivity step means that conductivity

leads temperature (conductivity sensor sees step before temperature sensor

does). Advance conductivity relative to temperature a negative number

of seconds.

 Conversely, if the salinity spike is positive, advance conductivity relative

to temperature a positive number of seconds.

The best alignment of conductivity with respect to temperature is obtained

when the salinity spikes are minimized. Some experimentation with different

advances is required to find the best alignment.

Typical Temperature Alignment

The SBE 19, 19plus, and 19plus V2 use a temperature sensor with a relatively

slow time response, while the SBE 9plus, 25, 25plus, and 49 use a temperature

sensor with a faster time response. Typical advances are:

Instrument Advance of Temperature Relative to Pressure (seconds)

9plus 0

19, 19plus, or

19plus V2 + 0.5

25 or 25plus 0

49 * + 0.0625

*The SBE 49 can be programmed to advance temperature relative to pressure

in real-time, eliminating the need to run Align CTD. See the SBE 49 manual

for details.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 6: Data Processing Modules SBE Data Processing

Typical Conductivity Alignment

 SBE 9plus - For an SBE 9plus with TC-ducted temperature and

conductivity sensors and a 3000-rpm pump, the typical lag of conductivity

relative to temperature is 0.073 seconds. The Deck Unit can be

programmed to advance conductivity relative to pressure, eliminating the

need to run Align CTD.

Following is an example of determining the value to enter in Align CTD:

Example: The SBE 11plus is factory-set to advance the primary

conductivity +1.75 scans (at 24 Hz, this is 1.75 / 24 = 0.073 seconds).

Advance conductivity relative to temperature in Align CTD:

0.073 - 1.75/24 = 0.0 seconds (enter 0 seconds for conductivity).

 SBE 19plus or 19plus V2 – For an SBE 19plus or 19plus V2 with a

standard 2000-rpm pump, do not advance conductivity.

 SBE 19 (not plus) – For an unpumped SBE 19, the conductivity

measurement may lead or lag that of temperature, because the flushing

rate of the conductivity cell depends on drop speed. If the SBE 19 is

lowered very slowly (< 20 cm/second, typically from a fixed platform or

ice), conductivity lags temperature. If the SBE 19 is lowered fast,

conductivity leads temperature. Typical advances of conductivity relative

to temperature range from 0 seconds at a lowering rate of

0.75 meters/second to -0.6 seconds for 2 meters/second (if temperature

was advanced +0.5 seconds, these correspond to conductivity advances of

+0.5 seconds and -0.1 seconds respectively).

 SBE 25 or 25plus - For an SBE 25 or 25plus with a standard 2000-rpm

pump, a typical advance of conductivity relative to temperature is

+0.1 seconds.

 SBE 49 – For a typical SBE 49 with TC duct and 3000 rpm pump, do not

advance conductivity.

If temperature is advanced relative to pressure and you do not want to

change the relative timing of temperature and conductivity, you must add

the same advance to conductivity.

Example (typical of an unpumped SBE 19):

Advance temperature relative to pressure +0.5 seconds to compensate for slow

response time of sensor.

 If the CTD is lowered at 0.75 m/s, advance conductivity relative to

temperature 0 seconds. Calculate advance of conductivity relative to

pressure to enter in Align CTD: +0.5 + 0 = +0.5 seconds

 If the CTD is lowered at 2 m/s, advance conductivity relative to

temperature -0.6 seconds. Calculate advance of conductivity relative to

pressure to enter in Align CTD: +0.5 + (-0.6) = -0.1 seconds

Note:

All SBE 11 series deck units can

advance primary conductivity, which

may eliminate the need to use Align

CTD for conductivity. The SBE 11plus

does not advance secondary

conductivity. The SBE 11plus V2 can

advance secondary conductivity and

all voltage channels; the advance time

is user-programmable.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 6: Data Processing Modules SBE Data Processing

Align CTD: Oxygen

Oxygen data is also systematically delayed with respect to pressure. The two

primary causes are the long time constant of the oxygen sensor (for the

SBE 43, ranging from 2 seconds at 25 ºC to approximately 5 seconds at 0 ºC)

and an additional delay from the transit time of water in the pumped plumbing

line. As with temperature and conductivity, you can compensate for this delay

by shifting oxygen data relative to pressure. Typical advances for the SBE 43,

13, or 23 are:

Instrument Advance of Oxygen Relative to Pressure (seconds)

9plus +2 to +5

19plus or

19plus V2 +3 to +7

19 (not plus) +3 to +7 (pumped), +1 to +5 (unpumped)

25 or 25plus +3 to +7

Align CTD adds the following to the data file header:

Label Description

Alignctd_date Date and time that module was run.

Alignctd_in Input .cnv converted data file.

Alignctd_adv Variables aligned and their respective alignment times.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 6: Data Processing Modules SBE Data Processing

Bin Average

Bin Average averages data, using averaging intervals based on:

 pressure range,

 depth range,

 scan number range, or

 time range

The Data Setup tab in the dialog box looks like this:

Note:

Align CTD, which aligns parameter

data in time, relative to pressure,

cannot be run on files that have been

averaged into pressure or depth bins

in Bin Average. If alignment is

necessary, run Align CTD before

running Bin Average.

Note:

The File Setup tab and Header View

tab are similar for all modules; see

Section 2: Installation and Use.

Skip last n scans of data at end of file; useful for

omitting scans associated with CTD recovery.

Discard bins with too few or too many scans (may be

associated with CTD stopping or moving too quickly).

Average by:

 pressure (with or without interpolation)

 depth (with or without interpolation)

 scan number

 time (seconds or hours)

If pressure (or depth) is not included in input

file, it will not appear on list of bin types.

Bin size is range of data for each bin (i.e.,

pressure range, scan number range, etc.).

If selected, data from

scans

marked with badflag

in Loop Edit will not be used in calculating

average. Note that values marked with badflag

by Wild Edit are never included in calculating

average.

Process downcast, upcast, or both.

If selected, a column containing number of

scans in each bin will be added to output data.

If selected, include surface bin (applicable only if

averaging by pressure or depth). Input:

 minimum and maximum values - minimum and

maximum (pressure or depth, as applicable) to

be used in calculating surface bin

 value - target value (pressure or depth) to be

associated with averages

Note that surface bin minimum, maximum, and

value do not affect minimum, maximum, and

center of first or subsequent bins.

Skip first n scans of data in file before processing;

useful for eliminating scans associated with getting

into water and surface soak.

Return to SBE Data Processing window.

 If Confirm Program Setup Change was selected in Options menu - If you made

changes and did not Save or Save As, program asks if you want to save changes.

 If Confirm Program Setup Change was not selected in Options menu - Button says

Save & Exit. If you do not want to save changes, use Cancel button to exit.

Begin processing data. Status field

on File Setup tab shows

Processing complete when done.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 6: Data Processing Modules SBE Data Processing

Bin Average: Formulas

The center value of the first (not surface) bin is set equal to the bin size. The

surface bin, if included, cannot overlap the first bin.

Example (pressure bin, surface bin not included):

Bin size is 10 db. The first bin is defined as follows:

Example (pressure bin, surface bin included):

Bin size is 10 db. Surface bin is included, and surface bin parameters are 0 db

minimum, 3 db maximum, and 0 db value. The bins are defined as follows:

Note that for this example, the surface bin could have a maximum of up to

5 db (the minimum value for the first bin).

The algorithms used for each type of averaging follow.

Pressure Bins (no interpolation)

For each bin:

BinMin = center value - (bin size / 2)

BinMax = center value + (bin size / 2)

1. Add together valid data for scans with BinMin < pressure < BinMax.

2. Divide sum by the number of valid data points to obtain average, and

write average to output file.

3. Repeat Steps 1 through 2 for each variable.

4. For next bin, compute center value and repeat Steps 1 through 3.

Note:

If Exclude scans marked bad is

selected in the dialog box, data from

scans marked with badflag in Loop

Edit are not used in calculating

average. Values marked with badflag

by Wild Edit are never included in

calculating the average. If the

number of points included in the

average is 0 (all data and/or scans in

the bin are marked with badflag), the

average value is set to badflag.

Center (target) first bin =

bin size=10 db

First bin

Bin size=10 db

surface = 0 db

Minimum first bin = BinMin =

bin size - (bin size/2) = 5 db

Maximum first bin = BinMax =

bin size + (bin size/2) = 15 db

Center (target) first bin =

bin size=10 db

First bin

Bin size=10 db

minimum surface bin = 0 db

target surface bin = 0 db

Minimum first bin = BinMin =

bin size - (bin size/2) = 5 db

Maximum first bin = BinMax =

bin size + (bin size/2) = 15 db

maximum surface bin = 3 db

Surface bin

Bin size=3 db

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 6: Data Processing Modules SBE Data Processing

Pressure Bins (with interpolation)

For each bin:

BinMin = center value - (bin size / 2)

BinMax = center value + (bin size / 2)

1. Add together valid data for scans with BinMin < pressure < BinMax.

2. Divide sum by number of valid data points to obtain average.

3. Interpolate as follows, and write interpolated value to output file:

Pp =average pressure of previous bin

Xp =average value of variable in previous bin

Pc =average pressure of current bin

Xc =average value of variable in current bin

Pi = center value for pressure in current bin

Xi =interpolated value of variable (value at center pressure Pi )

= ( (Xc - Xp) * (Pi - Pp) / (Pc - Pp) ) + Xp

4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 for each variable.

5. Compute center value and Repeat Steps 1 through 4 for next bin.

Values for first bin are interpolated after averages for second bin are calculated;

values from next (second) bin instead of previous bin are used in equations.

Depth Bins (with or without interpolation)

Depth bin processing is similar to processing pressure bins, but bin size and

center values are based on depth.

Scan Number Bins

Scan number bin processing is similar to processing pressure bins without

interpolation. If exclude scans marked bad is selected, Bin Average averages

bin size good scans (not marked with badflag in Loop Edit).

Example: Bin size is 100. First bin should include scans 50-149. However, scans 93, 94, and

126 are marked with badflag in Loop Edit, and user selected exclude scans marked bad. To

include 100 valid scans in average, Bin Average includes scans 50 - 152 in first bin.

Time Bins

Time bin processing is similar to processing pressure bins without

interpolation. Bin Average determines the number of scans to include based on

the input bin size and the data sampling interval:

Number of scans = bin size [seconds] / interval or

Number of scans = (bin size [hours] x 3600 seconds/hour) / interval

Bin Average has the following /x parameter when run from the Command Line

Options dialog box, from the command line, or with batch file processing:

/x Parameter Description

/xbinavg:cN N = center value for first bin.

See Appendix I: Command Line Options, Command Line Operation, and Batch File Processing

for details on using parameters.

Bin Average adds the following to the data file header:

Label Description

Binavg_date Date and time that module was run.

Binavg_in Input .cnv converted data file.

Binavg_bintype Bin type (pressure, depth, scan time in seconds or hours).

Binavg_binsize Bin size.

Binavg_excl_

bad_scans

If yes, values from scans marked with badflag in Loop

Edit are not included in average.

Binavg_skipover Number of scans skipped at beginning of file.

Binavg_omit Number of scans skipped at end of file.

Binavg_min_

scans_bin

Minimum number of scans/bin; bins with fewer scans are

discarded.

Binavg_max_

scans_bin_

Maximum number of scans/bin; bins with more scans are

discarded.

Binavg_surface_

bin

Surface bin included? Minimum and maximum values

for surface bin.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 6: Data Processing Modules SBE Data Processing

Buoyancy

Buoyancy calculates buoyancy (Brunt-Väisälä) frequency (N) and stability (E)

using the Fofonoff adiabatic leveling method (Bray N. A. and N. P. Fofonoff

(1981) Available potential energy for MODE eddies. Journal of Physical

Oceanography, 11, 30-46.).

The Data Setup tab in the dialog box looks like this:

Example: For an interval of 10 db between scans, buoyancy window sizes of

5, 10, or 20 db result in a window size of 3 scans. Window sizes of

30 or 40 db result in a window size of 5 scans.

Note:

The input .cnv file for Buoyancy must

have been processed with Bin

Average on pressure bins (with or

without interpolation) and must

contain pressure, temperature, and

either salinity or conductivity.

Select variable used in buoyancy computation:

 Latitude - Buoyancy uses algorithm in

UNESCO Technical Papers in Marine Science 44

to estimate local gravity from user-input latitude

 Gravity

Select buoyancy

variables to be

computed and added

to .cnv file - 1, 2, 3,

or 4 variables can be

computed.

Calculate buoyancy variables for pressure values

centered in window. Buoyancy converts window

size from decibars to scans based on pressure

interval between scans in input file. If window size

is less than 3 scans, Buoyancy sets it to 3 scans.

If window size is an even number of scans,

Buoyancy adds 1 scan to window size. (see

example below)

Note: As used here, a scan is one row of output

data from Bin Average, which is an average of

many scans of original data.

Return to SBE Data Processing window.

 If Confirm Program Setup Change was selected in Options menu - If you made

changes and did not Save or Save As, program asks if you want to save changes.

 If Confirm Program Setup Change was not selected in Options menu - Button says

Save & Exit. If you do not want to save changes, use Cancel button to exit.

Begin processing data. Status field

on File Setup tab shows

Processing complete when done.

Note:

The File Setup tab and

Header View tab are similar

for all modules; see Section 2:

Installation and Use.

40 db window = 5 scans (10, 20, 30, 40, 50 db)

30 db window = 4 scans (10, 20, 30, 40 db) + 1 scan to make odd number

20 db window = 3 scans (10, 20, 30 db)

10 db window = 3 scan minimum

5 db window = 3 scan minimum

10 db 20 db 30 db 40 db 50 db

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 6: Data Processing Modules SBE Data Processing

Buoyancy: Formulas

The relationship between frequency N and stability E is:

N 2 = gE [rad2/s2]

where g = gravity [m / s2]

The algorithm used to compute N2 for the pressure value centered in the

buoyancy window is:

1. Compute averages:

p_bar = average pressure in the buoyancy window [decibars]

t_bar = average temperature in the buoyancy window [deg C]

s_bar = average salinity in the buoyancy window [PSU]

rho_bar = density (s_bar, t_bar, p_bar) [Kg / m3]

2. Compute the vertical gradient:

theta = potential temperature (s, t, p, p_bar)

v = 1 / density(s, theta, p_bar)

where s, t, and p are the averaged values for salinity, temperature, and

pressure calculated in Bin Average

Use a least squares fit to compute the linear gradient dv/dp in the

buoyancy window.

3. Compute N2, N, E, and 10 -8E:

N 2 = -1.0e-4 rho_bar 2 g 2 [rad 2/s2]

N =  N 2 [cycles/hour]

E = [rad 2/m]

E = 10 8 [10 -8 rad 2/m]

Buoyancy adds the following to the data file header:

Label Description

Buoyancy_date Date and time that module was run.

Buoyancy_in Input .cnv converted data file.

Buoyancy_vars

Gravity value (input value or value based on input

latitude) and buoyancy window size (adjusted to provide

a minimum of three scans and an odd number of scans).

N 2

3600

2

N 2





Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 6: Data Processing Modules SBE Data Processing

Cell Thermal Mass

Cell Thermal Mass uses a recursive filter to remove conductivity cell thermal

mass effects from the measured conductivity. Typical values for alpha and

1/beta are:

Instrument alpha 1/beta

SBE 9plus with TC duct and 3000 rpm pump 0.03 7.0

SBE 19plus or 19plus V2

with TC duct and 2000 rpm pump 0.04 8.0

SBE 19 (not plus) with TC duct and 2000 rpm pump 0.04 8.0

SBE 19 (not plus) with no pump, moving at 1 m/sec 0.042 10.0

SBE 25 or 25plus with TC duct and 2000 rpm pump 0.04 8.0

SBE 49 with TC duct and 3000 rpm pump * 0.03 7.0

*The SBE 49 can be programmed to correct for conductivity cell thermal mass

effects in real-time, eliminating the need to run Cell Thermal Mass. See the

SBE 49 manual for details.

The Data Setup tab in the dialog box looks like this:

Filter primary and/or

secondary conductivity

values.

Use primary or secondary

temperature sensor data for

filtering the conductivity data.

Return to SBE Data Processing window.

 If Confirm Program Setup Change was selected in Options menu - If you made

changes and did not Save or Save As, program asks if you want to save changes.

 If Confirm Program Setup Change was not selected in Options menu - Button says

Save & Exit. If you do not want to save changes, use Cancel button to exit.

Begin processing data. Status field

on File Setup tab shows

Processing complete when done.

Note:

The File Setup tab and

Header View tab are similar

for all modules; see Section 2:

Installation and Use.

Note:

Cell thermal mass corrections should

not be applied to freshwater data.

It can give bad results, due to the

way the derivative dC/dT is

calculated in regions where

conductivity changes are very small.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 6: Data Processing Modules SBE Data Processing

Cell Thermal Mass: Formulas

The algorithm used is:

a = 2 * alpha / (sample interval * beta + 2)

b = 1 - (2 * a / alpha)

dc/dT = 0.1 * (1 + 0.006 * [temperature - 20])

dT = temperature - previous temperature

ctm [S/m] = -1.0 * b * previous ctm + a * (dc/dT) * dT

where

sample interval is measured in seconds and temperature in °C

ctm is calculated in S/m

If the input file contains conductivity in units other than S/m, Cell Thermal

Mass applies the following scale factors to the calculated ctm:

ctm [mS/cm] = ctm [S/m] * 10.0

ctm [µS/cm] = ctm [S/m] * 10000.0

corrected conductivity = c + ctm

To determine the values for alpha and beta, see:

Lueck, R.G., 1990: Thermal Inertia of Conductivity Cells: Theory., American

Meteorological Society Oct 1990, 741-755.

Cell Thermal Mass adds the following to the data file header:

Label Description

Celltm_date Date and time that module was run.

Celltm_in Input .cnv converted data file.

Celltm_alpha Value used for alpha.

Celltm_tau Value used for 1/beta.

Celltm_temp_sensor

_use_for_cond

Temperature sensor for primary conductivity filter,

temperature sensor for secondary conductivity filter.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 6: Data Processing Modules SBE Data Processing

Derive (EOS-80; Practical Salinity)

Derive uses pressure, temperature, and conductivity from the input .cnv file to

compute the following oceanographic parameters:

 density (density, sigma-theta, sigma-1, sigma-2, sigma-4, sigma-t)

 thermosteric anomaly

 specific volume

 specific volume anomaly

 geopotential anomaly

 dynamic meters

 depth (salt water, fresh water)

 salinity

 sound velocity (Chen-Millero, DelGrosso, Wilson)

 average sound velocity

 potential temperature (reference pressure = 0.0 decibars)

 potential temperature anomaly

 specific conductivity

 derivative variables (descent rate and acceleration) - if input file has not

been averaged into pressure or depth bins

 oxygen (if input file contains pressure, temperature, and either

conductivity or salinity, and has not been averaged into pressure or

depth bins) - also requires oxygen current and oxygen temperature

(SBE 13 or 23) or oxygen signal (SBE 43)

 corrected irradiance (CPAR)

See Appendix V: Derived Parameter Formulas for the formulas used to

calculate these parameters.

See Derive TEOS-10 after this module to calculate TEOS-10 (Absolute

Salinity) parameters.

The Data Setup tab in the dialog box looks like this:

Notes:

 Derive’s File Setup tab requires

selection of an input data file and

instrument configuration (.con or

.xmlcon) file. SBE 37 stores

calibration coefficients internally, and

does not have a .con or .xmlcon file

provided by Sea-Bird.

- If you used SeatermV2 version 1.1

or later to upload SBE 37 data, the

software created a .xmlcon file when

it created the .hex file.

- If you used an earlier version of

SeatermV2 or any version of Seaterm

to upload SBE 37 data, use a .con or

.xmlcon file from any other Sea-Bird

instrument; the contents will not affect

the results. If you do not have a .con

or .xmlcon file for another instrument,

create one in SBE Data Processing’s

Configure menu (select any

instrument in the Configure menu,

then click Save As in the

Configuration dialog box).

 Algorithms used for calculation of

derived parameters in Data

Conversion, Derive, Sea Plot,

SeaCalc III [EOS-80 (Practical

Salinity) tab], and Seasave are

identical, except as noted in Appendix

V: Derived Parameter Formulas

(EOS-80; Practical Salinity), and are

based on EOS-80 equations.

 Derive is not compatible with a .cnv

file from an SBE 39, 39-IM, 39plus,

39plus-IM, or 48.

 For an SBE 21 or 45 with a remote

temperature sensor, Seasave, Data

Conversion, Derive, and Derive

TEOS-10 all use the remote

temperature data when calculating

density and sound velocity.

Note:

The File Setup tab and Header View

tab are similar for all modules; see

Section 2: Installation and Use.

Select variables to

be calculated.

Return to SBE Data Processing window.

 If Confirm Program Setup Change was selected in Options menu - If you made

changes and did not Save or Save As, program asks if you want to save changes.

 If Confirm Program Setup Change was not selected in Options menu - Button says

Save & Exit. If you do not want to save changes, use Cancel button to exit.

Begin processing data. Status field

on File Setup tab shows

Processing complete when done.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 6: Data Processing Modules SBE Data Processing

The Select Derived Variables dialog box looks like this:

The Miscellaneous tab in the Derive dialog box looks like this:

The Miscellaneous tab defines parameters required for output of specific

variables (depth, average sound velocity, potential temperature anomaly,

oxygen, descent rate, and acceleration). Entries on this tab are used only if you

are calculating and outputting the associated variable to the .cnv file. For

example, if you do not select Oxygen in the Select Derived Variables dialog

box, Derive ignores the value entered for Oxygen window size and the

enabling of the Tau correction on the Miscellaneous tab.

Note:

Values for these parameters can be

changed on the Miscellaneous tab

or by double clicking on the output

variable in the Select Derived

Variables dialog box (above);

changes made in one location are

automatically made in the other

location.

Oxygen selections apply to

SBE 43 and Beckman/YSI

sensors. They do not apply

to SBE 63 or Aanderaa

Oxygen Optode.

Click

Data

to view/modify user-input parameters for selected variable (if applicable). Some variables share a user-input parameter,

so changing a parameter for one variable automatically changes it for the other:

 Depth and average sound velocity use same latitude (if NMEA data not available).

 Descent rate and acceleration use same time window size.

 All SBE 13, 23, and 43 oxygen sensors use same time window size, Tau correction, and (SBE 43 only) hysteresis correction.

Note: An alternate method of entering these parameters is on Miscellaneous tab in Derive dialog box.



Add variable: click blank field in Variable Name column,

click desired sensor in sensor list, click Add.

 Change variable: click existing sensor in Variable Name

column, click desired sensor in sensor list, click Change.

 Insert variable: click existing sensor below desired

sequence # in Variable Name column, click desired

sensor in sensor list, click Insert.

If Derive requires additional information to compute a

variable, a dialog box appears after variable is selected,

with fields for required user-input parameters.

List includes all variables

that can be derived from

variables in input data file.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 6: Data Processing Modules SBE Data Processing

In Derive, derivative variables (oxygen, descent rate, and acceleration) are

computed by looking at data centered around the current data point with a time

span equal to the user-input time window size and using a linear regression to

determine the slope. This differs from how the calculation is done in Seasave

and Data Conversion, which compute the derivative looking backward in time,

since they share common code and Seasave cannot use future values while

acquiring data in real-time.

Derive has the following /x parameter when run from the Command Line

Options dialog box, from the command line, or with batch file processing:

/x Parameter Description

/xderive:pump For SBE 911plus, do not output scans if

pump status = off.

See Appendix I: Command Line Options, Command Line Operation, and Batch File Processing

for details on using parameters.

Derive adds the following to the data file header:

Label Description

Derive_date

Date and time that module was run. Also

shows how many columns of data (how

many variables) were derived.

Derive_in Input .cnv converted data file and .con or

.xmlcon configuration file.

Derive_time_window_docdt Window size for oxygen derivative

calculation (seconds).

Derive_time_window_dzdt Window size for descent rate and

acceleration calculation (seconds).

Derive_ox_tau_

correction

Whether tau correction was performed on

oxygen data.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 6: Data Processing Modules SBE Data Processing

Derive TEOS-10

Derive TEOS-10 uses temperature, conductivity or salinity (Practical,

EOS-80), pressure, latitude, and longitude to compute the following

thermodynamic parameters using TEOS-10 equations:

 Absolute Salinity

 Absolute Salinity Anomaly

 adiabatic lapse rate

 Conservative Temperature

 Conservative Temperature freezing

 density

 dynamic enthalpy

 enthalpy

 entropy

 gravity

 internal energy

 isentropic compressibility

 latent head of evaporation

 latent heat of melting

 potential temperature

 Preformed Salinity

 Reference Salinity

 saline contraction coefficient

 sound speed

 specific volume

 specific volume anomaly

 temperature freezing

 thermal expansion coefficient

The Data Setup tab in the dialog box looks like this:

Notes:

 Algorithms used in Derive TEOS-10

are based on the TEOS-10 website:

www.TEOS-10.org.

 Derive TEOS-10 is not compatible

with a .cnv file from an SBE 39,

39-IM, 39plus, 39plus-IM, or 48.

 For an SBE 21 or 45 with a remote

temperature sensor, Seasave,

Data Conversion, Derive, and

Derive TEOS-10 all use the remote

temperature data when calculating

density and sound velocity.

Notes:

 The File Setup tab and Header View

tab are similar for all modules; see

Section 2: Installation and Use.

 (if used) Values for longitude,

latitude, and pressure in .txt files are

not limited to the number of digits

shown in the examples.

Select variables to be

calculated (see below).

Begin processing data. Status field

on File Setup tab shows

Processing complete when done.

Select instrument: SBE 21 or

SBE 45 Thermosalinograph,

or Other (anything else).

.txt file format is:

//comment line starts with two //

Longitude: xxx.xx

Latitude: xxx.xx

.txt file format is:

//comment line starts with two //

Pressure: xxxxx.xx

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 6: Data Processing Modules SBE Data Processing

The Select TEOS-10 Variables dialog box looks like this:

Derive TEOS-10 adds the following to the data file header:

Label Description

DeriveTEOS_10_date

Date and time that module was run. Also

shows how many columns of data (how

many variables) were derived.

DeriveTEOS_10_in Input .cnv converted data file

DeriveTEOS_10_

latitude_source

Source of latitude data.

DeriveTEOS_10_

longitude_source

Source of longitude data.

Using the GSW Toolkit

version xx.xx

Source and version of equations used in

TEOS-10 calculations.



Add variable: click blank field in Variable Name column,

click desired sensor in sensor list, click Add.

 Change variable: click existing sensor in Variable Name

column, click desired sensor in sensor list, click Change.

 Insert variable: click existing sensor below desired

sequence # in Variable Name column, click desired

sensor in sensor list, click Insert.

List of available

TEOS-10 variables.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 6: Data Processing Modules SBE Data Processing

TEOS-10 Formulas

The following table references the C functions from www.TEOS-10.org that

are implemented in Derive TEOS-10:

SBE Data Processing

variable name

(in Select TEOS-10 Variables

dialog and in output .cnv file)

C function from

www.TEOS-10.org code

Absolute Salinity gsw_sa_from_sp

Absolute Salinity Anomaly gsw_deltasa_from_sp

adiabatic lapse rate gsw_adiabatic_lapse_rate_from_ct

Conservative Temperature gsw_ct_from_t

Conservative Temperature freezing gsw_ct_freezing

density, TEOS-10 gsw_rho

(use gsw_rho with reference

pressure for the sigmas)

dynamic enthalpy gsw_dynamic_enthalpy

enthalpy gsw_enthalpy

entropy gsw_entropy_from_t

gravity gsw_grav

internal energy gsw_internal_energy

isentropic compressibility gsw_kappa

latent heat of evaporation gsw_latentheat_evap_ct

latent heat of melting gsw_latentheat_melting

potential temperature gsw_pt0_from_t

Preformed Salinity gsw_sstar_from_sa

Reference Salinity gsw_sr_from_sp

saline contraction coefficient gsw_beta

sound speed gsw_sound_speed

specific volume gsw_specvol

specific volume anomaly gsw_specvol_anom

temperature freezing gsw_t_freezing

thermal expansion coefficient gsw_alpha

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 6: Data Processing Modules SBE Data Processing

100

Filter

Filter runs a low-pass filter on one or more columns of data. A low-pass filter

smoothes high frequency (rapidly changing) data. To produce zero phase

(no time shift), the filter is first run forward through the data and then run

backward through the forward-filtered data. This removes any delays caused

by the filter.

Pressure data is typically filtered with a time constant equal to four times the

CTD scan rate. Conductivity and temperature are typically filtered for some

CTDs. Two time constants can be specified, so different parameters can be

filtered with different time constants in one run of Filter. Typical time

constants are:

Instrument Temperature

(seconds)

Conductivity

(seconds)

Pressure

(seconds)

SBE 9plus - - 0.15

SBE 19plus or 19plus V2 0.5 0.5 1.0

SBE 19 (not plus) with or

without TC duct and pump 0.5 0.5 2.0

SBE 25 or 25plus 0.1 0.1 0.5

SBE 49 with TC duct and

3000 rpm pump * 0.085 0.085 0.25

*The SBE 49 can be programmed to filter the data in real-time with a cosine

window filter (see WFilter), eliminating the need to run Filter on temperature

and conductivity data. See the SBE 49 manual for details.

The Data Setup tab in the dialog box looks like this:

Select which variables to apply

filter to, and which time constant

to use for each variable.

Desired filter time constants

Return to SBE Data Processing window.

 If Confirm Program Setup Change was selected in Options menu - If you made

changes and did not Save or Save As, program asks if you want to save changes.

 If Confirm Program Setup Change was not selected in Options menu - Button says

Save & Exit. If you do not want to save changes, use Cancel button to exit.

Begin processing data. Status field

on File Setup tab shows

Processing complete when done.

Note:

The File Setup tab and

Header View tab are similar

for all modules; see Section 2:

Installation and Use.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 6: Data Processing Modules SBE Data Processing

101

The Specify Filters dialog box looks like this:

Filter: Formulas

For a low-pass filter with time constant Γ:

Γ= 1/ω ω = 2πf

T = sample interval (seconds)

S0 = 1/ Γ

Laplace transform of the transfer function of a low-pass filter (single pole)

with a time constant of Γ seconds is:

H(s) =

Using the bilinear transform:

S - f(z) = =

H(z) = =

If: A = B =

Then: H(z) = =

Where z -1 is the unit delay (one scan behind).

y[N] = current output

y[N-1] = previous output

x[N] = input data (current scan)

x[N-1] = previous input data (from previous scan)

Y(z) (1 + Bz -1) = X(z) A (z -1 + 1)

y[N] + By[N-1] = Ax[N-1] + Ax[N]

y[N] = A(x[N] + x[N-1]) - By[N-1]

1 + (S/S0)

2 (1-z

-1

)

T (1 + z -1)

2 (z - 1)

T (z +1)

2 (z - 1)

T (z + 1) S0

1 +

-1

+ 1

TS0

1 + {1 + ( ) z -1

}

1 - 2/TS0

1 + 2/TS0

TS0

1 + 2

TS0

1 +

TS0

1 -

A (z

-1

+1)

(1 + Bz -1)

Y(z )

X(z)

Select None, Filter A, or

Filter B for each

variable.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 6: Data Processing Modules SBE Data Processing

102

Example: Time constant = 0.5 second, sample interval = 1/24 second

A = = = 0.04

B = (1 - 2 * 0.5 * 24) A = = -0.92

Filter adds the following to the data file header:

Label Description

Filter_date Date and time that module was run.

Filter_in Input .cnv converted data file.

Filter_low_pass_tc_A Time constant for filter A.

Filter_low-Pass_tc_B Time constant for filter B.

Filter_low_pass_A_vars List of variables filtered with time constant A.

Filter_low_pass_B_vars List of variables filtered with time constant B.

(1 + 2 * 0.5 * 24)

(1 + 24)

1 - 24

1 + 24

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 6: Data Processing Modules SBE Data Processing

103

Loop Edit

Loop Edit marks scans bad by setting the flag value associated with the scan to

badflag in input .cnv files that have pressure slowdowns or reversals (typically

caused by ship heave). Optionally, Loop Edit can also mark scans associated

with an initial surface soak with badflag. The badflag value is documented in

the input .cnv header.

Loop Edit operates on three successive scans to determine velocity. This is

such a fine scale that noise in the pressure channel from counting jitter or other

unknown sources can cause Loop Edit to mark scans with badflag in error.

Therefore, you must run Filter on the pressure data to reduce noise

before you run Loop Edit. See Filter for pressure filter recommendations for

each instrument.

The Data Setup tab in the dialog box looks like this:

Note:

Data Conversion calculates

velocity with a 2-second

window (e.g., 48 scans for an

SBE 9plus), giving a much

smoother measure of velocity.

Note:

The File Setup tab and

Header View tab are similar

for all modules; see Section 2:

Installation and Use.



If selected, scans previously

marked with badflag (for example,

in a previous run of Loop Edit) will

not be evaluated.

 If not selected, scans previously

marked with badflag will be

reevaluated, and scan’s flag will

be reset accordingly.

Minimum velocity type:

 Fixed minimum velocity - If CTD velocity <

specified Minimum CTD Velocity, or

pressure < previous maximum pressure,

scan is marked with badflag.

 Percent of mean speed - For each scan,

mean speed over last Window Size seconds

is computed. If CTD velocity < specified

Percent of Mean Speed, or pressure <

previous maximum pressure, scan is marked

with badflag. Minimum CTD Velocity is used

to evaluate data points in first time window.

Return to SBE Data Processing window.

 If Confirm Program Setup Change was selected in Options menu - If you made changes

and did not Save or Save As, program asks if you want to save changes.

 If Confirm Program Setup Change was not selected in Options menu - Button says Save

& Exit. If you do not want to save changes, use Cancel button to exit.

Begin processing data. Status field

on File Setup tab shows Processing

complete when done.

If selected, scans related to surface

soak are marked with badflag,

based on Minimum soak depth and

Maximum soak depth (note that

Surface soak depth is not actually

used in calculation of surface

soak scans). See drawing below

for details.

If selected, pressure from first scan in file is used

as a pressure offset in determining scans related

to surface soak. See drawing below for details.

Note: This affects only marking of surface soak

scans, and has no effect on pressure data in file.

Algorithm

for removal

of surface

soak data

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 6: Data Processing Modules SBE Data Processing

104

Loop Edit adds the following to the data file header:

Label Description

Loopedit_date Date and time that module was run.

Loopedit_in Input .cnv converted data file.

Loopedit_minVelocity

If Fixed Minimum Velocity was selected -

minimum CTD velocity for good scans;

scans with velocity less than this are marked

with badflag.

Loopedit_percentMeanSpeed

If Percent of Mean Speed was selected -

minimum CTD velocity for first time

window, window size, and percent of mean

speed for good scans; scans that do not meet

this criteria are marked with badflag.

Loopedit_surfaceSoak

If Remove surface soak was selected –

minimum soak depth, maximum soak depth,

and whether to use deck pressure as a

pressure offset (1 = yes, 0 = no).

Loopedit_excl_bad_scans If yes, do not evaluate scans marked with

badflag in a previous run of Loop Edit.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 6: Data Processing Modules SBE Data Processing

105

Wild Edit

Wild Edit marks wild points in the data by replacing the data value with

badflag. The badflag value is documented in the input .cnv header.

Wild Edit’s algorithm requires two passes through the data: the first pass

obtains an accurate estimate of the data’s true standard deviation, while the

second pass replaces the appropriate data with badflag.

The Data Setup tab in the dialog box looks like this:

Note:

Wild Edit marks individual data (for

example, a conductivity value) with

badflag, but does not mark the entire

scan (which may include other data

that is valid, such as temperature,

pressure, etc.).

If selected, data from

scans marked with

badflag in Loop Edit

will not be used in

calculating mean and

standard deviation.

Select which variables

to run Wild Edit on.

Wild Edit operates

as follows:

1. Compute mean and

standard deviation of

data in block

(specified by Scans

per Block) for each

selected variable.

Temporarily flag

values that differ from

mean by more than

standard deviations

specified for pass 1.

2. Recompute mean and

standard deviation,

excluding temporarily

flagged values. Mark

values that differ from

mean by more than

standard deviations

specified for pass 2 by

replacing data value

with badflag.

3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2

for next block of

scans.

 If last block of data

in input file has less

than specified

number of scans,

use data from

previous block to fill

in block.

Do not flag data within this distance of mean,

even if it falls outside specified standard

deviation. Set to a value where difference

between data and mean would indicate a wild

point. May need to use if data is very quiet (for

example, a single bit change in voltage may

cause data to fall outside specified standard

deviation and be marked bad). A typical

sequence for using parameter follows:

1. Run Wild Edit for all desired variables, with

parameter set to 0.

2. Compare output to input data. If a variable’s

data points that are very close to mean were

set to badflag:

A. Rerun Wild Edit for all other variables,

leaving parameter at 0 and overwriting

output file from Step 1.

B. Rerun Wild Edit for quiet variable only,

setting parameter to desired value to

prevent flagging of data close to mean.

Return to SBE Data Processing window.

 If Confirm Program Setup Change was selected in Options menu - If you made

changes and did not Save or Save As, program asks if you want to save changes.

 If Confirm Program Setup Change was not selected in Options menu - Button says

Save & Exit. If you do not want to save changes, use Cancel button to exit.

Begin processing

data. Status field on

File Setup tab shows

Processing complete

when done.

Note:

The File Setup tab and Header View

tab are similar for all modules; see

Section 2: Installation and Use.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 6: Data Processing Modules SBE Data Processing

106

If the data file is particularly corrupted, you may need to run Wild Edit more

than once, with different block sizes and number of standard deviations.

If the input file has some variables with large values and some with relatively

smaller values, it may be necessary to run Wild Edit more than once, varying

the value for Keep data within this distance of mean so that it is meaningful

for each variable. Better results may also be obtained by increasing Scans per

block from 100 to around 500.

Wild Edit adds the following to the data file header:

Label Description

Wildedit_date Date and time that module was run.

Wildedit_in Input .cnv converted data file.

Wildedit_pass1_nstd Number of standard deviations for pass 1 test.

Wildedit_pass2_nstd Number of standard deviations for pass 2 test.

Wildedit_pass2_mindelta Keep data within this distance of mean.

Wildedit_npoint Number of points to include in each test.

Wildedit_vars List of the variables tested for wild points.

Wildedit_excl_bad_scans

If yes, values in scans marked with badflag

(in Loop Edit) will not be used to determine

standard deviation.

Example

Sensor A’s range is approximately 1000 and Sensor B’s range is

approximately 10. Run Wild Edit on Sensor A, using Keep data

within this distance of mean = 10. Then run Wild Edit on

Sensor B, using Keep data within this distance of mean = 0.1

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 6: Data Processing Modules SBE Data Processing

107

Window Filter

Window Filter provides four types of window filters and a median filter for

data smoothing of .cnv files:

 Window filters calculate a weighted average of data values about a center

point and replace the data value at the center point with this average.

 The median filter calculates a median for data values about a center point

and replaces the data value at the center point with the median.

The Data Setup tab in the dialog box looks like this:

The Specify Window Filters dialog box looks like this:

Select none, boxcar, cosine,

Gaussian, median, or triangle filter.

A dialog box appears to enter

applicable filter parameters, which

then display in Parameters column.

If selected, data

from scans marked

with badflag in Loop

Edit will not be used.

Select which variables to run

Window Filter on, and specify the

filters.

Return to SBE Data Processing window.

 If Confirm Program Setup Change was selected in Options menu - If you made

changes and did not Save or Save As, program asks if you want to save changes.

 If Confirm Program Setup Change was not selected in Options menu - Button says

Save & Exit. If you do not want to save changes, use Cancel button to exit.

Note:

The File Setup tab and

Header View tab are similar

for all modules; see Section 2:

Installation and Use.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 6: Data Processing Modules SBE Data Processing

108

Window Filters: Descriptions and Formulas

Shape and length define filter windows:

 Window Filter provides four window shapes: boxcar, cosine, triangle,

and Gaussian.

 The minimum window length is 1 scan, and the maximum is 511 scans.

Window length must be an odd number, so that the window has a center

point. If a window length is specified as an even number, Window Filter

automatically adds 1 to make the length odd.

The window filter calculates a weighted average of data values about a center

point, using the following transfer function:

L/2

y(n) =  w(k) x(n-k)

k=-L/2

The figure below shows the impulse response of each of the four filter types

for a filter of length 17 scans. The impulse response of a filter is obtained by

filtering a data set that has zeros everywhere except one data value that is set

to 1.

Begin processing data. Status field

on File Setup tab shows

Processing complete when done.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 6: Data Processing Modules SBE Data Processing

109

The window filtering process is similar for all filter types:

1. Filter weights are calculated (see the equations below).

2. Filter weights are normalized to sum to 1.

 When a bad data point is encountered (scan marked with badflag if

exclude scans marked bad was selected or data value marked with

badflag), the weights are renormalized, excluding the filter element

that would operate on the bad data point.

Boxcar Filter

w(n) = for n = - . .

Cosine Filter

w(n) = 1 for n = 0

w(n) = cos for n = - . .-1, 1 . .

Triangle Filter

w(n) = 1 for n = 0

w(n) = for n = - . .-1, 1 . .

where K = + 1

Gaussian Filter

phase =

scale = log(2) x 2 x

w(n) = e -phase x phase x scale for n = 0

w(n) = e -(n - phase)2 x scale for n = - . .-1, 1 . .

The Gaussian window has parameters of halfwidth (in scans) and offset (in

time), in addition to window length (in scans). These extra parameters allow

data to be filtered and shifted in time in one operation. Halfwidth determines

the width of the Gaussian curve. A window length of 9 and halfwidth of 4

produces a set of filter weights that fills the window. A window length of 17

and halfwidth of 4 produces a set of filter weights that fills only half the

window. If the filter weights do not fill the window, the offset parameter may

be used to shift the weights within the window without clipping the edge of the

Gaussian curve.

Note:

In the window filter equations:

 L = window length in scans,

(always an odd number)

 n = window index, -L/2 to +L/2,

with 0 the center point of

the window

 w(n) = set of window weights

L - 1

n x 

L + 1

L - 1

n

L - 1

offset (sec)

sample interval (sec)

sample rate

half width (scans)

(

)

L - 1

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 6: Data Processing Modules SBE Data Processing

110

Example: Window length is 33 scans and halfwidth is 4 scans. Offset is

-3 seconds in left curve, 0 in middle curve, and +3 seconds in right curve.

Note that the window length in the example is larger than the halfwidth. This

allows the complete Gaussian curve to be expressed in the window when the

offset parameter shifts the curve forward or backward in time. If the halfwidth

was larger, the trailing edge of the -3 second offset curve would be truncated

and the leading edge of the +3 second curve would be truncated. The offset

parameter moves the Gaussian shape of the window weights forward or

backward in time. Since the weighted average is calculated for a data value in

the center of the window, this has the effect of shifting the data that the filter is

operating on forward or backward in time relative to the other data in the file.

This capability allows filtering and time shifting to be done in one step.

Median Filter: Description

The median filter is not a smoothing filter in the same sense as the window

filters described above. Median filtering is most useful in spike removal.

A median value is determined for a specified window, and the data value at the

window’s center point is replaced by the median value.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 6: Data Processing Modules SBE Data Processing

111

Window Filter has the following /x parameter when run from the Command

Line Options dialog box, from the command line, or with batch file processing:

/x Parameter Description

/xwfilter:diff Output difference between original and filtered value

instead of outputting filtered value.

See Appendix I: Command Line Options, Command Line Operation, and Batch File Processing

for details on using parameters.

Window Filter adds the following to the data file header:

Label Description

Wfilter_date Date and time that module was run.

Wfilter_in Input .cnv converted data file.

Wfilter_excl_

bad_scans

If yes, values in scans marked with badflag in

Loop Edit will not be used.

Wfilter_action Data channel identifier, filter type, filter parameters.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 7: File Manipulation Modules SBE Data Processing

112

Section 7: File Manipulation Modules

Module Name Module Description

ASCII In Add header information to a .asc file containing rows

and columns of ASCII data.

ASCII Out

Output data portion and/or header portion from .cnv

converted data file to an ASCII file (.asc for data, .hdr

for header). Useful for exporting converted data for

processing by other (non-Sea-Bird) software.

Section Extract rows of data from .cnv converted data file.

Split Split data in .cnv converted data file into upcast and

downcast files.

Strip Extract columns of data from .cnv converted data file.

Translate Convert data format in .cnv converted data file from

ASCII to binary, or vice versa.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 7: File Manipulation Modules SBE Data Processing

113

ASCII In

ASCII In adds a header to a .asc file that contains rows of ASCII data. The

data can be separated by spaces, commas, or tabs (or any combination of

spaces, commas, and tabs). The output file, which contains both the header and

the data, is a .cnv file. ASCII In can be used to add a header to data that was

generated by a non-Seasoft program.

The Data Setup tab in the dialog box looks like this:

ASCII In creates a data file header containing the following information:

Label Description

Nquan

Number of columns (fields) of data.

NOTE: ASCII In automatically adds 1 field to number of fields

in input .asc file (i.e., if the .asc file contains 3 columns of data,

then nquan=4). This field, initially set to 0, is used by Loop Edit

to mark bad scans.

Nvalues Number of scans converted.

Units Specified (indicates units are specified separately for each

variable).

Name n Sensor (and units) associated with data in column n.

Span n Span (highest - lowest value) of data in column n.

Interval Scan rate (seconds).

Start_time Start time for when ASCII In was run.

Bad_flag

Provided for information only; value that Loop Edit will

use to mark bad scans and Wild Edit will use to mark

bad data values.

Asciiin_in Input .asc data file.

File type Selected output file type - ASCII data.

Select variable name associated

with each column of data, to be

put in header. Selection list

includes all variables that can be

output by Data Conversion and

Derive, as well as user-defined

variable names.

Select whether interval between

scans is based on time,

pressure, or depth, and indicate

the interval value (time, pressure,

or depth between scans). This

information is put in header.

Return to SBE Data Processing window.

 If Confirm Program Setup Change was selected in Options menu - If you made

changes and did not Save or Save As, program asks if you want to save changes.

 If Confirm Program Setup Change was not selected in Options menu - Button says

Save & Exit. If you do not want to save changes, use Cancel button to exit.

Begin processing data. Status field

on File Setup tab shows

Processing complete when done.

Note:

The File Setup tab is similar

for all modules; see Section 2:

Installation and Use.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 7: File Manipulation Modules SBE Data Processing

114

ASCII Out

ASCII Out outputs the header portion and/or the data portion of a converted

data file (.cnv).

 The data portion is written in ASCII engineering units to a .asc file, and

may be useful if you are planning to export converted data for processing

by other (non-Sea-Bird) software.

 The header portion is written to a .hdr file.

The Data Setup tab in the dialog box looks like this:

ASCII Out has the following /x parameter when run from the Command Line

Options dialog box, from the command line, or with batch file processing:

/x Parameter Description

/xascii_out:first_

column_value=string

string = value (maximum of 11 characters) placed in

each row of column inserted before first column

of data.

/xascii_out:label_

format=mon/day/yr_

hh:mm

mon/day/yr is heading for date column;

hh:mm is heading for time column.

See Appendix I: Command Line Options, Command Line Operation, and Batch File Processing

for details on using parameters.

ASCII Out does not add anything to the data file header. The output header

(.hdr) file contains the header from the input (.cnv) file.

Note:

The File Setup tab and

Header View tab are similar

for all modules; see Section 2:

Installation and Use.

If selected, scans marked

with badflag in Loop Edit will

not be output in data file.

Column label for output data file: Top of file,

Top of each page, or No column labels.

If columns are labeled at top of each

page, form feed character is inserted

after selected number of lines/page.

If selected, all occurrences of badflag in input file

(occurrences in flag column as well as in data columns)

are replaced with specified value in output file. This

may be useful for plotting purposes, as SBE Data

Processing uses a very small number (-9.990e-29) for

badflag, which looks like 0 in a plot.

Column separator for output data file:

space, tab, semi-colon, colon, or comma.

If selected, 1 column is

inserted before first column of

data, with specified column

name and data value.

Return to SBE Data Processing window.

 If Confirm Program Setup Change was selected in Options menu - If you made

changes and did not Save or Save As, program asks if you want to save changes.

 If Confirm Program Setup Change was not selected in Options menu - Button says

Save & Exit. If you do not want to save changes, use Cancel button to exit.

Date and time formats for output

data file (applicable if date

selected as output variable).

Begin processing data. Status field

on File Setup tab shows

Processing complete when done.

Select which variables to

include in output data file.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 7: File Manipulation Modules SBE Data Processing

115

Section

Section extracts rows of data from the input .cnv file, based on a pressure

range or scan number range, and writes the rows to an output .cnv file.

The Data Setup tab in the dialog box looks like this:

Section adds the following to the data file header:

Label Description

Section_date Date and time that module was run.

Section_in Input .cnv converted data file.

Section_type Evaluate data based on pressure or scan range.

Section_range Range of (pressure or scan count) data to keep.

Select Upcast or Downcast if

section is based on pressure.

Section based on a pressure range or

a scan range.

Section writes to output file all rows

of data that fall within this range of

pressure or scan number.

Return to SBE Data Processing window.

 If Confirm Program Setup Change was selected in Options menu - If you made

changes and did not Save or Save As, program asks if you want to save changes.

 If Confirm Program Setup Change was not selected in Options menu - Button says

Save & Exit. If you do not want to save changes, use Cancel button to exit.

Begin processing data. Status field

on File Setup tab shows

Processing complete when done.

Note:

The File Setup tab and

Header View tab are similar

for all modules; see Section 2:

Installation and Use.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 7: File Manipulation Modules SBE Data Processing

116

Split

Split separates the data from an input .cnv file into upcast (pressure

decreasing) and downcast (pressure increasing) files. Split writes the data to an

output .cnv file(s). The upcast output file name is the input file name prefixed

by u. The downcast output file name is the input file name prefixed by d.

The Data Setup tab in the dialog box looks like this:

Split adds the following to the data file header:

Label Description

Split_date Date and time that module was run.

Split_in Input .cnv converted data file.

Split_excl_bad_scans

If Yes, pressure from scans marked with badflag

(in Loop Edit) were not used to determine

maximum pressure (for determining when

downcast ends and upcast begins).

Note:

Bin Average provides the option of

processing upcast, downcast, or

both, possibly removing the need to

run Split.

Output an upcast file (prefix u) and

downcast (prefix d) file, or just a

downcast (prefix d) file.

If selected, scans marked with badflag (in

Loop Edit) will not be used to identify

maximum pressure. Maximum pressure

defines when downcast ends and upcast

begins.

Note: Pressure values marked with

badflag in Wild Edit are never used to

determine maximum pressure.

Return to SBE Data Processing window.

 If Confirm Program Setup Change was selected in Options menu - If you made

changes and did not Save or Save As, program asks if you want to save changes.

 If Confirm Program Setup Change was not selected in Options menu - Button says

Save & Exit. If you do not want to save changes, use Cancel button to exit.

Begin processing data. Status field

on File Setup tab shows

Processing complete when done.

Note:

The File Setup tab and Header View

tab are similar for all modules; see

Section 2: Installation and Use.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 7: File Manipulation Modules SBE Data Processing

117

Strip

Strip outputs selected columns of data from the input .cnv file. Strip writes the

data to an output .cnv file.

The Data Setup tab in the dialog box looks like this:

Strip adds the following to the data file header:

Label Description

Strip_date Date and time that module was run.

Strip_in Input .cnv converted data file.

Select which variables (columns

of data) to output.

Return to SBE Data Processing window.

 If Confirm Program Setup Change was selected in Options menu - If you made

changes and did not Save or Save As, program asks if you want to save changes.

 If Confirm Program Setup Change was not selected in Options menu - Button says

Save & Exit. If you do not want to save changes, use Cancel button to exit.

Begin processing data. Status field

on File Setup tab shows

Processing complete when done.

Note:

The File Setup tab and Header View

tab are similar for all modules; see

Section 2: Installation and Use.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 7: File Manipulation Modules SBE Data Processing

118

Translate

Translate changes the converted data file format from binary to ASCII or vice

versa, and writes the data to an output .cnv file.

The Data Setup tab in the dialog box looks like this:

Translate changes the following in the data file header:

Label Description

File_type File type - changes to ASCII or binary, as applicable.

Switch from:

 Binary to ASCII,

 ASCII to binary, or

 Binary to ASCII or ASCII to binary,

as applicable

Return to SBE Data Processing window.

 If Confirm Program Setup Change was selected in Options menu - If you made

changes and did not Save or Save As, program asks if you want to save changes.

 If Confirm Program Setup Change was not selected in Options menu - Button says

Save & Exit. If you do not want to save changes, use Cancel button to exit.

Begin processing data. Status field

on File Setup tab shows

Processing complete when done.

Note:

The File Setup tab and Header View

tab are similar for all modules; see

Section 2: Installation and Use.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 8: Data Plotting Module – Sea Plot SBE Data Processing

119

Section 8: Data Plotting Module – Sea Plot

Sea Plot can be used to plot C, T, and P, as well as derived variables and data

from auxiliary sensors, from any converted .cnv data file. Sea Plot can:

 Plot up to 5 variables on one plot, with a single X axis and up to four

Y axes or a single Y axis and up to four X axes.

 Plot any variable on a linear or logarithmic scale (logarithmic scale not

applicable to TS plots).

 Derive and plot derived salinity and/or derived density, if conductivity,

temperature, and pressure data are in the input file. This allows you to

skip running Derive if salinity and density are the only derived parameters

you are interested in. Alternatively, you can calculate and plot derived

salinity and/or derived density even if salinity and density are already in

the input file; the values may differ because of processing steps performed

on C, T, or P after Derive was run. Note that the calculations for derived

salinity and derived density are based on EOS-80 equations (Practical

Salinity). For TEOS-10 (Absolute Salinity), you must calculate the

parameters in Derive TEOS-10 before plotting with Sea Plot.

 Plot time series data; the time scale selections include Julian Days,

elapsed time in hours, minutes, or seconds, or date and time.

 Create contour plots, generating density (sigma-t or sigma-theta) or

thermosteric anomaly contours on temperature-salinity (TS) plots.

 Process and plot multiple input files that contain the same variables and

with the same setup parameters, each on their own plot, allowing the user

to quickly switch the view from one file to the next.

 Process and plot multiple input files that contain the same variables on an

overlay plot, allowing the user to view multiple sets of data at the

same time. If desired, the user can offset each file on the plot to create a

waterfall plot.

 Zoom in on plot features.

 Send plots to a printer, save plots to the clipboard for insertion in another

program (such as Microsoft Word), or save plots as graphic files in

bitmap, metafile, or JPEG format.

 Run in batch processing mode. See Appendix I: Command Line Options,

Command Line Operation, and Batch File Processing.

The Sea Plot dialog box differs somewhat from the other SBE Data Processing

modules. Each tab of the Sea Plot dialog box is described below, as well as

options for viewing, printing, and saving a plot.

Notes:

 Converted data (.cnv) files are

typically created in Data Conversion

and manipulated in other SBE Data

Processing modules. Sea Plot can

plot data at any point after Data

Conversion has been run.

- For SBE 37 (firmware < 3.0), 39,

39-IM, and 48, a converted (.cnv)

data file is created from an uploaded

.asc file using the Convert button in

Seaterm’s Toolbar.

- For SBE 39plus and 39plus-IM, a

converted (.cnv) data file is created

from an uploaded .xml file using

Convert .XML data file in

SeatermV2’s Tools menu or Convert

XML Data button in SeatermUSB.

 Algorithms for calculation of derived

parameters in Data Conversion,

Derive, Sea Plot, SeaCalc III [EOS-

80 (Practical Salinity) tab], and

Seasave are identical, except as

noted in Appendix V: Derived

Parameter Formulas (EOS-80;

Practical Salinity), and are based on

EOS-80 equations.

 Calculation of Absolute Salinity and

associated parameters

(TEOS-10) is available in

Derive TEOS-10 and SeaCalc III

[TEOS-10 (Absolute Salinity) tab].

Once they are calculated in Derive

TEOS-10, they can be plotted in

Sea Plot. See Section 6: Data

Processing Modules and

Section 9: Miscellaneous Module –

SeaCalc III.

Note:

When plotting date and time, the

following restrictions apply:

 On the Plot Setup tab, select Single

X – Multiple Y or

Single X – Multiple Y, Overlay

for plot type

 On the X Axis tab, select Julian days

or Elapsed time for the variable, and

select Show as Date/Time.

 On the X Axis tab, do not select

Reverse scale direction.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 8: Data Plotting Module – Sea Plot SBE Data Processing

120

Sea Plot File Setup Tab

The File Setup tab defines the Program Setup file; input data file(s); and

output type, orientation, and (if applicable) file name. The File Setup tab looks

like this:

Output Information

is default, and is

only used automatically for batch

processing or when running with Auto

start command line option. For all other

cases, Sea Plot does not automatically

print or output plot to file when you click

Start Process. You can choose to print

or output plot to file while viewing a

plot; output destination and parameters

can be easily changed at that time.

 Output to: Printer, Metafile (.wmf),

JPEG (.jpg), or Bitmap (.bmp). When

viewing plot, you can also output to

clipboard; from clipboard, you can

paste plot into another application

(such as Microsoft Word).

 Orientation: if outputting to printer.

Driver default, Landscape, or

Portrait. If Driver default selected,

orientation determined by default for

printer you select.

 Print full page: Applicable for

outputting to printer. If selected, Sea

Plot sizes plot to fit 81/2 x 11 inch

paper. If not selected, input desired

plot size (Units, Width, and Height).

 Units, Width, and Height: Plot size.

Applicable when outputting to printer

(if Print full page was not selected),

or graphics file.

Return to SBE Data Processing window.

 If Confirm Program Setup Change selected in Options

menu - If you made changes and did not Save or Save

As, program asks if you want to save changes.

 If Confirm Program Setup Change not selected in

Options menu - Button says Save & Exit. If you do not

want to save changes, use Cancel button to exit.

Default directory and file name (can be easily changed while

viewing plot) for outputting .wmf, .jpg, or .bmp graphic file.

 If more than 1 file to be processed, Output file

field disappears

and output file names are set to match input file names. For

example, if processing Test.cnv and T

est1.cnv, and outputting

.jpg files, output files will be Test.jpg and Test1.jpg.

 Sea Plot adds Name append to (each) output file name,

before extension. For example, if processing Test.cnv and

test1.cnv with a Name append of CTDpH, and outputting .jpg

files, output files will be TestCTDpH.jpg and Test1CTDpH.jpg.

Click

Start Process

to begin

processing data. Status field

shows Processing complete

when done.

Input data directory and file names.

Select to pick a different file.

To process multiple files from

same directory:

1. Click Select.

2. In Select dialog box, hold down

Ctrl key while clicking on each

desired file.

If multiple

files selected, header in each

file must contain same set of sensors

and variables.

For overlay plots:

 If Sort input files selected: Sea Plot

sorts input files in alphabetical order.

 If Sort input files not selected: Sea

Plot maintains order of files as you

selected them using Ctrl key. Use

this feature if there is a particular

data set you want to use as base on

a waterfall overlay plot. Note that

using Shift key to select files will not

maintain selected order.

File to store

all

information input in File, Plot, and Axis Setup tabs.

Open

to select a

different .psa file, Save or Save As to save current settings, or Restore to reset all

settings to match last saved version.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 8: Data Plotting Module – Sea Plot SBE Data Processing

121

Sea Plot Plot Setup Tab

The Plot Setup tab defines the plot type, scans to be included, and plot layout

(title, color, font grid lines, etc.). The Plot Setup tab looks like this:



Single X - Multiple Y: 1 X axis and up to 4 Y axes

 Single X - Multiple Y, Overlay: 1 X axis and up to 4 Y axes, overlaying data from

multiple files on 1 plot

 Single Y - Multiple X: 1 Y axis and up to 4 X axes

 Single Y - Multiple X, Overlay: 1 Y axis and up to 4 X axes, overlaying data from

multiple files on 1 plot

 TS Plot: temperature vs. salinity, with density or thermosteric anomaly contours

 TS Plot, Overlay: TS plot, overlaying data from multiple files on 1 plot

Plot

Title

and

Title color

. Select

Add file name to title to add

input data (.cnv) file name to title

(for overlay plots, it adds first file

name to title). For example, if you

enter title as P vs T, select Add

file name to title, and data file

name is October1.cnv, title will

be P vs T, October 1.cnv.

Plot

Font type

and

Font size

(small, medium, or large). Sea

Plot displays example of font

type to right of selection. List of

fonts depends on what fonts are

installed on your computer.

Grid lines

(none, horizontal and vertical, horizontal, or

vertical), Grid style (solid, dotted, or dashed line), and

whether to place Grid in front of plotted data.

Inside Background Color

defines color within axes.

Outside Background Color

defines color outside axes.

See below.

Size (small, medium, or large) of

symbol for each variable, if

Monochrome plot or Plot

symbols only selected.

Symbol plotting frequency

(0 = least frequent, 9 = most

frequent), if Monochrome

plot selected. If too frequent,

symbols create illusion of

very thick line, making details

difficult to see.



Monochrome plot: Substitute

black lines with symbols for

colors (Colors and symbols

are defined on Axis setup tabs

for non-overlay plots. For

overlay plots, click Overlay

Setup button to define).

Enables you to set up axes

with colors for viewing on

screen, and then switch to

black lines with symbols for

black and white printing.

 Plot symbols only: Mark

each individual data point with

a symbol, and do not connect

symbols with a line (Symbols

are defined on Axis setup tabs

for non-overlay plots. For

overlay plots, click Overlay

Setup button to define).

 Show line legends: Show line

legends below plot title.

Legend indicates line color

and type (for color plots) or

line symbol and type (for

monochrome plots). For

overlay plots, legend indicates

line color or symbol only for

first file.

Define space between axes and maximum and

minimum plotted values, if Auto range selected

on Axis setup tabs. For 0%, maximum and

minimum values plot on axes.



Mark data points: Mark

individual data points with

a dot, and connect dots. If

not selected, Sea Plot just

draws a continuous line

between data points.

 Show plot shadow:

Create shadow effect to

bottom and right of axes.

 Black text axes – Create

labels for all axes in black.

If not selected:

- Axis label color matches

selected plot color for

each variable.

- For overlay files, colors

match colors for variables

in first file.

Enabled if overlay plot type is

selected. See below.

Enabled if TS plot

type is selected.

See below.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 8: Data Plotting Module – Sea Plot SBE Data Processing

122

Process Options

If the Process Options button is clicked on the Plot Setup tab, the following

dialog box appears:

Plot all scans in file. If not

selected, plot Scans to process.

Total number of scans to process.

Skip these scans at beginning of cast, and then plot

remaining scans or number of scans designated by

Scans to process. Example: If Scans to process

is 100 and Scans to skip at start is 10,

Sea Plot processes scans 10 through 109.

Skip this number of scans between

each scan to plot.

Example: If Scans to process is 10 and

Scans to skip at start is 2, Sea Plot

plots every other scan (scans 0, 2, 4, 6,

and 8).

Plot scans that were marked with bad flag in

Loop Edit. If not selected, Sea Plot omits those

data points from plot. See illustration below. Create a discontinuous line:

 Lift pen over data marked with bad

flag in Wild Edit, and

 Lift pen over scans marked with

bad flag in Loop Edit (if Plot scans

marked bad by loop edit was

not selected).

See illustration below.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 8: Data Plotting Module – Sea Plot SBE Data Processing

123

Overlay Setup

If an overlay plot type is selected on the Plot Setup tab, the Overlay Setup

button is enabled. If clicked, the following dialog box appears:

Line Colors

Click Select Starting Color and click desired

color in color wheel; then click Select Ending

Color and click desired color in color wheel.

Sea Plot calculates evenly spaced colors

(10 evenly spaced colors if you selected an

axis or 4 evenly spaced colors if you selected

a file).

 Advance clockwise not selected: Sea Plot

calculates colors moving counterclockwise

around circle from starting to ending color.

 Advance clockwise selected: Sea Plot

calculates colors moving clockwise around

circle from starting to ending color.

To set 1 color for all selected lines, click Select

Starting Color and enter desired color value in

box; then tab to Select Ending Color box and

enter same value again.

Select desired color

brightness (1 = least bright;

15 = brightest).

Note:

If more than 10 files

were selected on the

File Setup tab, Sea

Plot repeats the colors

defined for files 1-10.

For example, if 20 files

were selected, files 1

and 11 have the same

color, 2 and 12 have

the same color, etc.

Select line types for each axis,

for each file. See below.

Select line colors for each

axis, for each file. See below.

Axis offsets

define distance to separate plot from

each file, for each axis. Offset units match axis

units. For example, if Axis 1 is temperature in °C, a

0.2 offset means that file 1 plots at actual data

points, file 2 plots at 0.2 °C more than actual data

points, file 3 plots at 0.4 °C more than actual data

points, etc. This creates a waterfall

effect and allows

user to see changes in shape that would be difficult

to see if plots were not offset from each other.

Note: Axis offsets are not applicable for TS plots.

Select line symbols for each axis, for each file.

Applicable if Monochrome Plot or Plot symbols

only selected on Plot Setup tab. See below.

Double click on

a file heading to

select a range of

colors for that

file, for all axes.

Color wheel

dialog box

appears

(see below).

Double click on a box to pick a

color for selected axis in

selected file. Color dialog box

appears; select desired color

and click OK.

Double click on an axis heading to select a range of colors for that

axis, for all files. Color wheel dialog box appears (see below).

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 8: Data Plotting Module – Sea Plot SBE Data Processing

124

Line Symbols

Line Types

Note:

If more than 10 files were

selected on the File Setup

tab, Sea Plot repeats the line

symbols and types defined for

files 1-10. For example, if

20 files were selected, files 1

and 11 have the same line

symbol and type, 2 and 12

have the same line symbol

and type, etc.

Double click on axis heading to select same line symbol for that axis, for all

files. Line symbol dialog appears; make desired selection and click OK.

Double click on file

heading to select same

line symbol for that file,

for all axes. Line symbol

dialog appears; make

desired selection and

click OK.

Pull down on box to

pick line symbol for

selected axis in

selected file.

Double click on axis heading to select same line type for that axis, for all

files. Line type dialog appears; make desired selection and click OK.

Double click on file

heading to select same

line type for that file, for

all axes. Line type

dialog appears; make

desired selection and

click OK.

Pull down on box to

pick line type for

selected axis in

selected file.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 8: Data Plotting Module – Sea Plot SBE Data Processing

125

TS Plot Setup

If a TS plot type is selected on the Plot Setup tab, the TS Plot Setup button is

enabled. The TS Plot Setup defines the contour lines for the plot; the user

selects from the following contour types:

 Density contours – Sea Plot calculates and plots sigma-t contours

if temperature is plotted, or sigma-theta contours if potential

temperature is plotted (see Axis Setup Tabs below for selection of

temperature parameter).

 Thermosteric anomaly contours

The units for the parameters in the input data file do not affect the contour

calculations. For example, temperature could be in °C or °F, ITS-90 or

IPTS-68; Sea Plot performs the required conversions to calculate the contours.

The following table defines the required input parameters for various

combinations of temperature, salinity, and contours:

To plot: Input .cnv file must

include:

temperature, salinity, density sigma-t

temperature, salinity, thermosteric anomaly temperature, salinity

temperature, derived salinity, density sigma-t

temperature, derived salinity, thermosteric anomaly

temperature,

conductivity, pressure

potential temperature, salinity, density sigma-theta

potential temperature, salinity, thermosteric anomaly

potential temperature,

salinity

potential temperature, derived salinity, density sigma-t or

potential temperature, derived salinity, thermosteric anomaly

potential temperature,

temperature *,

conductivity, pressure

*Derived salinity requires actual temperature in the input file. Potential

temperature cannot be used in calculation of derived salinity.

If the TS Plot Setup button is clicked, the following dialog box appears:

Variable to be calculated and plotted on

contour lines – density (sigma-t or sigma-

theta)

or thermosteric anomaly. These variables are

calculated by Sea Plot from data in input file,

and do not need to be in input file.

Significant digits to right of decimal

point for contour line labels.

Starting contour value

is lowest value

of contour variable to be plotted. First

contour line is plotted at this value;

subsequent lines are plotted at every

Contour Interval.

Distance of contour line labels from

Y axis as a % of X axis size

(0% = label contour lines on Y axis,

100% = label contour lines at far

right of plot).

Type size of contour line labels

(1 = smallest, 10 = largest).

Select contour line thickness.

Define contour line smoothness

(10 = least smooth, 200 = smoothest).

Select contour line color for color plots.

Button is not enabled if monochrome plot

was

selected on Plot Setup tab.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 8: Data Plotting Module – Sea Plot SBE Data Processing

126

Sea Plot Axis Setup Tabs

Each Axis Setup tab defines a plot variable, scale, and line type.

 Axis tabs are labeled X Axis and Y Axis if an X-Y plot was selected on

the Plot Setup tab.

 Axis tabs are labeled Temperature and Salinity if a TS plot was selected

on the Plot Setup tab.

X-Y Axis Setup Tabs

An Axis Setup tab looks like this for X-Y plots (X Axis 2 tab shown;

other axis tabs are similar):

Include this axis in plot. Sea Plot

can plot up to 5 variables (1 Y

and 4 X, or 1 X and 4 Y). At least

1 X and 1Y variable is required,

so this selection is available only

on Axis Setup tab for third,

fourth, and fifth axis.

Note: If you deselect an axis, all

axes numbered above that axis

are automatically deselected.

Drop down list includes all variables in data (.cnv) file. Sea Plot indicates range of data for selected variable, to assist setup of plot scale.

Range is full range of data in file(s), and does not reflect your selection of Scans to process, Scans to skip at start, Scans to skip

between points, etc. in Process Options dialog box. If file contains data collected while instrument was in air, range reflects these values. If

multiple files were selected on File Setup tab, range is lowest value in all files to highest value in all files. If selected variable is derived

salinity or derived density, variable range shown is 0 to 0, because Sea Plot does not know derived salinity or density values until you click

Start Process and it begins to calculate derived values.

Order in drop down list reflects order of variables in file. If file contains multiple occurrences of a variable (for example, you calculated

salinity in Data Conversion and then again in Derive, after aligning and filtering data), list adds a suffix (1st, 2nd, 3rd, etc.) to variable name;

do not confuse this with labeling for data from duplicate sensors (for example, Salinity, 2 [PSU] 1st is first occurrence in file of salinity

calculated from secondary temperature and conductivity sensor data). Select desired variable for plotting.



Auto range: Sea Plot selects

axis Minimum and Maximum

values, number of Major

divisions on axis, and number

of Minor divisions between

major divisions.

 Auto divisions: Sea Plot

selects number of major

divisions on axis, and number

of minor divisions between

major divisions. User

selects axis Minimum and

Maximum values.

Any values that fall outside user-

selected Minimum to Maximum

range will plot at minimum or

maximum, as applicable.

Select to label axis with variable

name as listed in drop down

Variable list, or enter a Custom

label for axis.

Select desired

Line type

color

and symbol.

 Selection of color or monochrome

plot, and inclusion of symbols in plot,

is made on Plot Setup tab, and

applies to all axes.

 If an overlay plot was selected on

Plot Setup tab, line type, color, and

symbol are grayed out – select these

for all files using Overlay Setup

button on Plot Setup tab.

Plot axis from highest to lowest value. Typically

used when pressure or depth is plotted on Y axis,

so pressure / depth starts at 0 at top of plot and

increases as you move down vertically.

Plot this axis on linear or logarithmic scale.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 8: Data Plotting Module – Sea Plot SBE Data Processing

127

TS Plot Axis Setup Tabs

An Axis Setup tab looks like this for TS plots (Temperature axis tab shown;

Salinity axis tab is similar):

Drop down list includes all applicable variables in data (.cnv) file - temperature and potential temperature (for Temperature tab) and salinity

(for Salinity tab), as well as derived salinity (for Salinity tab). Sea Plot indicates range of data for selected variable, to assist you in setup of

plot scale. Range is full range of data in .cnv file(s), and does not reflect your selection of Scans to process, Scans to skip at start,

Scans to skip between points, etc. in Process Options dialog box. If file contains data collected while instrument was in air, range reflects

these values. If multiple files were selected on File Setup tab, range is lowest value in all files to highest value in all files. If selected

variable (on Salinity tab) is derived salinity, variable range shown is 0 to 0, because Sea Plot does not know derived salinity values until

you click Start Process and it begins to calculate derived values.

Order in drop down list reflects order of variables in file. If file contains multiple occurrences of a variable (for example, you calculated

salinity in Data Conversion and then again in Derive, after aligning and filtering data), list adds a suffix (1st, 2nd, 3rd, etc.) to variable name;

do not confuse this with labeling for data from duplicate sensors (for example, Salinity, 2 [PSU] 1st is first occurrence in file of salinity

calculated from secondary temperature and conductivity sensor data). Select desired variable for plotting.



Auto range: Sea Plot selects

axis Minimum and Maximum

values, number of Major

divisions on axis, and number

of Minor divisions between

major divisions.

 Auto divisions: Sea Plot

selects number of major

divisions on axis, and number

of minor divisions between

major divisions. User

selects axis Minimum and

Maximum values.

Any values that fall outside user-

selected Minimum to Maximum

range will plot at minimum or

maximum, as applicable.

Select to label axis with variable

name as listed in drop down

Variable list, or enter a Custom

label for axis.

Select desired

Line type

color

and symbol.

 Selection of color or monochrome

plot, and inclusion of symbols in plot,

is made on Plot Setup tab, and

applies to all axes.

 If an overlay plot was selected on

Plot Setup tab, line type, color, and

symbol are grayed out – select these

for all files using Overlay Setup

button on Plot Setup tab.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 8: Data Plotting Module – Sea Plot SBE Data Processing

128

Sea Plot Header View Tab

The Header View tab allows you to view the existing header in the input

file(s). The Header View tab looks like this:

View existing header in

input

file(s). If multiple input files are to be processed,

switch between input file headers by using Prior and Next buttons.



Header lines beginning with * contain header

information copied from raw input data file.

 Header lines beginning with # contain header

information describing input converted data (.cnv) file

(not applicable to example shown). As each module is

run, it adds information to the header, such as the input

file name for the module, date and time the module

was run, and input parameters. Thus, the header

contains a complete record of how the data has been

converted, edited, and manipulated.

 ASCII string *END* flags end of header information.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 8: Data Plotting Module – Sea Plot SBE Data Processing

129

Viewing Sea Plot Plots

Shown below are three examples:

 Multiple X-Y plots, no overlay

 Multiple TS plots, no overlay

 X-Y overlay plot

Following the examples is a detailed description of the plot’s menus.

Multiple X-Y Plots, No Overlay

Zoom in to enlarge details by clicking and dragging

to select a rectangular area. You can zoom in

several times before reaching program limits. Undo

zoom by selecting Undo Zoom in View menu.

, 1/3

If plotting multiple files, title bar indicates which file number is

shown and total number of files plotted. Use View menu or

keyboard Arrow, Home, or End keys to switch between files.

Double click on axis or axis label (temperature,

pressure, etc.), and appropriate Axis Setup tab

appears, allowing you to make changes and

reprocess data with new plotting parameters.

Double click on plot title, and Plot

Setup tab appears, allowing you to

make changes and reprocess data.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 8: Data Plotting Module – Sea Plot SBE Data Processing

130

Multiple TS Plots, No Overlay

Zoom in to enlarge details by clicking and dragging

to select a rectangular area. You can zoom in

several times before reaching program limits. Undo

zoom by selecting Undo Zoom in View menu.

Contour lines – example reflects following

choices in TS Plot Setup dialog box:

 Contour variable - density (so Sea Plot

calculated and plotted sigma-t).

 Contour interval - 0.2

 Significant digits – 2

 Label position – 5%

Double click on axis or axis label (temperature or

salinity), and appropriate Axis Setup tab appears,

allowing you to make changes and reprocess data

with new plotting parameters.

Double click on plot title, and Plot

Setup tab appears, allowing you to

make changes and reprocess data.

If plotting multiple files, title bar indicates which file number is

shown and total number of files plotted. Use View menu or

keyboard Arrow, Home, or End keys to switch between files.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 8: Data Plotting Module – Sea Plot SBE Data Processing

131

X-Y Overlay Plot

If you select Show Plot Legend in the View menu, the Plot Legend dialog box

shows the color for each line in each file, and allows you to apply a highlight

color to a selected line or lines. The dialog box looks like this:

With the highlight color applied, you can view the plot on screen and output to

the printer, file, or clipboard. When you click Cancel in the Plot Legend dialog

box, the colors return to what they were before you applied the highlight.

Note:

If Monochrome plot or

Plot symbols only were

selected on the Plot

Setup tab, the Plot

Legend dialog box shows

each line symbol instead

of each line color, and

provides for user

selection of a highlight

symbol instead of a

highlight color.

In View menu, select Show Plot Legends to view complete list of

file names and plot colors or plot symbols (if monochrome plot was

selected on Plot Setup tab). You can highlight 1 line, all lines in

1 file, or 1 line in all files with color or line symbol. See below.

Base lines (from first file) plotted at actual

data points. Other lines are offset from base

line by amounts defined in Overlay Setup

dialog box (access from Plot Setup tab).

Zoom in to enlarge details by clicking and dragging

to select a rectangular area. You can zoom in

several times before reaching program limits. Undo

zoom by selecting Undo Zoom in View menu.

Double click on axis or axis label

(temperature, time, etc.), and

appropriate Axis Setup tab

appears, allowing you to make

changes and reprocess data with

new plotting parameters.

Double click on plot title, and

Plot Setup tab appears,

allowing you to make

changes and reprocess data.

Legend shows line color and

type for each axis in first file

if Show line legends selected

on Plot Setup tab.

Double click on axis heading, and

all

files for selected axis change to

highlight color.

Double click on color, and selected

axis in selected file changes to

highlight color.

Double click on

file name, and all

lines (all axes) for

selected file

change to

highlight color.

Click to select

desired highlight

color. Color dialog

box appears;

make selection

and click OK.

Note that if you print, save, or copy

plot to clipboard, it does not include

legend. To save legend information,

click Copy. Legend can then be

pasted into another application, such

as Microsoft Word, and saved.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 8: Data Plotting Module – Sea Plot SBE Data Processing

132

Plot Menus

The Sea Plot View window’s menus are described below:

Output - Directs Sea Plot to output plot now to printer, clipboard, or a file. If

multiple files are plotted (but not as an overlay), you can output plot shown on

screen or plots for all files. How plot is output (size, file type, etc.) is

controlled by Options menu.

Options - Sets up how plot is output to printer, clipboard, or a file.

 Print -

 Orientation – landscape, portrait, or print driver default

 Print full page - scale plot to fit 8 1/2 x 11 inch page. If not selected,

Size determined by -

Sea Plot View Dimensions - dimensions of plot as shown on screen

File Setup tab entries - entries on File Setup tab for Width and Height

Values Entered Below - dimensions entered in dialog box (in mm)

 File -

 Data format - Metafile (.wmf), Jpeg (.jpg), or Bitmap (.bmp)

 Size determined by

Sea Plot View Dimensions - dimensions of plot as shown on screen

File Setup tab entries - entries on File Setup tab for Width and Height

Values Entered Below - dimensions entered in dialog box (in mm)

 Clipboard -

 Data format - Metafile (.wmf), Jpeg (.jpg), or Bitmap (.bmp)

 Size determined by -

Sea Plot View Dimensions - dimensions of plot as shown on screen

File Setup tab entries - entries on File Setup tab for Width and Height

Values Entered Below - dimensions entered in dialog box (in mm)

View – Sets up viewing options.

 Show cursor position – Directs Sea Plot to show the coordinates of the

cursor as you move the cursor around when viewing a plot.

 Next Plot, Prior Plot – Directs Sea Plot to switch between plots, if you

selected multiple files on File Setup tab but are not doing an overlay plot.

 File name – Lists, and allows you to select from, all input files, if you

selected multiple files on File Setup tab but are not doing an overlay plot.

 Show plot legends – For overlay plots only, allows you to view a complete

list of file names and plot colors or plot symbols (if monochrome plot was

selected on Plot Setup tab).

 Undo Zoom – Directs Sea Plot to return plot to original ranges specified

on Axis Setup tabs. Undo Zoom is grayed out unless you have zoomed in

(by clicking and dragging to select a rectangular area) to enlarge details.

 Set Zoomed Ranges – Directs Sea Plot to substitute current zoomed ranges

of plot for Minimum and Maximum plot ranges on Axis Setup tabs. This

provides ability to save ranges of zoomed view, so you can go to exactly

same view next time you run Sea Plot. Set Zoomed Ranges is grayed out

unless you have zoomed in (by clicking and dragging to select a

rectangular area) to enlarge details.

Note:

If you print, save, or copy

the plot to the clipboard,

it does not include the

legend. To save legend

information, click Copy in

the Plot Legend dialog

box. The legend can then

be pasted into another

application, such as

Microsoft Word, and

saved.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 9: Miscellaneous Module – SeaCalc III SBE Data Processing

133

Section 9: Miscellaneous Module – SeaCalc III

SeaCalc is a seawater calculator that computes a number of derived variables

from one user-input scan of temperature, pressure, etc. SeaCalc has two tabs:

 The first tab calculates Practical Salinity and associated parameters using

EOS-80 equations. SeaCalc remembers whether you last changed

conductivity or salinity, and calculates other parameters based on this.

For example, if you change conductivity, salinity is recalculated; if you

then change temperature, salinity is recalculated again (based on input

C, P, and t). Conversely, if you change salinity, conductivity is

recalculated; if you then change temperature, conductivity is recalculated

again (based on input S, P, and t).

Notes:

 Algorithms used for calculation of

derived parameters in Data

Conversion, Derive, Sea Plot,

SeaCalc III [EOS-80 (Practical

Salinity) tab], and Seasave are

identical, except as noted in

Appendix V: Derived Parameter

Formulas (EOS-80; Practical

Salinity), and are based on EOS-80

equations.

 Algorithms used for calculation of

TEOS-10 parameters in Derive

TEOS-10 and SeaCalc III [TEOS-10

(Absolute Salinity) tab] are

described in Derive TEOS-10 in

Section 6: Data Processing

Modules.

Enter temperature in IPTS-68

ITS-90. SeaCalc automatically

computes other parameter.

Enter conductivity

salinity. SeaCalc

automatically computes other parameter.

Click to calculate derived variables.

Used to compute sigma-ref.

Used to compute gravity

and salt water depth.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Section 9: Miscellaneous Module – SeaCalc III SBE Data Processing

134

 The second tab calculates Absolute Salinity and associated parameters,

using TEOS-10 equations. SeaCalc automatically populates this tab with

Practical Salinity, temperature [ITS-90, deg C], pressure, reference

pressure, and latitude from the Practical Salinity tab, and requires a

Longitude entry.

If you go back to the Practical Salinity tab, SeaCalc automatically populates it

with values from the Absolute Salinity tab.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Appendix I: Command Line Options, Command Line Operation, & Batch File Processing SBE Data Processing

135

Appendix I: Command Line Options,

Command Line Operation, and

Batch File Processing

Command Line Options

Command line options can be used to assist in automating processing, by

overriding information in an existing program setup (.psa) file or designating a

different .psa file.

Access the Command Line Options dialog box by selecting Command Line

Options in the SBE Data Processing window’s Run menu:

The Command Line Options dialog box looks like this:

Note:

The default program setup (.psa) file is

the last saved .psa file for

the module. PostProcSuite.ini contains

the location and file name of the last

saved .psa file for each module.

- Primary PostProcSuite.ini file default

location, if available, is:

%LOCALAPPDATA%\

Sea-Bird\IniFiles\

(Example

c:\Users\dbresko\AppData\Local\

Sea-Bird\IniFiles\PostProcSuite.ini)

- Secondary PostProcSuite.ini file

default location is:

%APPDATA%\Sea-Bird\IniFiles\

(Example

c:\Documents and Settings\

dbresko.SEABIRD\Application Data\

Sea-Bird\IniFiles\PostProcSuite.ini)

Manual revision 7.26.8 Appendix I: Command Line Options, Command Line Operation, & Batch File Processing SBE Data Processing

136

The option parameters are:

Parameter

Description

/cString

Use String as instrument configuration (.con or .xmlcon) file.

String must include full path and file name.

Note: If using this parameter, you must also specify input file

name (using /iString).

/iString

Use String as input data file

name. String must include full path

and file name.

The /iString option supports standard wildcard expansion:

 ? matches any single character in specified position within

file name or extension.

 * matches any set of characters starting at specified position

within file name or extension and continuing until end of

file name or extension or another specified character.

/oString Use String as output directory (not including file name).

/fString Use String as output file name (not including directory).

/aString Append String to output file name (before extension).

/pString Use String as Program Setup (.psa) file. String must include

full path and file name.

/xModule:

String

Use String to define an additional parameter to pass to

Module. Not all modules have x parameters; see module

descriptions. If specifying multiple x parameters, enclose in

double quotes and separate with a space; do not specify x

parameter more than once.

Example: Run Data Conversion, telling it to skip first

1000 scans, and also run Window Filter, telling it to output

difference between original and filtered value:

/x“datcnv:skip1000 wfilter:diff” Correct

/xdatcnv:skip1000 /xwfilter:diff Incorrect

If specifying multiple parameters, insert one or more spaces or tabs

between each parameter in the list.

Example: You set up and saved .psa files for Filter, Loop Edit, Bin Average,

and Derive within each module’s dialog box, and ran each module

successively. The input and output file names in all the .psa files were the

same - c:\1st\test.cnv (this has the effect of overwriting the module input with

the module output).

You now want to run each process again, using a different input and output

file - c:\2nd\test1.cnv. You enter the following in SBE Data Processing’s

Command Line Options dialog box:

/ic:\2nd\test1.cnv /ftest1.cnv /oc:\2nd

When you pull down on the Run menu and select Filter, you see in the Filter

dialog box that the program substituted c:\2nd\test1.cnv for c:\1st\test.cnv as

the input data and output data path and file. Similarly, test1.cnv is shown as

the input and output data file in all the modules. You can run each process

rapidly in succession, without needing to enter the new path and file name

individually in each module.

Auto Start (for running a module)

Select this and then select the desired module to have SBE Data Processing

automatically run the module with the last saved setup parameters (defined by

the .psa file) and any entered Command Line Options.

 If you select Auto Start, a Run Minimized selection box appears. If

selected, SBE Data Processing minimizes its window while processing the

data, allowing you to do other work on the computer. When processing is

complete, the SBE Data Processing window reappears.

Note:

If you do not select Auto Start,

when you select a module the

module dialog box appears,

allowing you to review the selected

input files and data setup before

beginning processing.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Appendix I: Command Line Options, Command Line Operation, & Batch File Processing SBE Data Processing

137

Command Line Operation

The following modules can be run from the command line (default location for

files is c:\Program Files\Sea-Bird\SBEDataProcessing-Win32):

Module Executable File Name

Align CTD AlignCTDW.exe

ASCII In ASCII_InW.exe

ASCII Out ASCII_OutW.exe

Bin Average BinAvgW.exe

Bottle Summary BottleSumW.exe *

Buoyancy BuoyancyW.exe

Cell Thermal Mass CellTMW.exe

Data Conversion DatCnvW.exe

Derive DeriveW.exe

Derive TEOS-10 DeriveTEOS_10W.exe

Filter FilterW.exe

Loop Edit LoopEditW.exe

Mark Scan MarkScanW.exe

SeaCalc III SeaCalcII.exe

Sea Plot SeaPlotW.exe

Section SectionW.exe

Split SplitW.exe

Strip StripW.exe

Translate TransW.exe

Wild Edit WildEditW.exe

Window Filter W_FilterW.exe

* Bottle Summary’s executable file name was previously RosSumW.exe.

BottleSumW.exe will run if BottleSumW.exe or RosSumW.exe is typed on

command line.

Command line parameters can be used to override existing information in the

.psa file. The command line parameters are:

Parameter Description

/cString

Use String as instrument configuration (.con or .xmlcon) file.

String must include full path and file name. Note: If using

/cString, must also specify input file name (using /iString).

/iString

Use String as input data file name. String must include full

path and file name.

This parameter supports standard wildcard expansion:

 ? matches any single character in specified position within

file name or extension

 * matches any set of characters starting at specified

position within file name or extension and continuing until

end of file name or extension or another specified character

/oString Use String as output directory (not including file name).

/fString Use String as output file name (not including directory).

/aString Append String to output file name (before file name

extension).

/pString Use String as Program Setup (.psa) file. String must include

full path and file name.

/xModule:

String

Use String to define an additional parameter to pass to

Module. Not all modules have x parameters; see module

descriptions. If specifying multiple x parameters, enclose in

double quotes and separate with a space.

Example

: Run Data Conversion from command line, telling it to

skip first 1000 scans: datcnvw.exe /xdatcnv:skip1000

/s Start processing now.

If specifying multiple parameters, insert one or more spaces or tabs

between each parameter in the list.

Note:

The default program setup (.psa) file is

the last saved .psa file for

the module. PostProcSuite.ini contains

the location and file name of the last

saved .psa file for each module.

- Primary PostProcSuite.ini file default

location, if available, is:

%LOCALAPPDATA%\

Sea-Bird\IniFiles\

(Example

c:\Users\dbresko\AppData\Local\

Sea-Bird\IniFiles\PostProcSuite.ini)

- Secondary PostProcSuite.ini file

default location is:

%APPDATA%\Sea-Bird\IniFiles\

(Example

c:\Documents and Settings\

dbresko.SEABIRD\Application Data\

Sea-Bird\IniFiles\PostProcSuite.ini)

Manual revision 7.26.8 Appendix I: Command Line Options, Command Line Operation, & Batch File Processing SBE Data Processing

138

Example: The specified input file directory contains test.dat, test1.dat, and

test2.dat. Select Run in the Windows Start menu. The Run dialog box appears.

For the command line shown (datcnvw.exe /itest*.dat /s), SBE Data

Processing will process test.dat, test1.dat, and test2.dat using Data Conversion.

If the ? wildcard symbol is used (datcnvw /itest?.dat) instead of the *, Data

Conversion will process only test1.dat and test2.dat.

Batch File Processing

Traditional DOS batch file processing cannot be used with the 32-bit

processing modules because the Windows operating system will start the

second process before the first process is finished. The program SBEBatch.exe

(default location c:\Program Files\Sea-Bird\SBEDataProcessing-Win32) or the

Windows Scripting Host can be used to process a batch file to automate data

processing tasks. The format for SBEBatch is:

sbebatch filename parameters

The parameters are referenced in the batch file in the same way as the DOS

batch file, using the percent sign (%) followed by numbers 1 through 9. %1 in

the batch file is replaced by the first command line parameter, %2 in the batch

file is replaced by the second command line parameter, and so on until %9.

Each line in the batch file contains the process name followed by command

line arguments. The process names are:

Module Process Name

Align CTD Alignctd

ASCII In Asciiin

ASCII Out Asciiout

Bin Average Binavg

Bottle Summary Bottlesum *

Buoyancy Buoyancy

Cell Thermal Mass Celltm

Data Conversion Datcnv

Derive Derive

Derive TEOS-10 DeriveTEOS10

Filter Filter

Loop Edit Loopedit

Mark Scan Markscan

Sea Plot Seaplot

Section Section

Split Split

Strip Strip

Translate Trans

Wild Edit Wildedit

Window Filter Wfilter

* Bottle Summary’s process name was previously Rossum. Bottlesum will run if

Bottlesum or Rossum is used in the batch file.

Note:

If you have not modified your

autoexec.bat file to put the .exe

files in the path statement, specify

the full path of the .exe file in the

Run dialog box.

Note:

A duplicate copy of SBEBatch.exe

is placed in the Windows folder

when SBE Data Processing is

installed. This allows the user to run

SBEBatch.exe from anywhere,

without having to specify its path.

Note:

SBEBatch can also launch system

commands, such as copying or

renaming a file, deleting a file from

an intermediate step, etc.

Additionally, it can launch non-

Sea-Bird programs, such as Word

Pad. If you call a program that does

not run and then shut down

automatically, such as Word Pad,

you must manually close the

program before batch processing

will continue to the next step.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Appendix I: Command Line Options, Command Line Operation, & Batch File Processing SBE Data Processing

139

The batch file can also contain comment lines to document the file purpose.

Any line beginning with @ is a comment line, and does not affect the results.

Parameters specified in the batch file can be used to override existing

information in the .psa file. These parameters are:

Parameter Description

/cString

Use String as instrument configuration (.con or .xmlcon)

file.

String must include full path and file name.

Note: If using /cString, must also specify input file name

(using /iString).

/iString

Use String as input file name. String must include full path

and file name.

This parameter supports standard wildcard expansion:

 ? matches any single character in specified position within

file name or extension

 * matches any set of characters starting at specified

position within file name or extension and continuing

until the end of file name or extension or another

specified character

/oString Use String as output directory (not including file name).

/fString Use String as output file name (not including directory).

/aString Append String to output file name (before extension).

/pString Use String as Program Setup (.psa) file. String must include

full path and file name.

/xModule:

String

Use String to define an additional parameter to pass to

Module. Not all modules have x parameters; see module

descriptions. If specifying multiple x parameters, enclose in

double quotes and separate with a space.

Example: Run Data Conversion, telling it to skip first

1000 scans: /xdatcnv:skip1000

Wait for user input at start of Module, allowing user to review

setup before processing data for a particular Module. After

reviewing setup, user clicks Start Process in Module dialog

box to continue.

Pause processing data at end of Module, allowing user to

review output from a particular Module before continuing with

rest of processing.

If specifying multiple parameters, insert one or more spaces or tabs

between each parameter in the list.

Parameters specified on the Run line can also be used to control the process:

#m Minimize SBE Data Processing window while processing

data, allowing you to do other work on computer.

Wait for user input at start of each Module, allowing user

to review setup before processing data for each Module.

After reviewing setup, user clicks Start Process in Module

dialog box to continue.

Pause processing data at end of each Module, allowing

user to review output from each Module before continuing

with rest of processing.

Note:

The default program setup (.psa) file is

the last saved .psa file for

the module. PostProcSuite.ini contains

the location and file name of the last

saved .psa file for each module.

- Primary PostProcSuite.ini file default

location, if available, is:

%LOCALAPPDATA%\

Sea-Bird\IniFiles\

(Example

c:\Users\dbresko\AppData\Local\

Sea-Bird\IniFiles\PostProcSuite.ini)

- Secondary PostProcSuite.ini file

default location is:

%APPDATA%\Sea-Bird\IniFiles\

(Example

c:\Documents and Settings\

dbresko.SEABIRD\Application Data\

Sea-Bird\IniFiles\PostProcSuite.ini)

Manual revision 7.26.8 Appendix I: Command Line Options, Command Line Operation, & Batch File Processing SBE Data Processing

140

To process data using a batch file:

1. Run each software module, entering the desired choices in the File Setup

and Data Setup dialog boxes. Upon completing setup, press Save or Save

As on the File Setup tab. The configuration is stored in the Program Setup

File (.psa).

2. Create a batch file to process the data.

Following are two examples of typical batch files.

Example 1 – Process Single File, and Save All Intermediate Files

The data file is c:\leg1\cast5.dat, and the .con file is c:\leg1\cast5.con.

1. Set up each software module, entering desired choices in Setup dialog

boxes. In the File Setup dialog boxes, delete the output file name (this

allows program to base output file name on input file name and any

appended text), and set the output file path as c:\leg1.

2. Create a batch file named prcast.txt in c:\leg1, which contains:

@ Lines starting with @ are comment lines

@ Comment lines have no effect on the result

datcnv /ic:\leg1\%1.dat /cc:\leg1\%1.con /a%2

wildedit /ic:\leg1\%1%2.cnv /as1

filter /ic:\leg1\%1%2s1.cnv /as2

loopedit /ic:\leg1\%1%2s1s2.cnv /as3

derive /ic:\leg1\%1%2s1s2s3.cnv /cc:\leg1\%1.con /as4

seaplot /ic:\leg1\%1%2s1s2s3s4.cnv

Module names and options are separated by one or more spaces or tabs.

3. Select Run in the Windows Start menu. The Run dialog box appears.

4. Type in the program name and parameters as shown:

sbebatch c:\leg1\prcast.txt cast5 test1

(batch filename is c:\leg1\prcast1.txt; parameter %1 is cast5;

parameter %2 is test1)

5. The data is processed as follows (all input and output files are in c:\leg1):

Module Input File(s) Output File

Data Conversion

(datcnv)

cast5.dat

cast5.con cast5test1.cnv

Wild Edit (wildedit) cast5test1.cnv cast5test1s1.cnv

Filter (filter) cast5test1s1.cnv cast5test1s1s2.cnv

Loop Edit (loopedit) cast5test1s1s2.cnv cast5test1s1s2s3.cnv

Derive (derive) cast5test1s1s2s3.cnv

cast5.con cast5test1s1s2s3s4.cnv

Sea Plot (seaplot) cast5test1s1s2s3s4.cnv

cast5test1s1s2s3s4.jpg

(if File Setup tab was

set to output to jpeg)

Note:

For Sea Plot, enter the desired

choices in the File Setup, Plot

Setup, and Axis Setup tabs.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Appendix I: Command Line Options, Command Line Operation, & Batch File Processing SBE Data Processing

141

Example 2 – Process Several Files, and Overwrite All Intermediate Files

Process all data files in c:\leg1. The data files are c:\leg1\cast1.dat and

c:\leg1\cast2.dat, and the .con file is c:\leg1\cast.con.

1. Set up each software module, entering desired choices in Setup dialog

boxes. In the File Setup dialog boxes, delete the output file name (this

allows program to base output file name on input file name and any

appended text). Set the output file path as c:\leg1.

2. Create a batch file named prallcasts.txt in c:\leg1, which contains:

@ Lines starting with @ are comment lines

@ Comment lines have no effect on the result

datcnv /i%1\*.dat /c%1\cast.con /o%1

wildedit /i%1\*.cnv /o1%

filter /i%1\*.cnv /o1%

loopedit /i%1\*.cnv /o1%

binavg /i%1\*.cnv /aavg /o%1

derive /i%1\*avg.cnv /c%1\cast.con /o%1

seaplot /i%1\*.cnv

Module names and options are separated by one or more spaces or tabs.

3. Select Run in the Windows Start menu. The Run dialog box appears.

4. Type in the program name and parameters as shown:

sbebatch c:\leg1\prallcasts.txt c:\leg1

(batch filename is c:\leg1\prallcasts.txt; parameter %1 is c:\leg1)

5. The data is processed as follows (all input and output files are in c:\leg1):

Module Input File(s) Output File

Data Conversion (datcnv)

cast1.dat

cast2.dat

cast.con

cast1.cnv

cast2.cnv

Wild Edit (wildedit) cast1.cnv

cast2.cnv

cast1.cnv

cast2.cnv

Filter (filter) cast1.cnv

cast2.cnv

cast1.cnv

cast2.cnv

Loop Edit (loopedit) cast1.cnv

cast2.cnv

cast1.cnv

cast2.cnv

Bin Average (binavg) cast1.cnv

cast2.cnv

cast1avg.cnv

cast2avg.cnv

Derive (derive)

cast1avg.cnv

cast2avg.cnv

cast.con

cast1.cnv

cast2.cnv

Sea Plot (seaplot) cast1.cnv

cast2.cnv

cast1.jpg

cast2.jpg

(if File Setup tab

was set to output

to jpeg)

Manual revision 7.26.8 Appendix II: Configure (.con or .xmlcon) File Format SBE Data Processing

142

Appendix II:

Configure (.con or .xmlcon) File Format

Modify a .con or .xmlcon configuration file by selecting the instrument in the

Configure menu.

Configuration files (.con or .xmlcon) can also be opened, viewed, and

modified with DisplayConFile.exe, a utility that is installed in the same folder

as SBE Data Processing. Right click on the desired configuration file, select

Open With, and select DisplayConFile. This utility is often used at Sea-Bird to

quickly open and view a configuration file for troubleshooting purposes,

without needing to go through the additional steps of selecting the file in

SBE Data Processing or Seasave.

.xmlcon Configuration File Format

.xmlcon configuration files, written in XML format, were introduced with

SBE Data Processing and Seasave 7.20a. A .xmlcon file uses XML tags to

describe each line in the file. Versions 7.20a and later allow you to open a .con

or a .xmlcon file, and to save the configuration to a .con or a .xmlcon file.

Instruments introduced after 7.20a are compatible only with .xmlcon files.

.con Configuration File Format

Shown below is a line-by-line description of a .con configuration file contents,

which can be viewed in a text editor (i.e., Notepad, Wordpad, etc.).

Line Contents

1 Conductivity sensor serial number

2 Conductivity M, A, B, C, D, CPCOR

3 Conductivity cell_const, series_r, slope, offset, use GHIJ coefficients?

4 Temperature sensor serial number

5 Temperature F0, A, B, C, D, slope, offset, use GHIJ coefficients?

6 Secondary conductivity sensor serial number

7 Secondary conductivity M, A, B, C, D, PCOR

8 Secondary conductivity cell_const, series_r, slope, offset, use GHIJ coefficients?

9 Secondary temperature sensor serial number

10 Secondary temperature F0, A, B, C, D, slope, offset, use GHIJ coefficients?

11 Pressure sensor serial number

12 Pressure T1, T2, T3, T4, T5

13 Pressure C1 (A1), C2 (A0), C3, C4 (A2) - parameters in parentheses for strain gauge sensor

14 Pressure D1, D2, slope, offset, pressure sensor type, AD590_M, AD590_B

15 Oxygen (Beckman/YSI type) sensor serial number

16 Oxygen (Beckman/YSI type) M, B, K, C, SOC, TCOR

17 Oxygen (Beckman/YSI type) WT, PCOR, TAU, BOC

18 pH sensor serial number

19 pH slope, offset, VREF

20 PAR light sensor serial number

21 PAR cal const, multiplier, M, B, surface_cc, surface_r, offset

22 Transmissometer (SeaTech, Chelsea AlphaTracka, WET Labs Cstar) sensor serial number

23 Transmissometer (SeaTech, Chelsea AlphaTracka, WET Labs Cstar) M, B, path length

24 Fluorometer SeaTech sensor serial number

25 Fluorometer SeaTech scale factor, offset

26 Tilt sensor serial number

27 Tilt XM, XB, YM, YB

28 ORP sensor serial number

29 ORP M, B, offset

30 OBS/Nephelometer D&A Backscatterance sensor serial number

Note:

For an easy-to-read report of .con or

.xmlcon file contents, see Appendix III:

Generating .con or .xmlcon File

Reports – ConReport.exe.

Note:

We recommend that you do not open

.xmlcon files with a text editor (i.e.,

Notepad, Wordpad, etc.).

Manual revision 7.26.8 Appendix II: Configure (.con or .xmlcon) File Format SBE Data Processing

143

31 OBS/Nephelometer D&A Backscatterance gain, offset

32 Altimeter scale factor, offset, hyst, min pressure, hysteresis

33 Microstructure temperature sensor serial number

34 Microstructure temperature pre_m, pre_b

35 Microstructure temperature num, denom, A0, A1, A3

36 Microstructure conductivity sensor serial number

37 Microstructure conductivity A0, A1, A2

38 Microstructure conductivity M, B, R

39 Number of external frequencies, number of bytes, number of voltages, instrument type, computer

interface, scan rate, interval, store system time, deck unit or searam?

40 Data format channels 0 - 9

41 Data format channels 10 - 19

42 Data format channels 20 - 39

43 SBE 16: use water temperature?, fixed pressure, fixed pressure temperature

44 Firmware version

45 Miscellaneous: number of frequencies from SBE 9, number of frequencies from SBE 9 to be

suppressed, number of voltages from SBE 9 to be suppressed, voltage range, add surface PAR

voltage?, add NMEA position data?, include IOW sensors? Add NMEA depth data?

46 OBS/Nephelometer IFREMER sensor serial number

47 OBS/Nephelometer IFREMER VM0, VD0, D0, K

48 OBS/Nephelometer Chelsea sensor serial number

49 OBS/Nephelometer Chelsea clear water voltage, scale factor

50 ZAPS sensor serial number

51 ZAPS m, b

52 Conductivity sensor calibration date

53 Temperature sensor calibration date

54 Secondary conductivity sensor calibration date

55 Secondary temperature sensor calibration date

56 Pressure sensor calibration date

57 Oxygen (Beckman/YSI type) sensor calibration date

58 pH sensor calibration date

59 PAR light sensor calibration date

60 Transmissometer (SeaTech, Chelsea AlphaTracka, WET Labs Cstar)

sensor calibration date

61 Fluorometer (SeaTech) sensor calibration date

62 Tilt sensor calibration date

63 ORP sensor calibration date

64 OBS/Nephelometer D&A Backscatterance sensor calibration date

65 Microstructure temperature sensor calibration date

66 Microstructure conductivity sensor calibration date

67 IFREMER OBS/nephelometer sensor calibration date

68 Chelsea OBS/nephelometer sensor calibration date

69 ZAPS sensor calibration date

70 Secondary oxygen (Beckman/YSI type) sensor serial number

71 Secondary oxygen (Beckman/YSI type) sensor calibration date

72 Secondary oxygen(Beckman/YSI type) M, B, K, C, SOC, TCOR

73 Secondary oxygen(Beckman/YSI type) WT, PCOR, TAU, BOC

74 User polynomial 1 sensor serial number

75 User polynomial 1 sensor calibration date

76 User poly1 A0, A1, A2, A3

77 User polynomial 2 sensor serial number

78 User polynomial 2 sensor calibration date

79 User polynomial 2 A0, A1, A2, A3

80 User polynomial 3 sensor serial number

81 User polynomial 3 sensor calibration date

82 User polynomial 3 A0, A1, A2, A3

83 Dr. Haardt Chlorophyll fluorometer sensor serial number

84 Dr. Haardt Chlorophyll fluorometer sensor calibration date

85 Dr. Haardt Chlorophyll fluorometer A0, A1, B0, B1, which modulo bit, gain range switching

86 Dr. Haardt Phycoerythrin fluorometer sensor serial number

87 Dr. Haardt Phycoerythrin fluorometer sensor calibration date

88 Dr. Haardt Phycoerythrin fluorometer A0, A1, B0, B1, which modulo bit, gain range switching

89 Dr. Haardt Turbidity OBS/nephelometer sensor serial number

90 Dr. Haardt Turbidity OBS/nephelometer sensor calibration date

91 Dr. Haardt Turbidity OBS/nephelometer A0, A1, B0, B1, which modulo bit, gain range switching

92 IOW oxygen sensor serial number

93 IOW oxygen sensor calibration date

94 IOW oxygen A0, A1, A2, A3, B0, B1

95 IOW sound velocity sensor serial number

96 IOW sound velocity sensor calibration date

97 IOW sound velocity A0, A1, A2

98 Biospherical natural fluorometer sensor serial number

99 Biospherical natural fluorometer sensor calibration date

100 Biospherical natural fluorometer Cfn, A1, A2, B

Manual revision 7.26.8 Appendix II: Configure (.con or .xmlcon) File Format SBE Data Processing

144

101 Sea tech ls6000 OBS/nephelometer sensor serial number

102 Sea tech ls6000 OBS/nephelometer sensor calibration date

103 Sea tech ls6000 OBS/nephelometer gain, slope, offset

104 Fluorometer Chelsea Aqua 3 sensor serial number

105 Fluorometer Chelsea Aqua 3 sensor calibration date

106 Fluorometer Chelsea Aqua 3 scale factor, slope, offset, Vacetone, VB (static), V1ug/l

107 Fluorometer Turner sensor serial number

108 Fluorometer Turner sensor calibration date

109 Fluorometer Turner scale factor, offset; or

Turner-10au-005 full scale concentration, full scale voltage, zero point concentration

110 Conductivity G, H, I, J, ctcor, cpcor

111 Temperature F0, G, H, I, J

112 Secondary conductivity G, H, I, J, ctcor, cpcor

113 Secondary temperature F0, G, H, I, J

114 WET Labs AC3 beam transmission transmissometer sensor serial number

115 WET Labs AC3 beam transmission transmissometer sensor calibration date

116 WET Labs AC3 beam transmission transmissometer Ch2o, Vh2o, Vdark, x, chlorophyll absorption

Kv, Vh2o, a^x

117 WET Labs WETStar fluorometer sensor serial number

118 WET Labs WETStar fluorometer sensor calibration date

119 WET Labs WETStar Vblank, scale factor

120 Primary conductivity sensor using g, h, i, j coefficients calibration date

121 Primary temperature sensor using g, h, i, j coefficients calibration date

122 Secondary conductivity sensor using g, h, i, j coefficients calibration date

123 Secondary temperature sensor using g, h, i, j coefficients calibration date

124 FGP pressure sensor #0 serial number

125 FGP pressure sensor #0 calibration date

126 FGP pressure sensor #0 scale factor, offset

127 FGP pressure sensor #1 serial number

128 FGP pressure sensor #1 calibration date

129 FGP pressure sensor #1 scale factor, offset

130 FGP pressure sensor #2 serial number

131 FGP pressure sensor #2 calibration date

132 FGP pressure sensor #2 scale factor, offset

133 FGP pressure sensor #3 serial number

134 FGP pressure sensor #3 calibration date

135 FGP pressure sensor #3 scale factor, offset

136 FGP pressure sensor #4 serial number

137 FGP pressure sensor #4 calibration date

138 FGP pressure sensor #4 scale factor, offset

139 FGP pressure sensor #5 serial number

140 FGP pressure sensor #5 calibration date

141 FGP pressure sensor #5 scale factor, offset

142 FGP pressure sensor #6 serial number

143 FGP pressure sensor #6 calibration date

144 FGP pressure sensor #6 scale factor, offset

145 FGP pressure sensor #7 serial number

146 FGP pressure sensor #7 calibration date

147 FGP pressure sensor #7 scale factor, offset

148 Primary OBS/Nephelometer seapoint turbidity meter sensor serial number

149 Primary OBS/Nephelometer seapoint turbidity meter sensor calibration date

150 Primary OBS/Nephelometer seapoint turbidity meter gain, scale

151 Secondary OBS/Nephelometer seapoint turbidity meter sensor serial number

152 Secondary OBS/Nephelometer seapoint turbidity meter sensor calibration date

153 Secondary OBS/Nephelometer seapoint turbidity meter gain, scale

154 Fluorometer Dr. Haardt Yellow Substance sensor serial number

155 Fluorometer Dr. Haardt Yellow Substance sensor calibration date

156 Fluorometer Dr. Haardt Yellow Substance A0, A1, B0, B1, which modulo bit, gain range switching

157 Fluorometer Chelsea Minitraka serial number

158 Fluorometer Chelsea Minitraka calibration date

159 Fluorometer Chelsea Minitraka vacetone, vacetone100, offset

160 Seapoint fluorometer serial number

161 Seapoint fluorometer calibration date

162 Seapoint fluorometer gain, offset

163 Primary Oxygen (SBE 43) serial number

164 Primary Oxygen (SBE 43) calibration date

165 Primary Oxygen (SBE 43) Soc, Tcor, offset

166 Primary Oxygen (SBE 43) Pcor, Tau, Boc

167 Secondary Oxygen (SBE 43) serial number

168 Secondary Oxygen (SBE 43) calibration date

169 Secondary Oxygen (SBE 43) Soc, Tcor, offset

170 Secondary Oxygen (SBE 43) Pcor, Tau, Boc

Manual revision 7.26.8 Appendix II: Configure (.con or .xmlcon) File Format SBE Data Processing

145

171 Secondary sea tech ls6000 OBS/nephelometer sensor serial number

172 Secondary sea tech ls6000 OBS/nephelometer sensor calibration date

173 Secondary sea tech ls6000 OBS/nephelometer gain, slope, offset

174 Secondary Chelsea Transmissometer sensor serial number

175 Secondary Chelsea Transmissometer calibration date

176 Secondary Chelsea Transmissometer M, B, path length

177 Altimeter serial number

178 Altimeter calibration date

179 WET Labs AC3 serial number

180 WET Labs AC3 calibration date

181 Surface PAR serial number

182 Surface PAR calibration date

183 SEACATplus temperature sensor serial number

184 SEACAT

plus

temperature sensor calibration date

185 SEACAT

plus

temperature sensor A0, A1, A2, A3, slope, offset

186 SEACATplus serial sensor, scans to average, mode

187 Pressure (strain gauge with span TC) serial number

188 Pressure (strain gauge with span TC) calibration date

189 Pressure (strain gauge with span TC) ptempA0, ptempA1, ptempA2, pTCA0, pTCA1, PTCA2

190 Pressure (strain gauge with span TC) pTCB0, pTCB1, pTCB2, pA0, pA1, pA2, offset

191 SBE 38 temperature sensor serial number

192 SBE 38 temperature sensor calibration date

193 Turner SCUFA fluorometer serial number

194 Turner SCUFA fluorometer calibration date

195 Turner SCUFA fluorometer scale factor, offset, units, mx, my, b

196 Turner SCUFA OBS serial number

197 Turner SCUFA OBS calibration date

198 Turner SCUFA OBS scale factor, offset

199 WET Labs ECO-AFL fluorometer serial number

200 WET Labs ECO-AFL fluorometer calibration date

201 WET Labs ECO-AFL fluorometer vblank, scale factor

202 Userpoly 0 name

203 Userpoly 1 name

204 Userpoly 2 name

205 Franatech (formerly Capsum) METS serial number

206 Franatech (formerly Capsum) METS calibration date

207 Franatech (formerly Capsum) METS D, A0, A1, B0, B1, B2, T1, T2

208 Secondary PAR sensor serial number

209 Secondary PAR sensor calibration date

210 Secondary PAR sensor cal const, multiplier, M, B, offset

211 Secondary WET Labs WETStar Fluorometer sensor serial number

212 Secondary WET Labs WETStar Fluorometer sensor calibration date

213 Secondary WET Labs WETStar Fluorometer Vblank, scale factor

214 Secondary Seapoint Fluorometer sensor serial number

215 Secondary Seapoint Fluorometer sensor calibration date

216 Secondary Seapoint Fluorometer gain, offset

217 Secondary Turner SCUFA Fluorometer sensor serial number

218 Secondary Turner SCUFA Fluorometer sensor calibration date

219 Secondary Turner SCUFA Fluorometer scale factor, offset, units, mx, my, b

220 WET Labs WETStar CDOM sensor serial number

221 WET Labs WETStar CDOM sensor calibration date

222 WET Labs WETStar CDOM Vblank, scale factor

223 Seapoint Rhodamine Fluorometer sensor serial number

224 Seapoint Rhodamine Fluorometer sensor calibration date

225 Seapoint Rhodamine Fluorometer gain, offset

226 Primary Gas Tension Device sensor serial number

227 Primary Gas Tension Device sensor calibration date

228 Primary Gas Tension Device type

229 Secondary Gas Tension Device sensor serial number

230 Secondary Gas Tension Device sensor calibration date

231 Secondary Gas Tension Device type

232 Sequoia LISST-25A sensor serial number

233 Sequoia LISST-25A sensor calibration date

234 Sequoia LISST-25A Total Volume Conc Const, Sauter Mean Diameter Cal, Clean Water Scattering,

Clean Water Trans

235 SBE 45 output conductivity? Output salinity? Output sound velocity? Use 90402 junction box?

SBE 38 remote temperature?

236 SBE 21 remote temperature type

237 SBE 50 serial number

238 SBE 50 calibration date

239 Secondary Chelsea Aqua 3 fluorometer serial number

240 Secondary Chelsea Aqua 3 fluorometer calibration date

Manual revision 7.26.8 Appendix II: Configure (.con or .xmlcon) File Format SBE Data Processing

146

241 Secondary Chelsea Aqua 3 fluorometer scale factor, slope, offset, vacetone, vb, v1

242 Chelsea UV Aquatracka serial number

243 Chelsea UV Aquatracka calibration date

244 Chelsea UV Aquatracka a, b

245 SBE 49 temperature sensor serial number

246 SBE 49 temperature sensor calibration date.

247 SBE 49 temperature sensor A0, A1, A2, A3, slope, and offset.

248 Secondary Turner SCUFA OBS serial number

249 Secondary Turner SCUFA OBS calibration date

250 Secondary Turner SCUFA OBS scale factor, offset

251 OBS D&A 3+ serial number

252 OBS D&A 3+ calibration date

253 OBS D&A 3+ a0, a1, a2

254 Secondary OBS D&A 3+ serial number

255 Secondary OBS D&A 3+ calibration date

256 Secondary OBS D&A 3+ a0, a1, a2

257 SBE 16, 19, 19plus, 21, 25, or 49 scan time added? NMEA time added? NMEA device connected to

PC?

258 SBE 43 Oxygen sensor: use Sea-Bird equation, Soc2007, A, B, C, E, Voffset, Tau20, D0, D1, D2,

H1, H2, H3

259 Secondary SBE 43 Oxygen sensor: use Sea-Bird equation, Soc2007, A, B, C, E, Voffset, Tau20,

D0, D1, D2, H1, H2, H3

260 File version of SB_ConfigCTD.dll which saved the .con file

261 IFREMER OBS/nephelometer sensor serial number

262 Primary Beckman Oxygen Temperature sensor – calibration date

263 Primary Beckman Oxygen Temperature sensor – serial number

264 Secondary Beckman Oxygen Temperature sensor – calibration date

265 Secondary Beckman Oxygen Temperature sensor – serial number

266 IOW Oxygen Temperature sensor – calibration date

267 IOW Oxygen Temperature sensor – serial number

268 Methane Gas Tension, Franatech (formerly Capsum) METS sensor – calibration date

269 Methane Gas Tension, Franatech (formerly Capsum) METS sensor –serial number

270 Secondary WET Labs ECO-AFL fluorometer serial number

271 Secondary WET Labs ECO-AFL fluorometer calibration date

272 Secondary WET Labs ECO-AFL fluorometer vblank, scale factor

273 Secondary OBS/Nephelometer D&A Backscatterance sensor serial number

274 Secondary OBS/Nephelometer D&A Backscatterance gain, offset

275 Secondary OBS/Nephelometer D&A Backscatterance sensor calibration date

276 Aanderaa Oxygen Optode serial number

277 Aanderaa Oxygen Optode calibration date

278 Aanderaa Oxygen Optode: do salinity correction? do depth correction? internal salinity value

279 Satlantic PAR/Logarithmic serial number

280 Satlantic PAR/Logarithmic calibration date

281 Satlantic PAR/Logarithmic a0, a1, lm

Manual revision 7.26.8 Appendix III: Generating .con or .xmlcon File Reports – ConReport.exe SBE Data Processing

147

Appendix III: Generating .con or .xmlcon

File Reports – ConReport.exe

The configuration file report is an ASCII .txt file that shows all parameters in

the .con or .xmlcon file in an easy-to-read form. The .txt report is for viewing

only, and cannot be used to modify parameters in the configuration file for

processing data. The .txt file is generated by:

 Clicking Report in a Configuration dialog box (see Instrument

Configuration in Section 4: Configuring Instrument (Configure)), or

 Using ConReport.exe.

ConReport.exe is run from the command line or from a DOS prompt, and

accepts wildcards for the file names, so multiple reports can be produced

at one time, and reports can be placed into a specified directory.

ConReport is automatically installed when you install SBE Data Processing

(default location c:\Program Files\Sea-Bird\SBEDataProcessing-Win32).

The format for running ConReport is:

Conreport InputFilename OutputDirectory /S

Parameter Description

InputFilename

InputFilename is .con or .xmlcon

file for which you want to

generate a report. Must include full path and file name.

This parameter supports standard wildcard expansion

with *:

 * matches any set of characters starting at specified

position within file name or extension and continuing

until the end of file name or extension or another

specified character.

OutputDirectory

(optional) Full path to location to store output .txt file(s).

If not specified, defaults to location of input .con or

.xmlcon file(s).

/S (optional) Do not echo messages to screen.

If specifying multiple parameters, insert one or more spaces or tabs

between each parameter in the list.

Example – Generate Reports for All .con Files in Directory, and Save to

Different Directory

The .con files test1.con, test2.con, and test3.con are in c:\leg1, and you want to

generate the .txt reports and save them to c:\CruiseSummary.

At the DOS prompt, starting in the directory where ConReport is located

(default c:\Program Files\Sea-Bird\SBEDataProcessing-Win32), type in the

program name and parameters as shown:

conreport c:\leg1\*.con c:\CruiseSummary

The program responds:

c:\CruiseSummary\test1.txt

c:\CruiseSummary\test2.txt

c:\CruiseSummary\test3.txt

3 reports written to c:\CruiseSummary

Note:

You can also run ConReport from a

Run dialog (select Run in the Windows

Start menu). If you have not modified

your autoexec.bat file to put the

ConReport.exe file in the path

statement, specify the full path of the

.exe file in the Run dialog box.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Appendix IV: Software Problems SBE Data Processing

148

Appendix IV: Software Problems

Considerable effort has been made to test and check this software before its

release. However, because of the wide range of instruments that Sea-Bird

produces (and interfaces with) and the many applications that these

instruments are used in, there may be software problems that have not been

discovered and corrected. If a problem occurs, please contact us via phone

(425-643-9866), email (software@seabird.com), or fax (425-643-9954) with

the following information:

 Instrument serial number

 Version of the software originally shipped with the instrument

 Version of the software you are attempting to run

 Complete description of the problem you are having

If the problem involves the configuration or setup of the software, in most

cases a phone call to Sea-Bird will be sufficient to solve the problem. If you

phone, we would appreciate it if you would be ready to run the software

during the phone conversation.

If the problem involves data processing, you may be asked to send a sample of

the data to Sea-Bird for evaluation.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Appendix V: Derived Parameter Formulas (EOS-80; Practical Salinity) SBE Data Processing

149

Appendix V: Derived Parameter Formulas

(EOS-80; Practical Salinity)

For formulas for the calculation of conductivity, temperature, and pressure, see

the calibration sheets for your instrument.

Formulas for the computation of salinity, density, potential temperature,

specific volume anomaly, and sound velocity were obtained from "Algorithms

for computation of fundamental properties of seawater", by N.P. Fofonoff and

R.C Millard Jr.; Unesco technical papers in marine science #44, 1983.

 Temperature used for calculating derived variables is IPTS-68, except as

noted. Following the recommendation of JPOTS, T68 is assumed to be

1.00024 * T90 (-2 to 35 °C).

 Salinity is PSS-78 (Practical Salinity) (see Application Note 14: 1978

Practical Salinity Scale). By definition, PSS-78 is valid only in the range

of 2 to 42 psu. Sea-Bird uses the PSS-78 algorithm in our software,

without regard to those limitations on the valid range.

Unesco technical papers in marine science 62 "Salinity and density of

seawater: Tables for high salinities (42 to 50)" provides a method for

calculating salinity in the higher range

(http://unesdoc.unesco.org/images/0009/000964/096451mb.pdf).

Equations / descriptions are provided for the following parameters:

 density (density, sigma-theta, sigma-1, sigma-2, sigma-4, sigma-t)

 thermosteric anomaly

 specific volume

 specific volume anomaly

 geopotential anomaly

 dynamic meters

 depth (salt water, fresh water)

 seafloor depth (salt water, fresh water)

 Practical Salinity (psu)

 sound velocity (Chen-Millero, DelGrosso, Wilson)

 average sound velocity

 potential temperature (reference pressure = 0.0 decibars)

 potential temperature anomaly

 plume anomaly

 specific conductivity

 oxygen (if input file contains pressure, temperature, and either

conductivity or salinity, and has not been averaged into pressure or

depth bins) - also requires oxygen signal (for SBE 43), oxygen current and

oxygen temperature (for SBE 13 or 23), or oxygen phase and thermistor

voltage (SBE 63)

 oxygen saturation

 oxygen percent saturation

 nitrogen saturation

 derivative variables (descent rate and acceleration) - if input file has not

been averaged into pressure or depth bins

 corrected irradiance (CPAR)

Notes:

 Algorithms used for calculation of

derived parameters in Data

Conversion, Derive, Sea Plot,

SeaCalc III [EOS-80 (Practical

Salinity) tab], and Seasave are

identical, except as noted in this

section, and are based on EOS-80

equations (Practical Salinity).

 Calculation of Absolute Salinity

and associated parameters

(TEOS-10) is available in

Derive TEOS-10 and SeaCalc III

[TEOS-10 (Absolute Salinity) tab].

Once they are calculated in Derive

TEOS-10, they can be plotted in Sea

Plot. See Section 6: Data Processing

Modules and Section 9:

Miscellaneous Module – SeaCalc III.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Appendix V: Derived Parameter Formulas (EOS-80; Practical Salinity) SBE Data Processing

150

density =  =  (s, t, p) [kg/m3]

(density of seawater with salinity s, temperature t, and pressure p, based on the

equation of state for seawater (EOS80))

Sigma-theta =   =  (s, (s, t, p, 0), 0) - 1000 [kg/m 3]

Sigma-1 =  1 =  (s, (s, t, p, 1000), 1000) - 1000 [kg/m 3]

Sigma-2 =  2 =  (s, (s, t, p, 2000), 2000) - 1000 [kg/m 3]

Sigma-4 =  4 =  (s, (s, t, p, 4000), 4000) - 1000 [kg/m 3]

Sigma-t =  t =  (s, t, 0) - 1000 [kg/m 3]

thermosteric anomaly = 10 5 ((1000/(1000 +  t)) - 0.97266) [10 -8 m 3/kg]

specific volume = V(s, t, p) = 1/ [m 3/kg]

specific volume anomaly =  = 10 8 (V(s, t, p) - V(35, 0, p)) [10 -8 m 3/kg]

p=p

geopotential anomaly = 10-4  ( x p) [J/kg] = [m 2/s 2 ]

p, p=0

dynamic meters = geopotential anomaly / 10.0

(1 dynamic meter = 10 J/kg;

(Sverdup, Johnson, Flemming (1946), UNESCO (1991)))

Density calculation:

Using the following constants -

B0 = 8.24493e-1, B1 = -4.0899e-3, B2 = 7.6438e-5, B3 = -8.2467e-7, B4 = 5.3875e-9,

C0 = -5.72466e-3, C1 = 1.0227e-4, C2 = -1.6546e-6, D0 = 4.8314e-4, A0 = 999.842594,

A1 = 6.793952e-2, A2 = -9.095290e-3, A3 = 1.001685e-4, A4 = -1.120083e-6, A5 = 6.536332e-9,

FQ0 = 54.6746, FQ1 = -0.603459, FQ2 = 1.09987e-2, FQ3 = -6.1670e-5, G0 = 7.944e-2, G1 = 1.6483e-2,

G2 = -5.3009e-4, i0 = 2.2838e-3, i1 = -1.0981e-5, i2 = -1.6078e-6, J0 =1.91075e-4, M0 = -9.9348e-7,

M1 = 2.0816e-8, M2 = 9.1697e-10, E0 = 19652.21, E1 = 148.4206, E2 = -2.327105, E3 = 1.360477e-2,

E4 = -5.155288e-5, H0 = 3.239908, H1 = 1.43713e-3, H2 = 1.16092e-4, H3 = -5.77905e-7,

K0 = 8.50935e-5, K1 =-6.12293e-6, K2 = 5.2787e-8

C Computer Code -

double Density(double s, double t, double p)

// s = salinity PSU, t = temperature deg C ITPS-68, p = pressure in decibars

{

double t2, t3, t4, t5, s32;

double sigma, k, kw, aw, bw;

double val;

t2 = t*t;

t3 = t*t2;

t4 = t*t3;

t5 = t*t4;

if (s <= 0.0) s = 0.000001;

s32 = pow(s, 1.5);

p /= 10.0; /* convert decibars to bars */

sigma = A0 + A1*t + A2*t2 + A3*t3 + A4*t4 + A5*t5 + (B0 + B1*t + B2*t2 + B3*t3 + B4*t4)*s +

(C0 + C1*t + C2*t2)*s32 + D0*s*s;

kw = E0 + E1*t + E2*t2 + E3*t3 + E4*t4;

aw = H0 + H1*t + H2*t2 + H3*t3;

bw = K0 + K1*t + K2*t2;

k = kw + (FQ0 + FQ1*t + FQ2*t2 + FQ3*t3)*s + (G0 + G1*t + G2*t2)*s32 + (aw + (i0 + i1*t +

i2*t2)*s + (J0*s32))*p + (bw + (M0 + M1*t + M2*t2)*s)*p*p;

val = 1 - p / k;

if (val) sigma = sigma / val - 1000.0;

return sigma;

}

Manual revision 7.26.8 Appendix V: Derived Parameter Formulas (EOS-80; Practical Salinity) SBE Data Processing

151

depth = [m]

(When you select salt water depth as a derived variable, SBE Data Processing

prompts you to input the latitude, which is needed to calculate local gravity. It

uses the user-input value, unless latitude is written in the input data file header

[from a NMEA navigation device]. If latitude is in the input file header, SBE

Data Processing uses the header value, and ignores the user-input latitude.).

seafloor depth = depth + altimeter reading [m]

Depth calculation:

C Computer Code –

// Depth

double Depth(int dtype, double p, double latitude)

// dtype = fresh water or salt water, p = pressure in decibars, latitude in degrees

{

double x, d, gr;

if (dtype == FRESH_WATER) /* fresh water */

d = p * 1.019716;

else { /* salt water */

x = sin(latitude / 57.29578);

x = x * x;

gr = 9.780318 * (1.0 + (5.2788e-3 + 2.36e-5 * x) * x) + 1.092e-6 * p;

d = (((-1.82e-15 * p + 2.279e-10) * p - 2.2512e-5) * p + 9.72659) * p;

if (gr) d /= gr;

}

return(d);

}

Note:

You can also enter the latitude on the

Miscellaneous tab in Data Conversion

or Derive, as applicable.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Appendix V: Derived Parameter Formulas (EOS-80; Practical Salinity) SBE Data Processing

152

Practical Salinity = [PSU]

(Salinity is PSS-78, valid from 2 to 42 psu.)

Practical Salinity calculation:

Using the following constants -

A1 = 2.070e-5, A2 = -6.370e-10, A3 = 3.989e-15, B1 = 3.426e-2, B2 = 4.464e-4, B3 = 4.215e-1,

B4 = -3.107e-3, C0 = 6.766097e-1, C1 = 2.00564e-2, C2 = 1.104259e-4, C3 = -6.9698e-7,

C4 = 1.0031e-9

C Computer Code –

static double a[6] = { /* constants for salinity calculation */

0.0080, -0.1692, 25.3851, 14.0941, -7.0261, 2.7081

};

static double b[6]={ /* constants for salinity calculation */

0.0005, -0.0056, -0.0066, -0.0375, 0.0636, -0.0144

};

double Salinity(double C, double T, double P) /* compute salinity */

// C = conductivity S/m, T = temperature deg C ITPS-68, P = pressure in decibars

{

double R, RT, RP, temp, sum1, sum2, result, val;

int i;

if (C <= 0.0)

result = 0.0;

else {

C *= 10.0; /* convert Siemens/meter to mmhos/cm */

R = C / 42.914;

val = 1 + B1 * T + B2 * T * T + B3 * R + B4 * R * T;

if (val) RP = 1 + (P * (A1 + P * (A2 + P * A3))) / val;

val = RP * (C0 + (T * (C1 + T * (C2 + T * (C3 + T * C4)))));

if (val) RT = R / val;

if (RT <= 0.0) RT = 0.000001;

sum1 = sum2 = 0.0;

for (i = 0;i < 6;i++) {

temp = pow(RT, (double)i/2.0);

sum1 += a[i] * temp;

sum2 += b[i] * temp;

}

val = 1.0 + 0.0162 * (T - 15.0);

if (val)

result = sum1 + sum2 * (T - 15.0) / val;

else

result = -99.;

}

return result;

}

Note:

Absolute Salinity (TEOS-10) is

available in our seawater calculator,

Sea Calc III. See Section 9:

Miscellaneous Module – SeaCalc III.

All other SBE Data Processing

modules output only Practical

Salinity, and all parameters derived

from salinity in those modules

(density, sound velocity, etc) are

based on Practical Salinity.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Appendix V: Derived Parameter Formulas (EOS-80; Practical Salinity) SBE Data Processing

153

sound velocity = [m/sec]

(sound velocity can be calculated as Chen-Millero, DelGrosso, or Wilson)

Sound velocity calculation:

C Computer Code –

// Sound Velocity Chen and Millero

double SndVelC(double s, double t, double p0) /* sound velocity Chen and Millero 1977 */

/* JASA,62,1129-1135 */

// s = salinity, t = temperature deg C ITPS-68, p = pressure in decibars

{

double a, a0, a1, a2, a3;

double b, b0, b1;

double c, c0, c1, c2, c3;

double p, sr, d, sv;

p = p0 / 10.0; /* scale pressure to bars */

if (s < 0.0) s = 0.0;

sr = sqrt(s);

d = 1.727e-3 - 7.9836e-6 * p;

b1 = 7.3637e-5 + 1.7945e-7 * t;

b0 = -1.922e-2 - 4.42e-5 * t;

b = b0 + b1 * p;

a3 = (-3.389e-13 * t + 6.649e-12) * t + 1.100e-10;

a2 = ((7.988e-12 * t - 1.6002e-10) * t + 9.1041e-9) * t - 3.9064e-7;

a1 = (((-2.0122e-10 * t + 1.0507e-8) * t - 6.4885e-8) * t - 1.2580e-5) * t + 9.4742e-5;

a0 = (((-3.21e-8 * t + 2.006e-6) * t + 7.164e-5) * t -1.262e-2) * t + 1.389;

a = ((a3 * p + a2) * p + a1) * p + a0;

c3 = (-2.3643e-12 * t + 3.8504e-10) * t - 9.7729e-9;

c2 = (((1.0405e-12 * t -2.5335e-10) * t + 2.5974e-8) * t - 1.7107e-6) * t + 3.1260e-5;

c1 = (((-6.1185e-10 * t + 1.3621e-7) * t - 8.1788e-6) * t + 6.8982e-4) * t + 0.153563;

c0 = ((((3.1464e-9 * t - 1.47800e-6) * t + 3.3420e-4) * t - 5.80852e-2) * t + 5.03711) * t +

1402.388;

c = ((c3 * p + c2) * p + c1) * p + c0;

sv = c + (a + b * sr + d * s) * s;

return sv;

}

// Sound Velocity Delgrosso

double SndVelD(double s, double t, double p) /* Delgrosso JASA, Oct. 1974, Vol 56, No 4 */

// s = salinity, t = temperature deg C ITPS-68, p = pressure in decibars

{

double c000, dct, dcs, dcp, dcstp, sv;

c000 = 1402.392;

p = p / 9.80665; /* convert pressure from decibars to KG / CM**2 */

dct = (0.501109398873e1 - (0.550946843172e-1 - 0.22153596924e-3 * t) * t) * t;

dcs = (0.132952290781e1 + 0.128955756844e-3 * s) * s;

dcp = (0.156059257041e0 + (0.244998688441e-4 - 0.83392332513e-8 * p) * p) * p;

dcstp = -0.127562783426e-1 * t * s + 0.635191613389e-2 * t * p + 0.265484716608e-7 * t * t *

p * p - 0.159349479045e-5 * t * p * p + 0.522116437235e-9 * t * p * p * p - 0.438031096213e-6 * t *

t * t * p - 0.161674495909e-8 * s * s * p * p + 0.968403156410e-4 * t * t * s + 0.485639620015e-5 *

t * s * s * p - 0.340597039004e-3 * t * s * p;

sv = c000 + dct + dcs + dcp + dcstp;

return sv;

}

// sound velocity Wilson

double SndVelW(double s, double t, double p) /* wilson JASA, 1960, 32, 1357 */

// s = salinity, t = temperature deg C ITPS-68, p = pressure in decibars

{

double pr, sd, a, v0, v1, sv;

pr = 0.1019716 * (p + 10.1325);

sd = s - 35.0;

a = (((7.9851e-6 * t - 2.6045e-4) * t - 4.4532e-2) * t + 4.5721) * t + 1449.14;

sv = (7.7711e-7 * t - 1.1244e-2) * t + 1.39799;

v0 = (1.69202e-3 * sd + sv) * sd + a;

a = ((4.5283e-8 * t + 7.4812e-6) * t - 1.8607e-4) * t + 0.16072;

sv = (1.579e-9 * t + 3.158e-8) * t + 7.7016e-5;

v1 = sv * sd + a;

a = (1.8563e-9 * t - 2.5294e-7) * t + 1.0268e-5;

sv = -1.2943e-7 * sd + a;

a = -1.9646e-10 * t + 3.5216e-9;

sv = (((-3.3603e-12 * pr + a) * pr + sv) * pr + v1) * pr + v0;

return sv;

}

Manual revision 7.26.8 Appendix V: Derived Parameter Formulas (EOS-80; Practical Salinity) SBE Data Processing

154

average sound velocity = [m/s]

Average sound velocity is the harmonic mean (average) from the surface to

the current CTD depth, and is calculated on the downcast only. The first

window begins when pressure is greater than a minimum specified pressure

and salinity is greater than a minimum specified salinity. Depth is calculated

from pressure based on user-input latitude (regardless of whether latitude data

from a NMEA navigation device is in the data file).

 In Derive, the algorithm is based on the assumption that the data has been

bin averaged already. Average sound velocity is computed scan-by-scan:

d i = depth of current scan – depth of previous scan [meters]

v i = sound velocity of this scan (bin) [m/sec]

 In Seasave and Data Conversion, the algorithm also requires user input of a

pressure window size and time window size. It then calculates:

d i = depth at end of window – depth at start of window [m]

v i =

(sound velocity at start of window + sound velocity at end of window) / 2 [m/sec]

When you select average sound velocity as a derived variable, SBE Data

Processing prompts you to enter the minimum pressure, minimum salinity, and

if applicable, pressure window size and time window size.

Surface

> Minimum specified pressure and salinity

d i and v i

Average

sound velocity

Average

sound velocity

d i and v i

 d i

p,p=min

p=p

 d i / v i

p,p=min

p=p

Note:

You can also enter the user-input

parameters on the Miscellaneous

tab in Data Conversion or Derive,

as applicable.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Appendix V: Derived Parameter Formulas (EOS-80; Practical Salinity) SBE Data Processing

155

potential temperature [IPTS-68] =  (s, t, p, pr) [



(Potential temperature is the temperature an element of seawater would have if

raised adiabatically with no change in salinity to reference pressure pr.

Sea-Bird software uses a reference pressure of 0 decibars).

potential temperature [ITS-90] =  (s, t, p, pr) / 1.00024 [



potential temperature anomaly =

potential temperature - a0 - a1 x salinity

potential temperature - a0 - a1 x Sigma-theta

(When you select potential temperature anomaly as a derived variable,

SBE Data Processing prompts you to enter a0, a1, and the selection of salinity

or sigma-theta.)

Potential Temperature [IPTS-68] calculation:

C Computer Code -

// ATG (used in potential temperature calculation)

double ATG(double s, double t, double p) /* adiabatic temperature gradient deg C per decibar */

/* ref broyden,h. Deep-Sea Res.,20,401-408 */

// s = salinity, t = temperature deg C ITPS-68, p = pressure in decibars

{

double ds;

ds = s - 35.0;

return((((-2.1687e-16 * t + 1.8676e-14) * t - 4.6206e-13) * p + ((2.7759e-12 * t - 1.1351e-

10) * ds + ((-5.4481e-14 * t + 8.733e-12) * t - 6.7795e-10) * t + 1.8741e-8)) * p + (-4.2393e-8 * t

+ 1.8932e-6) * ds + ((6.6228e-10 * t - 6.836e-8) * t + 8.5258e-6) * t + 3.5803e-5);

}

// potential temperature

double PoTemp(double s, double t0, double p0, double pr) /* local potential temperature at pr */

/* using atg procedure for adiabadic lapse rate */

/* Fofonoff,N.,Deep-Sea Res.,24,489-491 */

// s = salinity, t0 = local temperature deg C ITPS-68, p0 = local pressure in decibars, pr =

reference pressure in decibars

{

double p, t, h, xk, q, temp;

p = p0;

t = t0;

h = pr - p;

xk = h * ATG(s,t,p);

t += 0.5 * xk;

q = xk;

p += 0.5 * h;

xk = h * ATG(s,t,p);

t += 0.29289322 * (xk-q);

q = 0.58578644 * xk + 0.121320344 * q;

xk = h * ATG(s,t,p);

t += 1.707106781 * (xk-q);

q = 3.414213562 * xk - 4.121320344 * q;

p += 0.5 * h;

xk = h * ATG(s,t,p);

temp = t + (xk - 2.0 * q) / 6.0;

return(temp);

}

Note:

You can also enter the user-input

parameters on the Miscellaneous tab

in Data Conversion or Derive, as

applicable.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Appendix V: Derived Parameter Formulas (EOS-80; Practical Salinity) SBE Data Processing

156

plume anomaly =

potential temperature (s, t, p, Reference Pressure) – Theta-B

– Theta-Z / Salinity-Z * (salinity – Salinity-B)

(When you select plume anomaly as a derived variable, SBE Data Processing

prompts you to enter Theta-B, Salinity-B, Theta-Z / Salinity-Z, and

Reference Pressure.)

The plume anomaly equation is based on work in hydrothermal vent plumes.

The algorithm used for identifying hydrothermal vent plumes uses potential

temperature, gradient conditions in the region, vent salinity, and ambient

seawater conditions adjacent to the vent. This function is specific to

hydrothermal vent plumes, and more specifically, temperature and potential

density anomalies. It is not a generic function for plume tracking (for example,

not for wastewater plumes). One anomaly for one region and application does

not necessarily apply to another type of anomaly in another region for a

different application. The terms are specific to corrections for hydrothermal

vent salinity and local hydrographic features near vents. They are likely not

relevant to other applications in this exact form.

If looking at wastewater plumes, you need to derive your own anomaly

function that is specific to what it is you are looking for and that is defined to

differentiate between surrounding waters and the wastewater plume waters.

specific conductivity = (C * 10,000) / (1 + A * [T – 25]) [microS/cm]

(C = conductivity (S/m), T = temperature ( C),

A = thermal coefficient of conductivity for a natural salt solution

[0.019 - 0.020]; Sea-Bird software uses 0.020.)

Notes:

 You can also enter the user-input

parameters on the Miscellaneous

tab in Data Conversion; plume

anomaly is not available as a

derived variable in Derive.

 Reference: Baker, E.T., Feely, R.A.,

Mottl, M.J., Sansone, F. T., Wheat,

C.G., Resing, J.A., Lupton, J.E.,

"Hydrothermal plumes along the

East Pacific Rise, 8° 40′ to 11° 50′

N: Plume distribution and

relationship to the apparent

magmatic budget", Earth and

Planetary Science Letters 128

(1994) 1-17.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Appendix V: Derived Parameter Formulas (EOS-80; Practical Salinity) SBE Data Processing

157

Oxygen [ml/l] is calculated as described in Application Note 64: SBE 43

Dissolved Oxygen Sensor or Application Note 13-1: SBE 13, 23, 30 Dissolved

Oxygen Sensor Calibration & Deployment.

When you select oxygen as a derived variable, Data Conversion prompts you

to enter the window size (seconds), and asks if you want to apply the Tau

correction and the hysteresis correction:

 Tau correction – The Tau correction ([tau(T,P)*V/t] in SBE 43 or

[tau*doc/dt] in SBE 13 or 23) improves response of the measured signal

in regions of large oxygen gradients. However, this term also amplifies

residual noise in the signal (especially in deep water); in some situations

this negative consequence overshadows gains in signal responsiveness.

If the Tau correction is enabled, oxygen computed by Seasave and Data

Conversion is somewhat different from values computed by Derive. Both

algorithms compute the derivative of the oxygen signal with respect to

time (with a user-input window size for calculating the derivative), using a

linear regression to determine the slope. Seasave and Data Conversion

compute the derivative looking backward in time, since they share

common code and Seasave cannot use future values of oxygen while

acquiring data in real time. Derive uses a centered window (equal number

of points before and after the scan) to obtain a better estimate of the

derivative. Use Seasave and Data Conversion to obtain a quick look at

oxygen values; use Derive to obtain the most accurate values.

 Hysteresis correction (SBE 43 only, when using Sea-Bird equation) -

Under extreme pressure, changes can occur in gas permeable Teflon

membranes that affect their permeability characteristics. Some of these

changes (plasticization and amorphous/crystalinity ratios) have long time

constants and depend on the sensor’s time-pressure history. These slow

processes result in hysteresis in long, deep casts. The hysteresis correction

algorithm (using H1, H2, and H3 coefficients entered for the SBE 43 in

the .con or .xmlcon file) operates through the entire data profile and

corrects the oxygen voltage values for changes in membrane permeability

as pressure varies. At each measurement, the correction to the membrane

permeability is calculated based on the current pressure and how long the

sensor spent at previous pressures.

Hysteresis responses of membranes on individual SBE 43 sensors are very

similar, and in most cases the default hysteresis parameters provide the

accuracy specification of 2% of true value. For users requiring higher

accuracy (±1 µmol/kg), the parameters can be fine-tuned, if a complete

profile (descent and ascent) made preferably to greater than 3000 meters

is available. H1, the effect’s amplitude, has a default of -0.033, but can

range from -0.02 to -0.05 between sensors. H2, the effect’s non-linear

component, has a default of 5000, and is a second-order parameter that

does not require tuning between sensors. H3, the effect’s time constant,

has a default of 1450 seconds, but can range from 1200 to 2000.

Hysteresis can be eliminated by alternately adjusting H1 and H3 in the

.con or .xmlcon file during analysis of the complete profile. Once

established, these parameters should be stable, and can be used without

adjustment on other casts with the same SBE 43.

When you select oxygen as a derived variable, Derive prompts you to enter

the window size (seconds), and asks if you want to apply the Tau correction

(described above for Data Conversion). You cannot apply the hysteresis

correction in Derive, to prevent users from applying the correction to oxygen

voltage in Data Conversion and then applying it again in Derive, providing

erroneous results.

oxygen [



moles/kg] = oxygen [ml/l]

Sigma

-theta + 1000

44660

Note:

You can also enter the oxygen

window size, and enable / disable the

Tau and hysteresis corrections, on the

Miscellaneous tab in Data Conversion

or Derive, as applicable.

Note:

The hysteresis correction can be

performed to calculate and output

oxygen voltage and/or calculated

oxygen (ml/l, etc.) in Data Conversion.

Hysteresis-corrected voltage from

Data Conversion can be further

processed in other modules (such as

Align CTD) before calculating oxygen

values (ml/l, etc.) in Derive.

Note:

Oxygen [ml/l] for the SBE 63 Optical

Dissolved Oxygen Sensor is calculated

as described in its manual. Tau and

hysteresis corrections are not

applicable to the SBE 63.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Appendix V: Derived Parameter Formulas (EOS-80; Practical Salinity) SBE Data Processing

158

Oxygen saturation is the theoretical saturation limit of the water at the

local temperature and salinity value, but with local pressure reset to zero

(1 atmosphere). This calculation represents what the local parcel of water

could have absorbed from the atmosphere when it was last at the surface (p=0)

but at the same (T,S) value. Oxygen saturation can be calculated as Garcia and

Gordon, or Weiss –

Garcia and Gordon:

Oxsol(T,S) = exp {A0 + A1(Ts) + A2(Ts) 2 + A3(Ts) 3 + A4(Ts) 4 + A5(Ts) 5

+ S * [B0 + B1(Ts) + B2(Ts) 2 + B3(Ts) 3] + C0(S) 2}

where

 Oxsol(T,S) = oxygen saturation value (ml/l)

 S = salinity (psu)

 T = water temperature (ITS-90, oC)

 Ts = ln [(298.15 – T) / (273.15 + T)]

 A0 = 2.00907 A1 = 3.22014 A2 = 4.0501

A3 = 4.94457 A4 = - 0.256847 A5 = 3.88767

 B0 = -0.00624523 B1 = -0.00737614

B2 = -0.010341 B3 = -0.00817083

 C0 = -0.000000488682

Weiss:

Oxsat(T,S) = exp {[A1 + A2 * (100/Ta) + A3 * ln(Ta/100) + A4 * ( Ta/100)]

+ S * [B1 + B2 * (Ta/100) + B3 * (Ta/100)2 ]}

where

 Oxsat(T,S) = oxygen saturation value (ml/l)

 S = salinity (psu)

 T = water temperature (IPTS-68, oC)

 Ta = absolute water temperature (T + 273.15)

 A1 = -173.4292 A2 = 249.6339 A3 = 143.3483 A4 = -21.8492

 B1 = -0.033096 B2 = 0.014259 B3 = -0.00170

Oxygen, percent saturation is the ratio of calculated oxygen to oxygen

saturation, in percent:

(Oxygen / Oxygen saturation) * 100%.

The Oxygen Saturation value used in this calculation is the value that was used

in the Oxygen calculation –

 SBE 43 -if you selected the Sea-Bird equation in the .con or .xmlcon file,

the software uses the Garcia and Gordon Oxsol in this ratio; if you

selected the Owens-Millard equation in the .con or .xmlcon file, the

software uses the Weiss Oxsat in this ratio.

 SBE 13, 23, or 30 – the software uses the Weiss Oxsat for this ratio.

Nitrogen saturation is the theoretical saturation limit of the water at the

local temperature and salinity value, but with local pressure reset to zero

(1 atmosphere). This calculation represents what the local parcel of water could

have absorbed from the atmosphere when it was last at the surface (p=0) but at

the same (T,S) value.

N2sat(T,S) = exp {[A1 + A2 * (100/Ta) + A3 * ln(Ta/100) + A4 * (Ta/100) ]

+ S * [B1 + B2 * (Ta/100) + B3 * (Ta/100) 2 ]}

where

 N2Sat(T,S) = nitrogen saturation value (ml/l)

 S = salinity (psu)

 T = water temperature (oC)

 Ta = absolute water temperature (oC + 273.15)

 A1 = -172.4965 A2 = 248.4262 A3 = 143.0738 A4 = -21.7120

 B1 = -0.049781 B2 = 0.025018 B3 = -0.0034861

Notes:

 The oxygen saturation equation

based on work from Garcia and

Gordon (1992) reduces error in the

Weiss (1970) parameterization at

cold temperatures.

 As implemented in Sea-Bird

software, the Garcia and Gordon

equation is valid for -5 < T < 50 and

0 < S < 60. Outside of those ranges,

the software returns a value of -99

for Oxsol.

 As implemented in Sea-Bird

software, the Weiss equation is

valid for -2 < T < 40 and 0 < S < 42.

Outside of those ranges, the

software returns a value of -99 for

Oxsat.

Note:

The nitrogen saturation equation is

based on work from Weiss (1970).

Manual revision 7.26.8 Appendix V: Derived Parameter Formulas (EOS-80; Practical Salinity) SBE Data Processing

159

Descent rate and acceleration are computed by calculating the derivative of

the pressure signal with respect to time (with a user-input window size for

calculating the derivative), using a linear regression to determine the slope.

Values computed by Seasave and Data Conversion are somewhat different

from values computed by Derive. Seasave and Data Conversion compute the

derivative looking backward in time (with a user-input window size), since

they share common code and Seasave cannot use future values of pressure

while acquiring data in real time. Derive uses a centered window (equal

number of points before and after the scan; user-input window size) to obtain a

better estimate of the derivative. Use Seasave and Data Conversion to obtain a

quick look at descent rate and acceleration; use Derive to obtain the most

accurate values.

(When you select descent rate or acceleration as a derived variable, SBE Data

Processing prompts you to enter the window size (seconds).)

Corrected Irradiance [CPAR] =

100 * ratio multiplier * underwater PAR / surface PAR [%]

(Ratio multiplier = scaling factor used for comparing light fields of disparate

intensity, input in .con or .xmlcon file entry for surface PAR sensor;

Underwater PAR = underwater PAR data;

Surface PAR = surface PAR data)

Note:

You can also enter the descent rate

and acceleration window size on the

Miscellaneous tab in Data Conversion

or Derive, as applicable.

Note:

See Application Note 11S (SBE 11plus

Deck Unit with Biospherical surface

PAR sensor), 47 (SBE 33 or 36 Deck

Unit with Biospherical surface PAR

sensor), or 96 (SBE 11plus, 33, or 36

Deck Unit with Satlantic surface PAR

sensor for description of ratio

multiplier.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Appendix VI: Output Variable Names SBE Data Processing

160

Appendix VI: Output Variable Names

This appendix provides a list of output variable names. The names vary,

depending on whether you are viewing header information in a data file or

viewing real-time data in Seasave.

 Headers generated by modules in SBE Data Processing show

‘Short name: Full name’ in header.

Example:

# name 0 = prdM: Pressure, Strain Gauge [db]

(# name 0 indicates that this is the header for the first data column;

prdM is the Short name used in the software coding;

Pressure, Strain Gauge [db] is the more descriptive Full name)

 Seasave’s scrolled display shows a ‘Friendly name’ in heading.

Example:

pr M

(this is the Friendly name for Pressure, Strain Gauge [db];

pr indicates pressure and M indicates metric units)

 Seasave’s fixed display and plot display show 'Full name’.

Example:

Pressure, Strain Gauge [db]

(this is the Full name)

For CTDs that support redundant sensors: Unless noted otherwise, derived

variables are calculated only from primary sensor(s).

Example:

Sound Velocity [Chen-Millero, m/s] can be calculated from both primary and

secondary temperature and conductivity sensors on an SBE 9plus (which

supports secondary temperature and conductivity sensors), as indicated

by the presence of both Sound Velocity [Chen-Millero, m/s] and

Sound Velocity,2 [Chen-Millero, m/s] in the table.

However, Average Sound Velocity [Chen-Millero, m/s] can only be calculated

from the primary temperature and conductivity sensors (there is no entry for

this variable with a 2).

For some parameters, there are multiple entries in the table with the same

meaning for the user (but different meanings for the software).

Example:

Short names of c_S/m, cond0S/m, and c0S/m all have long names of

Conductivity [S/m]; these parameters all provide conductivity in S/m.

However, the short names are different because of differences in the

conductivity equation used by the software in the calculation (equation varies,

depending on the CTD).

All variable selections can be made in Seasave and in SBE Data Processing’s

Derive module, except as noted.

The list is in two parts:

 Practical Salinity and related thermodynamic parameters (EOS-80), and

auxiliary sensor data

 Absolute Salinity and related thermodynamic parameters (calculated in

and output by SBE Data Processing’s Derive TEOS-10 module)

Note:

The Notes/Comments column in the

table below indicates 1st sensor, 2nd

sensor, etc. For parameters calculated

from multiple sensors (for example,

salinity is a function of temperature,

conductivity, and pressure), 1st refers

to the 1st sensor T-C pair, 2nd refers to

the secondary T-C pair.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Appendix VI: Output Variable Names SBE Data Processing

161

Practical Salinity and related Thermodynamic Parameters (EOS-80),

and Auxiliary Sensor Data

Short Name Full Name Friendly Name Units Notes/Comments

accM Acceleration [m/s^2] acc M m/s^2

accF Acceleration [ft/s^2] acc F ft/s^2

altM Altimeter [m] alt M m

altF Altimeter [ft] alt F ft

avgsvCM Average Sound Velocity [Chen-Millero,

m/s]

avgsv-C M Chen-Millero,

m/s

avgsvCF Average Sound Velocity [Chen-Millero, ft/s]

avgsv-C F Chen-Millero,

ft/s

avgsvDM Average Sound Velocity [Delgrosso, m/s] avgsv-D M Delgrosso, m/s

avgsvDF Average Sound Velocity [Delgrosso, ft/s] avgsv-D F Delgrosso, ft/s

avgsvWM Average Sound Velocity [Wilson, m/s] avgsv-W M Wilson, m/s

avgsvWF Average Sound Velocity [Wilson, ft/s] avgsv-W F Wilson, ft/s

bat Beam Attenuation, Chelsea/Seatech [1/m] bat 1/m 1st sensor

bat1 Beam Attenuation, Chelsea/Seatech, 2 [1/m]

bat2 1/m 2nd sensor

batdiff Beam Attenuation, Chelsea/Seatech/WET

Labs CStar, Diff, 2 - 1 [1/m]

batdiff 1/m 2nd sensor - 1st sensor

wetBAttn Beam Attenuation, WET Labs AC3 [1/m] wetBAttn 1/m

CStarAt0 Beam Attenuation, WET Labs C-Star [1/m] CStarAt 1/m 1st sensor

CStarAt1 Beam Attenuation, WET Labs C-Star, 2

[1/m]

CStarAt2 1/m 2nd sensor

CStarAt2 Beam Attenuation, WET Labs C-Star, 3

[1/m]

CStarAt3 1/m 3rd sensor

CStarAt3 Beam Attenuation, WET Labs C-Star, 4

[1/m]

CStarAt4 1/m 4th sensor

CStarAt4 Beam Attenuation, WET Labs C-Star, 5

[1/m]

CStarAt5 1/m 5th sensor

CStarAt5 Beam Attenuation, WET Labs C-Star, 6

[1/m]

CStarAt6 1/m 6th sensor

CStarAtDiff Beam Attenuation, WET Labs C-Star, Diff,

2 - 1 [1/m]

CStarAtDiff 1/m 2nd sensor - 1st sensor

xmiss Beam Transmission, Chelsea/Seatech [%] xmiss % 1st sensor

xmiss1 Beam Transmission, Chelsea/Seatech, 2 [%]

xmiss2 % 2nd sensor

xmissdiff Beam Transmission, Chelsea/Seatech/WET

Labs CStar, Diff, 2 - 1 [%]

xmissdiff % 2nd sensor - 1st sensor

wetBTrans Beam Transmission, WET Labs AC3 [%] wetBTrans %

CStarTr0 Beam Transmission, WET Labs C-Star [%] CStarTr % 1st sensor

CStarTr1 Beam Transmission, WET Labs C-Star, 2

[%]

CStarTr2 % 2nd sensor

CStarTr2 Beam Transmission, WET Labs C-Star, 3

[%]

CStarTr3 % 3rd sensor

CStarTr3 Beam Transmission, WET Labs C-Star, 4

[%]

CStarTr4 % 4th sensor

CStarTr4 Beam Transmission, WET Labs C-Star, 5

[%]

CStarTr5 % 5th sensor

CStarTr5 Beam Transmission, WET Labs C-Star, 6

[%]

CStarTr6 % 6th sensor

CStarTrdiff Beam Transmission, WET Labs C-

Star, Diff,

2 - 1 [%]

CStarTrdiff % 2nd sensor - 1st sensor

bpos Bottle Position in Carousel bpos

HBBotCls Bottles Closed, HB HBBotCls

nbf Bottles Fired nbf

bct Bottom Contact bct

N Buoyancy [cycles/hour] N cycles/hour Calculated in SBE Data

Processing's Buoyancy

module

N^2 Buoyancy [rad^2/s^2] N^2 rad^2/s^2 Calculated in SBE Data

Processing's Buoyancy

module

nbytes Byte Count nbytes

Manual revision 7.26.8 Appendix VI: Output Variable Names SBE Data Processing

162

Short Name Full Name Friendly Name Units Notes/Comments

cdomflTC0 CDOM, Turner Cyclops [ppb QS] cdomflTC ppb QS 1

sensor

cdomflTC1 CDOM, Turner Cyclops, 2 [ppb QS] cdomflTC2 ppb QS 2nd sensor

cdomflTCdiff CDOM, Turner Cyclops, Diff, 2 - 1 [ppb

QS]

cdomflTCdiff ppb QS 2nd sensor - 1st sensor

chloroflTC0 Chlorophyll, Turner Cyclops [ug/l] chloroflTC ug/l 1

sensor

chloroflTC1 Chlorophyll, Turner Cyclops, 2 [ug/l] chloroflTC2 ug/l 2nd sensor

chloroflTCdiff Chlorophyll, Turner Cyclops, Diff, 2 - 1

[ug/l]

chloroflTCdiff ug/l 2nd sensor - 1st sensor

c_S/m,

cond0S/m, or

cond0S/m

Conductivity [S/m] c S/m S/m 1

sensor

c_mS/cm,

cond0mS/cm,

or c0mS/cm

Conductivity [mS/cm] c mS/cm mS/cm 1

sensor

c_uS/cm,

cond0uS/cm,

or cond0uS/cm

Conductivity [uS/cm] c uS/cm uS/cm 1

sensor

c1S/m Conductivity, 2 [S/m] c2 S/m S/m 2nd sensor

c1mS/cm Conductivity, 2 [mS/cm] c2 mS/cm mS/cm 2nd sensor

c1uS/cm Conductivity, 2 [uS/cm] c2 uS/cm uS/cm 2nd sensor

C2-C1S/m Conductivity Difference, 2 - 1 [S/m] c2-c1 S/m S/m 2nd sensor - 1st sensor

C2-C1mS/cm Conductivity Difference, 2 - 1 [mS/cm] c2-c1 mS/cm mS/cm 2nd sensor - 1st sensor

C2-C1uS/cm Conductivity Difference, 2 - 1 [uS/cm] c2-c1 uS/cm uS/cm 2nd sensor - 1st sensor

cpar CPAR/Corrected Irradiance [%] cpar %

croilflTC0 Crude Oil, Turner Cyclops [ppb QS] croilflTC ppb QS 1

sensor

croilflTC1 Crude Oil, Turner Cyclops, 2 [ppb QS] croilflTC2 ppb QS 2

sensor

croilflTCdiff Crude Oil, Turner Cyclops, Diff, 2 - 1 [ppb

QS]

croilflTCdiff ppb QS 2nd sensor - 1st sensor

density00 Density [density, kg/m^3] density density, kg/m^3

sensor

sigma-é00 Density [sigma-theta, kg/m^3] sigmath sigma-theta,

kg/m^3

sensor

sigma-t00 Density [sigma-t, kg/m^3 ] sigmat sigma-t, kg/m^3

sensor

sigma-100 Density [sigma-1, kg/m^3 ] sigma1 sigma-1,

kg/m^3

sensor

sigma-200 Density [sigma-2, kg/m^3 ] sigma2 sigma-2,

kg/m^3

sensor

sigma-400 Density [sigma-4, kg/m^3 ] sigma4 sigma-4,

kg/m^3

sensor

density11 Density, 2 [density, kg/m^3] density 2 density, kg/m^3

2nd sensor

sigma-é11 Density, 2 [sigma-theta, kg/m^3] sigmath 2 sigma-theta,

kg/m^3

2nd sensor

sigma-t11 Density, 2 [sigma-t, kg/m^3 ] sigmat 2 sigma-t, kg/m^3

2nd sensor

sigma-111 Density, 2 [sigma-1, kg/m^3 ] sigma1 2 sigma-1,

kg/m^3

2nd sensor

sigma-211 Density, 2 [sigma-2, kg/m^3 ] sigma2 2 sigma-2,

kg/m^3

2nd sensor

sigma-411 Density, 2 [sigma-4, kg/m^3 ] sigma4 2 sigma-4,

kg/m^3

2nd sensor

D2-D1,d Density Difference, 2 - 1 [density, kg/m^3] D2-D1,d density, kg/m^3

2nd sensor - 1st sensor

D2-D1 Density Difference, 2 - 1 [sigma-theta,

kg/m^3]

D2-D1,th sigma-theta,

kg/m^3

2nd sensor - 1st sensor

D2-D1,t Density Difference, 2 - 1 [sigma-t, kg/m^3 ] D2-D1,t sigma-t, kg/m^3

2nd sensor - 1st sensor

D2-D1,1 Density Difference, 2 - 1 [sigma-1, kg/m^3 ]

D2-D1,1 sigma-1,

kg/m^3

2nd sensor - 1st sensor

D2-D1,2 Density Difference, 2 - 1 [sigma-2, kg/m^3 ]

D2-D1,2 sigma-2,

kg/m^3

2nd sensor - 1st sensor

D2-D1,4 Density Difference, 2 - 1 [sigma-4, kg/m^3 ]

D2-D1,4 sigma-4,

kg/m^3

2nd sensor - 1st sensor

depSM Depth [salt water, m] depS M salt water, m

depSF Depth [salt water, ft] depS F salt water, ft

depFM Depth [fresh water, m] depF M fresh water, m

depFF Depth [fresh water, ft] depF F fresh water, ft

dNMEA Depth, NMEA [salt water, m] dNMEA salt water, m

Manual revision 7.26.8 Appendix VI: Output Variable Names SBE Data Processing

163

Short Name Full Name Friendly Name Units Notes/Comments

dz/dtM Descent Rate [m/s] dz/dt M m/s

dz/dtF Descent Rate [ft/s] dz/dt F ft/s

dm Dynamic Meters [10 J/kg] dm 10 J/kg Calculated in SBE Data

Processing's Derive module

flag Flag flag

chConctr Fluorescence, Biospherical Chl Con chConctr Concentration

naFluor Fluorescence, Biospherical Natural naFluor Natural fluorescence

product Fluorescence, Biospherical Production product Production

flC Fluorescence, Chelsea Aqua 3 Chl Con

[ug/l]

flC ug/l 1

sensor

flC1 Fluorescence, Chelsea Aqua 3 Chl Con, 2

[ug/l]

flC2 ug/l 2nd sensor

flCdiff Fluorescence, Chelsea Aqua 3 Chl Con,

Diff, 2 - 1 [ug/l]

flCdiff ug/l 2nd sensor - 1st sensor

flCM Fluorescence, Chelsea Mini Chl Con [ug/l] flCM ug/l

flCUVA Fluorescence, Chelsea UV Aquatracka [ug/l]

flCUVA ug/l 1

sensor

flCUVA1 Fluorescence, Chelsea UV Aquatracka, 2

[ug/l]

flCUVA2 ug/l 2nd sensor

flCUVAdiff Fluorescence, Chelsea UV Aquatracka, Diff,

2 - 1 [ug/l]

flCUVAdiff ug/l 2nd sensor - 1st sensor

haardtC Fluorescence, Dr. Haardt Chlorophyll a haardtC

haardtP Fluorescence, Dr. Haardt Phycoerythrin haardtP

haardtY Fluorescence, Dr. Haardt Yellow Sub haardtY

flSP Fluorescence, Seapoint flSP 1

sensor

flSP1 Fluorescence, Seapoint, 2 flSP2 2nd sensor

flSPdiff Fluorescence, Seapoint Diff, 2 - 1 flSPdiff 2nd sensor - 1st sensor

flSPR Fluorescence, Seapoint Rhodamine flSPR

flSPuv0 Fluorescence, Seapoint Ultraviolet flSPuv 1

sensor

flSPuv1 Fluorescence, Seapoint Ultraviolet, 2 flSPuv2 2nd sensor

flSPuvdiff Fluorescence, Seapoint Ultraviolet, Diff, 2 -

flSPuvdiff 2nd sensor - 1st sensor

flS Fluorescence, Seatech flS Sea Tech fluorometer or WET

Labs Flash Lamp fluorometer

flT Fluorescence, Turner 10-005 flT

flTAu Fluorescence, Turner 10-Au-005 flTAu

flSCC Fluorescence, Turner Cor Chl [RFU] flSCC RFU SCUFA corrected chlorophyll;

1st sensor

flSCC1 Fluorescence, Turner Cor Chl, 2 [RFU] flSCC2 RFU SCUFA corrected chlorophyll;

2nd sensor

flSCCdiff Fluorescence, Turner Cor Chl, Diff, 2 - 1 flSCCdiff RFU SCUFA corrected chlorophyll;

2nd sensor - 1st sensor

flScufa Fluorescence, Turner SCUFA [RFU] flScufa SCUFA chlorophyll; 1

sensor

flScufa1 Fluorescence, Turner SCUFA, 2 [RFU] flScufa2 SCUFA chlorophyll; 2nd sensor

flScufadiff Fluorescence, Turner SCUFA Diff, 2 - 1 flScufadiff SCUFA chlorophyll;

2nd sensor - 1st sensor

wetChAbs Fluorescence, WET Labs AC3 Absorption

[1/m]

wetChAbs 1/m

wetCDOM Fluorescence, WET Labs CDOM [mg/m^3] wetCDOM mg/m^3 1

sensor

wetCDOM1 Fluorescence, WET Labs CDOM, 2

[mg/m^3]

wetCDOM2 mg/m^3 2nd sensor

wetCDOM2 Fluorescence, WET Labs CDOM, 3

[mg/m^3]

wetCDOM3 mg/m^3 3rd sensor

wetCDOM3 Fluorescence, WET Labs CDOM, 4

[mg/m^3]

wetCDOM4 mg/m^3 4th sensor

wetCDOM4 Fluorescence, WET Labs CDOM, 5

[mg/m^3]

wetCDOM5 mg/m^3 5th sensor

wetCDOM5 Fluorescence, WET Labs CDOM, 6

[mg/m^3]

wetCDOM6 mg/m^3 6th sensor

wetCDOMdiff Fluorescence, WET Labs CDOM, Diff, 2 - 1

[mg/m^3]

wetCDOMdiff mg/m^3 2nd sensor - 1st sensor

wetChConc Fluorescence, WET Labs Chl Con [mg/m^3]

wetChConc mg/m^3 WET Labs AC3 chlorophyll

Manual revision 7.26.8 Appendix VI: Output Variable Names SBE Data Processing

164

Short Name Full Name Friendly Name Units Notes/Comments

flECO-AFL Fluorescence, WET Labs ECO-AFL/FL

[mg/m^3]

eco-afl mg/m^3 1

sensor

flECO-AFL1 Fluorescence, WET Labs ECO-AFL/FL, 2

[mg/m^3]

eco-afl2 mg/m^3 2nd sensor

flECO-AFL2 Fluorescence, WET Labs ECO-AFL/FL, 3

[mg/m^3]

eco-afl3 mg/m^3 3rd sensor

flECO-AFL3 Fluorescence, WET Labs ECO-AFL/FL, 4

[mg/m^3]

eco-afl4 mg/m^3 4th sensor

flECO-AFL4 Fluorescence, WET Labs ECO-AFL/FL, 5

[mg/m^3]

eco-afl5 mg/m^3 5th sensor

flECO-AFL5 Fluorescence, WET Labs ECO-AFL/FL, 6

[mg/m^3]

eco-afl6 mg/m^3 6th sensor

flECO-AFLdiff Fluorescence, WET Labs ECO-AFL/FL,

Diff, 2 - 1 [mg/m^3]

eco-afldiff mg/m^3 2nd sensor - 1st sensor

flWETSeaOWL

chl0 Fluorescence, WET Labs SeaOWL CHL flWETSeaOWLchl0 µg/l 1st chlorophyll sensor

flWETSeaOWL

chl1 Fluorescence, WET Labs SeaOWL CHL, 2 flWETSeaOWLchl1 µg/l 2nd chlorophyll sensor

flWETSeaOWL

chldiff

Fluorescence, WET Labs SeaOWL CHL,

Diff, 2 - 1

flWETSeaOWLchldi

ff µg/l 2nd – 1st chlorophyll sensor

flWETSeaOWL

fdom0 Fluorescence, WET Labs SeaOWL FDOM

flWETSeaOWLfdom

0 µg/l 1st FDOM sensor

flWETSeaOWL

fdom1 Fluorescence, WET Labs SeaOWL FDOM

flWETSeaOWLfdom

1 µg/l 2nd FDOM sensor

flWETSeaOWL

fdomdiff

Fluorescence, WET Labs SeaOWL FDOM,

Diff, 2 - 1

flWETSeaOWLfdom

diff µg/l 2nd – 1st FDOM sensor

wetStar Fluorescence, WET Labs WETstar

[mg/m^3]

WETstar mg/m^3 1

sensor

wetStar1 Fluorescence, WET Labs WETstar, 2

[mg/m^3]

WETstar2 mg/m^3 2nd sensor

wetStar2 Fluorescence, WET Labs WETstar, 3

[mg/m^3]

WETstar3 mg/m^3 3rd sensor

wetStar3 Fluorescence, WET Labs WETstar, 4

[mg/m^3]

WETstar4 mg/m^3 4th sensor

wetStar4 Fluorescence, WET Labs WETstar, 5

[mg/m^3]

WETstar5 mg/m^3 5th sensor

wetStar5 Fluorescence, WET Labs WETstar, 6

[mg/m^3]

WETstar6 mg/m^3 6th sensor

wetStardiff Fluorescence, WET Labs WETstar, Diff,

2 - 1 [mg/m^3]

wetStardiff mg/m^3 2nd sensor - 1st sensor

flflTC0 Fluorescein, Turner Cyclops [ppb] flflTC ppb 1

sensor

flflTC1 Fluorescein, Turner Cyclops, 2 [ppb] flflTC2 ppb 2nd sensor

flflTCdiff Fluorescein, Turner Cyclops, Diff, 2 - 1

[ppb]

flflTCdiff ppb 2nd sensor - 1st sensor

f0 Frequency 0 f0 Hz 1

sensor

f1 Frequency 1 f1 Hz 2nd sensor

f2 Frequency 2 f2 Hz 3rd sensor

f3 Frequency 3 f3 Hz 4th sensor

f4 Frequency 4 f4 Hz 5th sensor

f5 Frequency 5 f5 Hz 6th sensor

f6 Frequency 6 f6 Hz 7th sensor

f7 Frequency 7 f7 Hz 8th sensor

f8 Frequency 8 f8 Hz 9th sensor

f9 Frequency 9 f9 Hz 10th sensor

f10 Frequency 10 f10 Hz 11th sensor

f11 Frequency 11 f11 Hz 12th sensor

f12 Frequency 12 f12 Hz 13th sensor

f13 Frequency 13 f13 Hz 14th sensor

f14 Frequency 14 f14 Hz 15th sensor

f15 Frequency 15 f15 Hz 16th sensor

f16 Frequency 16 f16 Hz 17th sensor

f17 Frequency 17 f17 Hz 18th sensor

f18 Frequency 18 f18 Hz 19

sensor

f19 Frequency 19 f19 Hz 20

sensor

f20 Frequency 20 f20 Hz 21

sensor

Manual revision 7.26.8 Appendix VI: Output Variable Names SBE Data Processing

165

Short Name Full Name Friendly Name Units Notes/Comments

f21 Frequency 21 f21 Hz 22

sensor

f22 Frequency 22 f22 Hz 23

sensor

f23 Frequency 23 f23 Hz 24

sensor

f24 Frequency 24 f24 Hz 25

sensor

f25 Frequency 25 f25 Hz 26

sensor

f26 Frequency 26 f26 Hz 27

sensor

f27 Frequency 27 f27 Hz 28

sensor

f28 Frequency 28 f28 Hz 29

sensor

f29 Frequency 29 f29 Hz 30

sensor

f30 Frequency 30 f30 Hz 31

sensor

f31 Frequency 31 f31 Hz 32

sensor

f32 Frequency 32 f32 Hz 33

sensor

f33 Frequency 33 f33 Hz 34

sensor

f34 Frequency 34 f34 Hz 35

sensor

f35 Frequency 35 f35 Hz 36

sensor

f36 Frequency 36 f36 Hz 37

sensor

gpa Geopotential Anomaly [J/kg] gpa J/kg Calculated in SBE Data

Processing's Derive module

GTDDOP0 GTD-DO Pressure [mb] GTDDOP mb 1

sensor

GTDDOP1 GTD-DO Pressure, 2 [mb] GTDDOP2 mb 2nd sensor

GTDDOPdiff GTD-DO Pressure, Diff, 2 - 1 [mb] GTDDOPdiff mb 2nd sensor - 1st sensor

GTDDOT0 GTD-DO Temperature [deg C] GTDDOT deg C 1

sensor

GTDDOT1 GTD-DO Temperature, 2 [deg C] GTDDOT2 deg C 2nd sensor

GTDDOTdiff GTD-DO Temperature, Diff, 2 - 1 [deg C] GTDDOTdiff deg C 2nd sensor - 1st sensor

GTDN2P0 GTD-N2 Pressure [mb] GTDN2P mb 1

sensor

GTDN2P1 GTD-N2 Pressure, 2 [mb] GTDN2P2 mb 2nd sensor

GTDN2Pdiff GTD-N2 Pressure, Diff, 2 - 1 [mb] GTDN2Pdiff mb 2nd sensor - 1st sensor

GTDN2T0 GTD-N2 Temperature [deg C] GTDN2T deg C 1

sensor

GTDN2T1 GTD-N2 Temperature, 2 [deg C] GTDN2T2 deg C 2nd sensor

GTDN2Tdiff GTD-N2 Temperature, Diff, 2 - 1 [deg C] GTDN2Tdiff deg C 2nd sensor - 1st sensor

latitude Latitude [deg] latitude deg From NMEA device

lisstBC LISST-25A, Beam C [1/m] lisstBC 1/m

lisstOT LISST-25A, Optical Transmission [%] lisstOT %

lisstMD LISST-25A, Sauter Mean Diameter [u] lisstMD u

lisstTVC LISST-25A, Total Volume Conc. [ul/l] lisstTVC ul/l

lisst200X-MD LISST-200X, Sauter Mean Diameter Lisst200X-MD u Microns

lisst200X-TVC LISST-200X, Total Volume Conc Lisst200X-TVC ppm

lisstABS-PC LISST-ABS, Particle Concentration lisstABS-PC Cu or mg/l Calibration factor = 1.0 Cu

else mg/l

longitude Longitude [deg] longitude deg From NMEA device

meth Methane Conc., Franatech METS [umol/l] meth umol/l

methT Methane Gas Temp., Franatech METS [deg

methT deg C

modError Modulo Error Count modError

mod Modulo Word mod

newpos New Position newpos

n2satML/L Nitrogen Saturation [ml/l] N2sat ml/l ml/l

n2satMg/L Nitrogen Saturation [mg/l] N2sat mg/l mg/l

n2satumol/kg Nitrogen Saturation [umol/kg] N2sat umol/kg umol/kg

obs OBS, Backscatterance (D & A) [NTU] obs NTU 1

sensor

obs1 OBS, Backscatterance (D & A), 2 [NTU] obs2 NTU 2nd sensor

obsdiff OBS, Backscatterance (D & A), Diff, 2 - 1

[NTU]

obsdiff NTU 2nd sensor - 1st sensor

nephc OBS, Chelsea Nephelometer [FTU] nephc FTU

obs3+ OBS, D & A 3plus [NTU] obs3+ NTU D&A OBS 3+; 1

sensor

obs3+1 OBS, D & A 3plus, 2 [NTU] obs3+2 NTU D&A OBS 3+; 2nd sensor

obs3+diff OBS, D & A 3plus, Diff, 2 - 1 [NTU] obs3+diff NTU D&A OBS 3+; 2nd sensor - 1st

sensor

haardtT OBS, Dr. Haardt Turbidity haardtT

diff OBS, IFREMER diff

Manual revision 7.26.8 Appendix VI: Output Variable Names SBE Data Processing

166

Short Name Full Name Friendly Name Units Notes/Comments

stLs6000 OBS, Seatech LS6000 stLs6000 Sea Tech LS6000 or WET Labs

LBSS; 1st sensor

stLs60001 OBS, Seatech LS6000, 2 stLs60002 Sea Tech LS6000 or WET Labs

LBSS; 2nd sensor

stLs6000diff OBS, Seatech LS6000, Diff, 2 - 1 stLs6000diff Sea Tech LS6000 or WET Labs

LBSS; 2nd sensor - 1st sensor

obsscufa OBS, Turner SCUFA [NTU] obsscufa NTU 1

sensor

obsscufa1 OBS, Turner SCUFA, 2 [NTU] obsscufa2 NTU 2nd sensor

obsscufadiff OBS, Turner SCUFA, Diff, 2 - 1 [NTU] obsscufadiff NTU 2nd sensor - 1st sensor

obrflTC0 Optical Brighteners, Turner Cyclops [ppb

QS]

obrflTC ppb QS 1

sensor

obrflTC1 Optical Brighteners, Turner Cyclops, 2 [ppb

QS]

obrflTC2 ppb QS 2nd sensor

obrflTCdiff Optical Brighteners, Turner Cyclops, Diff, 2

- 1 [ppb QS]

obrflTCdiff ppb QS 2nd sensor - 1st sensor

orp Oxidation Reduction Potential [mV] orp mV

sbeox0V Oxygen raw, SBE 43 [V] sbeoxV V 1

sensor

sbeox0F Oxygen raw, SBE 43 [Hz] sbeoxF Hz 1

sensor

sbeox1V Oxygen raw, SBE 43, 2 [V] sbeoxV2 V 2nd sensor

sbeox1F Oxygen raw, SBE 43, 2 [Hz] sbeoxF2 Hz 2nd sensor

sbeox0ML/L Oxygen, SBE 43 [ml/l] sbeox ml/l ml/l 1

sensor

sbeox0Mg/L Oxygen, SBE 43 [mg/l] sbeox mg/l mg/l 1

sensor

sbeox0PS Oxygen, SBE 43 [% saturation] sbeox %S % saturation 1

sensor

sbeox0Mm/Kg Oxygen, SBE 43 [umol/kg] sbeox mm/kg umol/kg 1

sensor

sbeox0Mm/L Oxygen, SBE 43 [umol/l] sbeoxMm/L umol/l 1

sensor

sbeox0dOV/dT Oxygen, SBE 43 [dov/dt] sbeox dov/dt dov/dt 1

sensor

sbeox1ML/L Oxygen, SBE 43, 2 [ml/l] sbeox2 ml/l ml/l 2nd sensor

sbeox1Mg/L Oxygen, SBE 43, 2 [mg/l] sbeox2 mg/l mg/l 2nd sensor

sbeox1PS Oxygen, SBE 43, 2 [% saturation] sbeox2 %S % saturation 2nd sensor

sbeox1Mm/Kg Oxygen, SBE 43, 2 [umol/kg] sbeox2 mm/kg umol/kg 2nd sensor

sbeox1Mm/L Oxygen, SBE 43, 2 [umol/l] sbeoxMm/L2 umol/l 2nd sensor

sbeox1dOV/dT Oxygen, SBE 43, 2 [dov/dt] sbeox2 dov/dt dov/dt 2nd sensor

sbeox0ML/Ldiff

Oxygen, SBE 43, Diff, 2 - 1 [ml/l] sbeox ml/l diff ml/l 2nd sensor - 1st sensor

sbeox0Mg/Ldiff

Oxygen, SBE 43, Diff, 2 - 1 [mg/l] sbeox mg/l diff mg/l 2nd sensor - 1st sensor

sbeox0PSdiff Oxygen, SBE 43, Diff, 2 - 1 [% saturation] sbeox %S diff % saturation 2nd sensor - 1st sensor

sbeox0Mm/

Kgdiff

Oxygen, SBE 43, Diff, 2 - 1 [umol/kg] sbeox mm/kg diff umol/kg 2nd sensor - 1st sensor

sbeox0Mm/Ldiff

Oxygen, SBE 43, Diff, 2 - 1 [umol/l] sbeox mm/l diff umol/l 2nd sensor - 1st sensor

sbeoxpd Oxygen raw, SBE 63 phase delay [usec] sbeoxpd usec 1

sensor

sbeoxpdv Oxygen raw, SBE 63 phase delay [V] sbeoxpdv V 1

sensor

sbeoxpd1 Oxygen raw, SBE 63 phase delay, 2 [usec] sbeoxpd2 usec 2nd sensor

sbeoxpdv1 Oxygen raw, SBE 63 phase delay, 2 [V] sbeoxpdv2 V 2nd sensor

sbeoxtv Oxygen raw, SBE 63 thermistor voltage [V] sbeoxtv V 1

sensor

sbeoxtv1 Oxygen raw, SBE 63 thermistor voltage, 2

[V]

sbeoxtv2 V 2nd sensor

sbeoxTC Oxygen Temperature, SBE 63 [ITS-90, deg

sbeoxTC ITS-90, deg C 1

sensor

sbeoxTF Oxygen Temperature, SBE 63 [ITS-90, deg

sbeoxTF ITS-90, deg F 1

sensor

sbeoxTC1 Oxygen Temperature, SBE 63, 2 [ITS-90,

deg C]

sbeoxTC1 ITS-90, deg C 2nd sensor

sbeoxTF1 Oxygen Temperature, SBE 63, 2 [ITS-90,

deg F]

sbeoxTF1 ITS-90, deg F 2nd sensor

sbeopoxML/L Oxygen, SBE 63 [ml/l] sbeopox ml/l ml/l 1

sensor

sbeopoxMg/L Oxygen, SBE 63 [mg/l] sbeopox mg/l mg/l 1

sensor

sbeopoxPS Oxygen, SBE 63 [% saturation] sbeopox %S % saturation 1

sensor

sbeopoxMm/Kg Oxygen, SBE 63 [umol/kg] sbeopox Mm/Kg umol/kg 1

sensor

sbeopoxMm/L Oxygen, SBE 63 [umol/l] sbeopox Mm/L umol/l 1

sensor

sbeopoxML/L1 Oxygen, SBE 63, 2 [ml/l] sbeopox ml/l2 ml/l 2nd sensor

sbeopoxMg/L1 Oxygen, SBE 63, 2 [mg/l] sbeopox mg/l2 mg/l 2nd sensor

sbeopoxPS1 Oxygen, SBE 63, 2 [% saturation] sbeopox %S2 % saturation 2nd sensor

Sbeopox

Mm/Kg1

Oxygen, SBE 63, 2 [umol/kg] sbeopox Mm/Kg2 umol/kg 2nd sensor

sbeopoxMm/L1 Oxygen, SBE 63, 2 [umol/l] sbeopox Mm/L2 umol/l 2nd sensor

Manual revision 7.26.8 Appendix VI: Output Variable Names SBE Data Processing

167

Short Name Full Name Friendly Name Units Notes/Comments

opoxML/L Oxygen Optode, Aanderaa [ml/l] opox ml/l ml/l

opoxMg/L Oxygen Optode, Aanderaa [mg/l] opox mg/l mg/l

opoxPS Oxygen Optode, Aanderaa [% saturation] opox %S % saturation

opoxMm/L Oxygen Optode, Aanderaa [umol/l] opox Mm/l umol/l

oxC Oxygen Current, Beckman/YSI [uA] oxc uA 1

sensor

oxsC Oxygen Current, Beckman/YSI, 2 [uA] oxc2 uA 2nd sensor

oxTC Oxygen Temperature, Beckman/YSI [deg C]

oxT C deg C 1

sensor

oxTF Oxygen Temperature, Beckman/YSI [deg F]

oxT F deg F 1

sensor

oxsTC Oxygen Temperature, Beckman/YSI, 2 [deg

oxT2 C deg C 2nd sensor

oxsTF Oxygen Temperature, Beckman/YSI, 2 [deg

oxT2 F deg F 2nd sensor

oxML/L Oxygen, Beckman/YSI [ml/l] ox ml/l ml/l 1

sensor

oxMg/L Oxygen, Beckman/YSI [mg/l] ox mg/l mg/l 1

sensor

oxPS Oxygen, Beckman/YSI [% saturation] ox %S % saturation 1

sensor

oxMm/Kg Oxygen, Beckman/YSI [umol/kg] ox mm/Kg umol/kg 1

sensor

oxdOC/dT Oxygen, Beckman/YSI [doc/dt] ox doc/dt doc/dt 1

sensor

oxsML/L Oxygen, Beckman/YSI, 2 [ml/l] ox2 ml/l ml/l 2nd sensor

oxsMg/L Oxygen, Beckman/YSI, 2 [mg/l] ox2 mg/l mg/l 2nd sensor

oxsPS Oxygen, Beckman/YSI, 2 [% saturation] oxs %S % saturation 2nd sensor

oxsMm/Kg Oxygen, Beckman/YSI, 2 [umol/kg] oxs mm/Kg umol/kg 2nd sensor

oxsdOC/dT Oxygen, Beckman/YSI, 2 [doc/dt] oxs doc/dt doc/dt 2nd sensor

iowOxML/L Oxygen, IOW [ml/l] iowox ml/l ml/l

oxsolML/L Oxygen Saturation, Garcia & Gordon [ml/l] oxsol ml/l ml/l

oxsolMg/L Oxygen Saturation, Garcia & Gordon [mg/l]

oxsol mg/l mg/l

oxsolMm/Kg Oxygen Saturation, Garcia & Gordon

[umol/kg]

oxsol Mm/kg umol/kg

oxsatML/L Oxygen Saturation, Weiss [ml/l] oxsat ml/l ml/l

oxsatMg/L Oxygen Saturation, Weiss [mg/l] oxsat mg/l mg/l

oxsatMm/Kg Oxygen Saturation, Weiss [umol/kg] oxsat Mm/kg umol/kg

par PAR/Irradiance, Biospherical/Licor par Biospherical, Licor, or Chelsea

sensor; 1st sensor

par1 PAR/Irradiance, Biospherical/Licor, 2 par2 Biospherical, Licor, or Chelsea

sensor; 2nd sensor

par/log PAR/Logarithmic, Satlantic par/log

ph pH ph

phycyflTC0 Phycocyanin, Turner Cyclops [RFU] phycyflTC RFU 1

sensor

phycyflTC1 Phycocyanin, Turner Cyclops, 2 [RFU] phycyflTC2 RFU 2nd sensor

phycyflTCdiff Phycocyanin, Turner Cyclops, Diff, 2 - 1

[RFU]

phycyflTCdiff RFU 2nd sensor - 1st sensor

phyeryflTC0 Phycoerythrin, Turner Cyclops [RFU] phyeryflTC RFU 1

sensor

phyeryflTC1 Phycoerythrin, Turner Cyclops, 2 [RFU] phyeryflTC2 RFU 2nd sensor

phyeryflTCdiff Phycoerythrin, Turner Cyclops, Diff, 2 - 1

[RFU]

phyeryflTCdiff RFU 2nd sensor - 1st sensor

pla Plume Anomaly pla

potemp090C Potential Temperature [ITS-90, deg C] potemp 90 C ITS-90, deg C 1

sensor

potemp090F Potential Temperature [ITS-90, deg F] potemp 90 F ITS-90, deg F 1

sensor

potemp068C Potential Temperature [IPTS-68, deg C] potemp 68 C IPTS-68, deg C

sensor

potemp068F Potential Temperature [IPTS-68, deg F] potemp 68 F IPTS-68, deg F

sensor

potemp190C Potential Temperature, 2 [ITS-90, deg C] potemp2 90 C ITS-90, deg C 2nd sensor

potemp190F Potential Temperature, 2 [ITS-90, deg F] potemp2 90 F ITS-90, deg F 2nd sensor

potemp168C Potential Temperature, 2 [IPTS-68, deg C] potemp2 68 C IPTS-68, deg

2nd sensor

potemp168F Potential Temperature, 2 [IPTS-68, deg F] potemp2 68 F IPTS-68, deg F

2nd sensor

potemp90Cdiff Potential Temperature, Diff, 2 - 1 [ITS-90,

deg C]

potemp diff 90 C ITS-90, deg C 2nd sensor - 1st sensor

potemp90Fdiff Potential Temperature, Diff, 2 - 1 [ITS-90,

deg F]

potemp diff 90 F ITS-90, deg F 2nd sensor - 1st sensor

potemp68Cdiff Potential Temperature, Diff, 2 - 1 [IPTS-68,

deg C]

potemp diff 68 C IPTS-68, deg

2nd sensor - 1st sensor

potemp68Fdiff Potential Temperature, Diff, 2 - 1 [IPTS-68,

deg F]

potemp diff 68 F IPTS-68, deg F

2nd sensor - 1st sensor

Manual revision 7.26.8 Appendix VI: Output Variable Names SBE Data Processing

168

Short Name Full Name Friendly Name Units Notes/Comments

pta090C Potential Temperature Anomaly [ITS-90,

deg C]

pta 90 C ITS-90, deg C 1

sensor

pta090F Potential Temperature Anomaly [ITS-90,

deg F]

pta 90 F ITS-90, deg F 1

sensor

pta068C Potential Temperature Anomaly [IPTS-68,

deg C]

pta 68 C IPTS-68, deg

sensor

pta068F Potential Temperature Anomaly [IPTS-68,

deg F]

pta 68 F IPTS-68, deg F

sensor

pta190C Potential Temperature Anomaly, 2 [ITS-90,

deg C]

pta1 90 C ITS-90, deg C 2nd sensor

pta190F Potential Temperature Anomaly, 2 [ITS-90,

deg F]

pta1 90 F ITS-90, deg F 2nd sensor

pta168C Potential Temperature Anomaly, 2 [IPTS-

68,

deg C]

pta1 68 C IPTS-68, deg

2nd sensor

pta168F Potential Temperature Anomaly, 2 [IPTS-

68,

deg F]

pta1 68 F IPTS-68, deg F

2nd sensor

prM Pressure [db] pr M db User-entry for moored pressure

(instrument with no pressure

sensor)

prE Pressure [psi] pr E psi User-entry for moored pressure

(instrument with no pressure

sensor)

ptempC Pressure Temperature [deg C] ptemp C deg C Temperature measured by

pressure sensor

ptempF Pressure Temperature [deg F] ptemp F deg F Temperature measured by

pressure sensor

prDM Pressure, Digiquartz [db] pr M db Digiquartz pressure sensor

prDE Pressure, Digiquartz [psi] pr E psi Digiquartz pressure sensor

fgp0 Pressure, FGP [KPa] fgp KPa 1

FGP pressure sensor

fgp1 Pressure, FGP, 2 [KPa] fgp2 KPa 2nd FGP pressure sensor

fgp2 Pressure, FGP, 3 [KPa] fgp3 KPa 3rd FGP pressure sensor

fgp3 Pressure, FGP, 4 [KPa] fgp4 KPa 4th FGP pressure sensor

fgp4 Pressure, FGP, 5 [KPa] fgp5 KPa 5th FGP pressure sensor

fgp5 Pressure, FGP, 6 [KPa] fgp6 KPa 6th FGP pressure sensor

fgp6 Pressure, FGP, 7 [KPa] fgp7 KPa 7th FGP pressure sensor

fgp7 Pressure, FGP, 8 [KPa] fgp8 KPa 8th FGP pressure sensor

pr50M Pressure, SBE 50 [db] pr50 M db 1

SBE 50 pressure sensor

pr50E Pressure, SBE 50 [psi] pr50 E psi 1

SBE 50 pressure sensor

pr50M1 Pressure, SBE 50, 2 [db] pr50 M2 db 2

SBE 50 pressure sensor

pr50E1 Pressure, SBE 50, 2 [psi] pr50 E2 psi 2

SBE 50 pressure sensor

prSM or prdM Pressure, Strain Gauge [db] pr M db strain-gauge pressure sensor

prSE or prdE Pressure, Strain Gauge [psi] pr E psi strain-gauge pressure sensor

pumps Pump Status pumps

rfuels0 Refined Fuels, Turner Cyclops [ppb NS] rfuels ppb NS 1

sensor

rfuels1 Refined Fuels, Turner Cyclops, 2 [ppb NS] fuels2 ppb NS 2nd sensor

rfuelsdiff Refined Fuels, Turner Cyclops, Diff, 2 - 1

[ppb NS]

rfuelsdiff ppb NS 2nd sensor - 1st sensor

rhodflTC0 Rhodamine, Turner Cyclops [ppb] rhodflTC ppb 1

sensor

rhodflTC1 Rhodamine, Turner Cyclops, 2 [ppb] rhodflTC2 ppb 2nd sensor

rhodflTCdiff Rhodamine, Turner Cyclops, Diff, 2 - 1

[ppb]

rhodflTCdiff ppb 2nd sensor - 1st sensor

wl0 RS-232 WET Labs raw counts 0 wl Counts 1

sensor

wl1 RS-232 WET Labs raw counts 1 wl2 Counts 2nd sensor

wl2 RS-232 WET Labs raw counts 2 wl3 Counts 3rd sensor

wl3 RS-232 WET Labs raw counts 3 wl4 Counts 4th sensor

wl4 RS-232 WET Labs raw counts 4 wl5 Counts 5th sensor

wl5 RS-232 WET Labs raw counts 5 wl6 Counts 6th sensor

sal00 or sal_ Salinity, Practical [PSU] sal PSU 1

sensor

sal11 Salinity, Practical, 2 [PSU] sal2 PSU 2nd sensor

secS-priS Salinity, Practical, Difference, 2 - 1 [PSU] sal2-sal1 PSU 2nd sensor - 1st sensor

scan Scan Count scan

nbin Scans Per Bin nbin Calculated in SBE Data

Processing's Bin Average

module

Manual revision 7.26.8 Appendix VI: Output Variable Names SBE Data Processing

169

Short Name Full Name Friendly Name Units Notes/Comments

sfdSM Seafloor depth [salt water, m] sfdS M salt water, m

sfdSF Seafloor depth [salt water, ft] sfdS F salt water, ft

sfdFM Seafloor depth [fresh water, m] sfdF M fresh water, m

sfdFF Seafloor depth [fresh water, ft] sfdF F fresh water, ft

svCM Sound Velocity [Chen-Millero, m/s] svC M Chen-Millero,

m/s

sensor

svCF Sound Velocity [Chen-Millero, ft/s] svC F Chen-Millero,

ft/s

sensor

svDM Sound Velocity [Delgrosso, m/s] svD M Delgrosso, m/s

sensor

svDF Sound Velocity [Delgrosso, ft/s] svD F Delgrosso, ft/s

sensor

svWM Sound Velocity [Wilson, m/s] svW M Wilson, m/s 1

sensor

svWF Sound Velocity [Wilson, ft/s] svW F Wilson, ft/s 1

sensor

svCM1 Sound Velocity, 2 [Chen-Millero, m/s] svC2 M Chen-Millero,

m/s

2nd sensor

svCF1 Sound Velocity, 2 [Chen-Millero, ft/s] svC2 F Chen-Millero,

ft/s

2nd sensor

svDM1 Sound Velocity, 2 [Delgrosso, m/s] svD2 M Delgrosso, m/s

2nd sensor

svDF1 Sound Velocity, 2 [Delgrosso, ft/s] svD2 F Delgrosso, ft/s

2nd sensor

svWM1 Sound Velocity, 2 [Wilson, m/s] svW2 M Wilson, m/s 2nd sensor

svWF1 Sound Velocity, 2 [Wilson, ft/s] svW2 F Wilson, ft/s 2nd sensor

iowSv Sound Velocity, IOW [m/s] iowSv m/s IOW sound velocity sensor

sbeSv-iowSv Sound Velocity Diff, SBE - IOW [m/s] svSbeC-svIOW m/s SBE CTD - IOW SV sensor

spar SPAR/Surface Irradiance spar Biospherical or Licor sensor

spar/sat/lin SPAR/Linear, Satlantic spar/sat/lin

spar/sat/log SPAR/Logarithmic/Satlantic spar/sat/log

specc Specific Conductance [uS/cm] specc uS/cm

speccumhoscm Specific Conductance [umhos/cm] speccumhoscm umhos/cm

speccmsm Specific Conductance [mS/cm] speccmsm mS/cm

speccmmhoscm Specific Conductance [mmhos/cm] speccmmhoscm mmhos/cm

sva Specific Volume Anomaly [10^-8 * m^3/kg]

sva 10^-8 *

m^3/kg

E Stability [rad^2/m] E rad^2/m Calculated in SBE Data

Processing's Buoyancy module

E10^-8 Stability [10^-8 * rad^2/m] E10^-8 10^-8 *

rad^2/m

Calculated in SBE Data

Processing's Buoyancy module

t090Cm,

t4990C, tnc90C,

or tv290C

Temperature [ITS-90, deg C] t 90 C ITS-90, deg C 1

sensor

t090F, t4990F,

tnc90F, or

tv290F

Temperature [ITS-90, deg F] t 90 F ITS-90, deg F 1

sensor

t068C, t4968C,

tnc68C, or

tv268C

Temperature [IPTS-68, deg C] t 68 C IPTS-68, deg

sensor

t068F, t4968F,

tnc68F, or

tv268F

Temperature [IPTS-68, deg F] t 68 F IPTS-68, deg F

sensor

t190C or

tnc290C

Temperature, 2 [ITS-90, deg C] t2 90 C ITS-90, deg C 2nd sensor

t190F or

tnc290F

Temperature, 2 [ITS-90, deg F] t2 90 F ITS-90, deg F 2nd sensor

t168C or

tnc268C

Temperature, 2 [IPTS-68, deg C] t2 68 C IPTS-68, deg

2nd sensor

t168F or

tnc268F

Temperature, 2 [IPTS-68, deg F] t2 68 F IPTS-68, deg F

2nd sensor

T2-T190C Temperature Difference, 2 - 1 [ITS-90, deg

T2-T1 90 C ITS-90, deg C 2nd sensor - 1st sensor

T2-T190F Temperature Difference, 2 - 1 [ITS-90, deg

T2-T1 90 F ITS-90, deg F 2nd sensor - 1st sensor

T2-T168C Temperature Difference, 2 - 1 [IPTS-68, deg

T2-T1 68 C IPTS-68, deg

2nd sensor - 1st sensor

T2-T168F Temperature Difference, 2 - 1 [IPTS-68, deg

T2-T1 68 F IPTS-68, deg F

2nd sensor - 1st sensor

Manual revision 7.26.8 Appendix VI: Output Variable Names SBE Data Processing

170

Short Name Full Name Friendly Name Units Notes/Comments

t3890C or

t38_90C

Temperature, SBE 38 [ITS-90, deg C] t38 90 C ITS-90, deg C 1

sensor

t3890F or

t38_90F

Temperature, SBE 38 [ITS-90, deg F] t38 90 F ITS-90, deg F 1

sensor

t3868C or

t38_68C

Temperature, SBE 38 [IPTS-68, deg C] t38 68 C IPTS-68, deg

sensor

t3868F or

t38_68F

Temperature, SBE 38 [IPTS-68, deg F] t38 68 F IPTS-68, deg F

sensor

t3890C1 Temperature, SBE 38, 2 [ITS-90, deg C] t38 90 C2 ITS-90, deg C 2nd sensor

t3890F1 Temperature, SBE 38, 2 [ITS-90, deg F] t38 90 F2 ITS-90, deg F 2nd sensor

t3868C1 Temperature, SBE 38, 2 [IPTS-68, deg C] t38 68 C2 IPTS-68, deg

2nd sensor

t3868F1 Temperature, SBE 38, 2 [IPTS-68, deg F] t38 68 F2 IPTS-68, deg F

2nd sensor

tsa Thermosteric Anomaly [10^-8 * m^3/kg] tsa 10^-8 *

m^3/kg

timeS Time, Elapsed [seconds] time S seconds Elapsed time (seconds) based

on first scan in data file and

sample rate (profiling) or

sample interval (moorings);

sample rate is defined by

configuration (.con or .xmlcon)

file.

timeM Time, Elapsed [minutes] time M minutes Elapsed time (minutes) based

on first scan in data file and

sample rate (profiling) or

sample interval (moorings);

sample rate or interval is as

defined by configuration (.con

or .xmlcon) file.

timeH Time, Elapsed [hours] time H hours Elapsed time (hours) based on

first scan in data file and

sample rate (profiling) or

sample interval (moorings);

sample rate or interval is as

defined by configuration (.con

or .xmlcon) file.

timeJ Julian Days time J julian days Elapsed time (Julian days)

based on first scan in data file

and sample rate (profiling) or

sample interval (moorings);

sample rate or interval is as

defined by configuration (.con

or .xmlcon) file.

timeN Time, NMEA [seconds] timeN seconds From NMEA device: Seconds

since January 1, 1970; only for

SBE 45

timeQ Time, NMEA [seconds] timeQ seconds From NMEA device: Seconds

since January 1, 2000;

everything but SBE 45

timeK Time, Instrument [seconds] timeK seconds Seconds since January 1, 2000,

based on time stamp in 16plus

V2 or 19plus V2 (in moored

mode).

timeJV2 Time, Instrument [julian days] timeJV2 julian days Julian days, based on time

stamp in 16plus V2 or 19plus

V2 (in moored mode).

timeSCP Time, Seacat plus [julian days] timeSCP julian days Julian days, based on time

stamp in 16plus or 19plus (in

moored mode). Not applicable

to V2 versions.

timeY Time, System [seconds] timeY seconds Computer time (seconds) since

January 1, 1970, appended by

Seasave V7 if 'Scan time added'

selected in configuration (.con

or .xmlcon) file.

Manual revision 7.26.8 Appendix VI: Output Variable Names SBE Data Processing

171

Short Name Full Name Friendly Name Units Notes/Comments

seaTurbMtr Turbidity, Seapoint [FTU] seaTurbMtr FTU 1

sensor

seaTurbMtr1 Turbidity, Seapoint, 2 [FTU] seaTurbMtr2 FTU 2nd sensor

seaTurbMtrdiff Turbidity, Seapoint, Diff, 2 - 1 [FTU] seaTurbMtrdiff FTU 2nd sensor - 1st sensor

turbflTC0 Turbidity, Turner Cyclops [NTU] turbflTC NTU 1

sensor

turbflTC1 Turbidity, Turner Cyclops, 2 [NTU] turbflTC2 NTU 2nd sensor

turbflTCdiff Turbidity, Turner Cyclops, Diff, 2 - 1 [NTU]

turbflTCdiff NTU 2nd sensor - 1st sensor

turbWETbb0 Turbidity, WET Labs ECO BB [m^-1/sr] turbWETbb m^-1/sr 1

sensor

turbWETbb1 Turbidity, WET Labs ECO BB, 2 [m^-1/sr] turbWETbb2 m^-1/sr 2nd sensor

turbWETbb2 Turbidity, WET Labs ECO BB, 3 [m^-1/sr] turbWETbb3 m^-1/sr 3rd sensor

turbWETbb3 Turbidity, WET Labs ECO BB, 4 [m^-1/sr] turbWETbb4 m^-1/sr 4th sensor

turbWETbb4 Turbidity, WET Labs ECO BB, 5 [m^-1/sr] turbWETbb5 m^-1/sr 5th sensor

turbWETbbdiff Turbidity, WET Labs ECO BB, Diff, 2 - 1

[m^-1/sr]

turbWETbbdiff m^-1/sr 2nd sensor - 1st sensor

turbWETntu0 Turbidity, WET Labs ECO [NTU] turbWETntu NTU 1

sensor

turbWETntu1 Turbidity, WET Labs ECO, 2 [NTU] turbWETntu2 NTU 2nd sensor

turbWETntu2 Turbidity, WET Labs ECO, 3 [NTU] turbWETntu3 NTU 3rd sensor

turbWETntu3 Turbidity, WET Labs ECO, 4 [NTU] turbWETntu4 NTU 4th sensor

turbWETntu4 Turbidity, WET Labs ECO, 5 [NTU] turbWETntu5 NTU 5th sensor

turbWETntu5 Turbidity, WET Labs ECO, 6 [NTU] turbWETntu6 NTU 6th sensor

turbWETntudiff Turbidity, WET Labs ECO, Diff, 2 - 1

[NTU]

turbWETntudiff NTU 2nd sensor - 1st sensor

turbWET

SeaOWLbb0 Turbidity, WET Labs SeaOWL BB turbWETSeaOWLbb

m -1sr -1 1st turbidity sensor

turbWET

SeaOWLbb1 Turbidity, WET Labs SeaOWL BB, 2

turbWETSeaOWL

bb2 m -1sr -1 2nd turbidity sensor

turbWET

SeaOWLbbdiff

Turbidity, WET Labs SeaOWL BB,

Diff, 2 - 1

turbWETSeaOWL

bbdiff m -1sr -1 2nd – 1st turbidity sensor

user1 User Defined Variable user 1

sensor; user selects variable

name for file imported to ASCII

user2 User Defined Variable, 2 user2

2nd sensor; user selects variable

name for file imported to ASCII

user3 User Defined Variable, 3 user3 3rd sensor; user selects variable

name for file imported to ASCII

user4 User Defined Variable, 4 user4 4th sensor; user selects variable

name for file imported to ASCII

user5 User Defined Variable, 5 user5 5th sensor; user selects variable

name for file imported to ASCII

uexpo0 User Exponential uexpo 1

user exponential sensor

uexpo1 User Exponential, 2 uexpo1 2nd user exponential sensor

uexpo2 User Exponential, 3 uexpo2 3rd user exponential sensor

upoly0 User Polynomial upoly 1

user polynomial sensor

upoly1 User Polynomial, 2 upoly2 2nd user polynomial sensor

upoly2 User Polynomial, 3 upoly3 3rd user polynomial sensor

Manual revision 7.26.8 Appendix VI: Output Variable Names SBE Data Processing

172

Short Name Full Name Friendly Name Units Notes/Comments

v0 Voltage 0 v0 V 1

voltage sensor

v1 Voltage 1 v1 V 2nd voltage sensor

v2 Voltage 2 v2 V 3rd voltage sensor

v3 Voltage 3 v3 V 4th voltage sensor

v4 Voltage 4 v4 V 5th voltage sensor

v5 Voltage 5 v5 V 6th voltage sensor

v6 Voltage 6 v6 V 7th voltage sensor

v7 Voltage 7 v7 V 8th voltage sensor

v8 Voltage 8 v8 V 9th voltage sensor

v9 Voltage 9 v9 V 10th voltage sensor

v10 Voltage 10 v10 V 11th voltage sensor

v11 Voltage 11 v11 V 12th voltage sensor

v12 Voltage 12 v12 V 13th voltage sensor

v13 Voltage 13 v13 V 14th voltage sensor

v14 Voltage 14 v14 V 15th voltage sensor

v15 Voltage 15 v15 V 16th voltage sensor

zaps Zaps [nmol] zaps nmol

Manual revision 7.26.8 Appendix VI: Output Variable Names SBE Data Processing

173

Absolute Salinity and related Thermodynamic Parameters (TEOS-10)

Short Name Full Name Friendly Name Units Notes/Comments

gsw_saA0 Absolute Salinity [g/kg] gsw_sa g/kg 1

sensor

gsw_saA1 Absolute Salinity, 2 [g/kg] gsw_sa2 g/kg 2nd sensor

gsw_deltasaA0 Absolute Salinity Anomaly [g/kg] gsw_deltasaA0 g/kg 1

sensor

gsw_deltasaA1 Absolute Salinity Anomaly, 2 [g/kg] gsw_deltasaA1 g/kg 2nd sensor

gsw_adlr0A adiabatic lapse rate [K/Pa] gsw_adlr0A K/Pa 1

sensor

gsw_adlr1A adiabatic lapse rate, 2 [K/Pa] gsw_adlr1A K/Pa 2nd sensor

gsw_ctA0 Conservative Temperature [ITS-90, deg C] gsw_ct ITS-90, deg C 1

sensor

gsw_ctA1 Conservative Temperature, 2 [ITS-90, deg C] gsw_ct2 ITS-90, deg C 2nd sensor

gsw_ctfA0 Conservative Temperature Freezing [ITS-90, deg C] gsw_ctfA0 ITS-90, deg C 1

sensor

gsw_ctfA1 Conservative Temperature Freezing, 2 [ITS-90, deg C]

gsw_ctfA1 ITS-90, deg C 2nd sensor

gsw_densityA0 density, TEOS-10 [density, kg/m^3] gsw_densityA0 density, kg/m^3 1

sensor

gsw_sigma0A0 density, TEOS-10 [sigma-0, kg/m^3] gsw_sigma0A0 sigma-0, kg/m^3 1

sensor

gsw_sigma1A0 density, TEOS-10 [sigma-1, kg/m^3] gsw_sigma1A0 sigma-1, kg/m^3 1

sensor

gsw_sigma2A0 density, TEOS-10 [sigma-2, kg/m^3] gsw_sigma2A0 sigma-2, kg/m^3 1

sensor

gsw_sigma3A0 density, TEOS-10 [sigma-3, kg/m^3] gsw_sigma3A0 sigma-3, kg/m^3 1

sensor

gsw_sigma4A0 density, TEOS-10 [sigma-4, kg/m^3] gsw_sigma4A0 sigma-4, kg/m^3 1

sensor

gsw_densityA1 density, TEOS-10, 2 [density, kg/m^3] gsw_densityA1 density, kg/m^3 2nd sensor

gsw_sigma0A1 density, TEOS-10, 2 [sigma-0, kg/m^3] gsw_sigma0A1 sigma-0, kg/m^3 2nd sensor

gsw_sigma1A1 density, TEOS-10, 2 [sigma-1, kg/m^3] gsw_sigma1A1 sigma-1, kg/m^3 2nd sensor

gsw_sigma2A1 density, TEOS-10, 2 [sigma-2, kg/m^3] gsw_sigma2A1 sigma-2, kg/m^3 2nd sensor

gsw_sigma3A1 density, TEOS-10, 2 [sigma-3, kg/m^3] gsw_sigma3A1 sigma-3, kg/m^3 2nd sensor

gsw_sigma4A1 density, TEOS-10, 2 [sigma-4, kg/m^3] gsw_sigma4A1 sigma-4, kg/m^3 2nd sensor

gsw_dynenthA0 dynamic enthalpy [J/kg] gsw_dynenthA0 J/kg 1

sensor

gsw_dynenthA1 dynamic enthalpy, 2 [J/kg] gsw_dynenthA1 J/kg 2nd sensor

gsw_enthalpyA0 enthalpy [J/kg] gsw_enthalpyA0 J/kg 1

sensor

gsw_enthalpyA1 enthalpy, 2 [J/kg] gsw_enthalpyA1 J/kg 2nd sensor

gsw_entropyA0 entropy [J/kg/K] gsw_entropyA0 J/kg/K 1

sensor

gsw_entropyA1 entropy, 2 [J/kg/K] gsw_entropyA1 J/kg/K 2nd sensor

gsw_gravA gravity [m/s^2] gsw_gravA m/s^2

gsw_ieA0 internal energy [J/kg] gsw_ieA0 J/kg 1

sensor

gsw_ieA1 internal energy, 2 [J/kg] gsw_ieA1 J/kg 2nd sensor

gsw_icA0 isentropic compressibility [1/Pa] gsw_icA0 1/Pa 1

sensor

gsw_icA1 isentropic compressibility, 2 [1/Pa] gsw_icA1 1/Pa 2nd sensor

gsw_lheA0 latent heat of evaporation [J/kg] gsw_lheA0 J/kg 1

sensor

gsw_lheA1 latent heat of evaporation, 2 [J/kg] gsw_lheA1 J/kg 2nd sensor

gsw_lhmA0 latent heat of melting [J/kg] gsw_lhmA0 J/kg 1

sensor

gsw_lhmA1 latent heat of melting, 2 [J/kg] gsw_lhmA1 J/kg 2nd sensor

gsw_ptA0 potential temperature [ITS-90, deg C] gsw_ptA0 ITS-90, deg C 1

sensor

gsw_ptA1 potential temperature, 2 [ITS-90, deg C] gsw_ptA1 ITS-90, deg C 2nd sensor

gsw_sstarA0 Preformed Salinity [g/kg] gsw_sstarA0 g/kg 1

sensor

gsw_sstarA1 Preformed Salinity, 2 [g/kg] gsw_sstarA1 g/kg 2nd sensor

gsw_srA0 Reference Salinity [g/kg] gsw_srA0 g/kg 1

sensor

gsw_srA1 Reference Salinity, 2 [g/kg] gsw_srA1 g/kg 2nd sensor

gsw_betaA0 saline contraction coefficient [kg/g] gsw_betaA0 kg/g 1

sensor

gsw_betaA1 saline contraction coefficient, 2 [kg/g] gsw_betaA1 kg/g 2nd sensor

gsw_ssA0 sound speed, TEOS-10 [m/s] gsw_ssA0 m/s 1

sensor

gsw_ssA1 sound speed, TEOS-10, 2 [m/s] gsw_ssA1 m/s 2nd sensor

gsw_specvolA0 specific volume, TEOS-10 [m^3/kg] gsw_specvolA0 m^3/kg 1

sensor

gsw_specvolA1 specific volume, TEOS-10, 2 [m^3/kg] gsw_specvolA1 m^3/kg 2nd sensor

gsw_svolanomA0 specific volume anomaly, TEOS-10 [m^3/kg] gsw_svolanomA0 m^3/kg 1

sensor

gsw_svolanomA1 specific volume anomaly, TEOS-10, 2 [m^3/kg] gsw_svolanomA1 m^3/kg 2nd sensor

gsw_tfA0 temperature freezing [ITS-90, deg C] gsw_tfA0 ITS-90, deg C 1

sensor

gsw_tfA1 temperature freezing, 2 [ITS-90, deg C] gsw_tfA1 ITS-90, deg C 2nd sensor

gsw_alphaA0 thermal expansion coefficient [1/K] gsw_alphaA0 1/K 1

sensor

gsw_alphaA1 thermal expansion coefficient, 2 [1/K] gsw_alphaA1 1/K 2nd sensor

Manual revision 7.26.8 Index SBE Data Processing

174

Index

.afm file · 15

.asc file · 15

.bl file · 15

.bmp file · 15

.bsr file · 15

.btl file · 15

.cnv file · 15

.con file · 15, 24, 143

reports · 148

SBE 16 · 28

SBE 16plus · 29

SBE 16plus V2 · 31

SBE 16plus-IM · 29

SBE 16plus-IM V2 · 31

SBE 19 · 33

SBE 19plus · 35

SBE 19plus V2 · 37

SBE 21 · 39

SBE 25 · 41

SBE 45 · 49

SBE 49 · 50

SBE 911plus · 26

SBE 917plus · 26

.dat file · 15

.hdr file · 15

.hex file · 15

.ini file · 15

.jpg file · 15

.mrk file · 15

.psa file · 15

.ros file · 15

.txt file · 15

.wmf file · 15

.xml file · 15

.xmlcon file · 15, 24, 143

reports · 148

SBE 16 · 28

SBE 16plus · 29

SBE 16plus V2 · 31

SBE 16plus-IM · 29

SBE 16plus-IM V2 · 31

SBE 19 · 33

SBE 19plus · 35

SBE 19plus V2 · 37

SBE 21 · 39

SBE 25 · 41

SBE 25plus · 43

SBE 37 · 47

SBE 45 · 49

SBE 49 · 50

SBE 911plus · 26

SBE 917plus · 26

SBE Glider Payload CTD · 51

A/D count sensors · 56

Absolute Salinity · 98

Acceleration · 160

Algorithms · 150

Align CTD · 84

Altimeter · 57

AMT pH sensor · 66

ASCII In · 114

ASCII Out · 115

Average · 88

Average sound velocity · 155

Batch file processing · 139

Bin Average · 88

Bottle Summary · 80

Bugs · 149

Buoyancy · 91

Calculator

seawater · 134

Calibration coefficients · 52

A/D count sensors · 56

altimeter · 57

bottles closed · 55

conductivity · 54

exporting · 52

fluorometer · 57

frequency sensors · 53

GTD · 72

importing · 52

Logarithmic PAR · 65

methane · 62

OBS/Nephelometer/Turbidity · 62

optode · 72

oxidation reduction potential · 63

oxygen · 55, 64

PAR/irradiance · 65

particle size · 66

pH · 71

pH · 66

pressure · 55, 56, 57

pressure/FGP · 66

RS-232 sensors · 70

SBE 38 · 70

SBE 50 · 70

SBE 63 · 70

sound velocity · 55

suspended sediment · 67

temperature · 53, 56

transmissometer · 67

user exponential · 69

user polynomial · 69

voltage sensors · 57

WET Labs C-Star · 70

WET Labs ECO · 70

WET Labs SeaOWL · 71

WET Labs WETStar · 70

Zaps · 69

Cell Thermal Mass · 93

Command line operation · 138

Command line options · 136

Compatibility issues · 149

Conductivity · 54

specific · 157

Manual revision 7.26.8 Index SBE Data Processing

175

Configuration

calibration coefficients · 52

calibration coefficients – RS-232 sensors · 70

file · 15, 24, 143, 148

Configure · 24

calibration coefficients – A/D count sensors · 56

calibration coefficients - frequency sensors · 53

calibration coefficients - voltage sensors · 57

Glider Payload CTD · 51

SBE 16 · 28

SBE 16plus · 29

SBE 16plus V2 · 31

SBE 16plus-IM · 29

SBE 16plus-IM V2 · 31

SBE 19 · 33

SBE 19plus · 35

SBE 19plus V2 · 37

SBE 21 · 39

SBE 25 · 41

SBE 25plus · 43

SBE 37 · 47

SBE 45 · 49

SBE 49 · 50

SBE 911plus · 26

SBE 917plus · 26

ConReport.exe · 148

Contour · 120

Corrected irradiance · 160

C-Star · 70

Data Conversion · 74

Data processing · 18

density · 151

Depth · 152

seafloor · 152

Derive · 95

Derive TEOS-10 · 98

Derived parameter formulas · 150

Descent rate · 160

Dynamic meters · 151

ECO · 70

Editing data files · 18

EOS-80 · 95

Exporting calibration coefficients · 52

FGP · 66

File extensions · 15

File formats · 15

Filter · 101

Fluorometer · 57

Formulas · 150

Frequency sensors · 53

Geopotential anomaly · 151

Glider Payload CTD · 23, 51

GTD · 72

Headings · 161

Importing calibration coefficients · 52

Installation · 9

Instrument configuration · 143, 148

Irradiance · 65, 160

Limited liability statement · 2

Logarithmic PAR · 65

Loop Edit · 104

Mark Scan · 82

Methane · 62

Modules · 8

dialog box · 11

Nephelometer · 62

Nitrogen saturation · 159

OBS · 62

Optode · 72

ORP · 63

Oxidation reduction potential · 63

Oxygen · 64, 158

Oxygen saturation · 159

Oxygen solubility · 159

PAR · 65, 160

Parameter formulas · 150

Parameter names · 161

Particle size · 66

pH · 66, 71

Plot · 120

Plume anomaly · 157

PostProcSuite.ini file · 15

Potential temperature · 156

Potential temperature anomaly · 156

Practical salinity · 95

Pressure · 55, 56, 57, 66

Processing data · 18

Processing sequence

Glider Payload CTD · 23

profiling CTDs · 20, 23

SBE 16 · 21

SBE 16plus · 21

SBE 16plus V2 · 21

SBE 16plus-IM · 21

SBE 16plus-IM V2 · 21

SBE 19 · 20

SBE 19plus · 20, 23

SBE 19plus V2 · 20

SBE 21 · 21

SBE 25 · 20

SBE 25plus · 20

Manual revision 7.26.8 Index SBE Data Processing

176

SBE 37 · 22

SBE 39 · 23

SBE 39-IM · 23

SBE 39plus · 23

SBE 39plus-IM · 23

SBE 45 · 21

SBE 48 · 23

SBE 49 · 20

SBE 911plus · 20

Profiling CTDs · 20, 23

Reports

.con or .xmlcon file · 148

Rosette Summary · 80

RS-232 sensors · 70

Salinity · 153

Saturation · 159

SBE 16 · 21, 28

SBE 16plus · 21, 29

SBE 16plus V2 · 21, 31

SBE 16plus-IM · 21, 29

SBE 16plus-IM V2 · 21, 31

SBE 18 · 66

SBE 19 · 20, 33

SBE 19plus · 20, 35

SBE 19plus V2 · 20, 37

SBE 21 · 21, 39

SBE 25 · 20, 41

SBE 25plus · 20, 43

SBE 27 · 66

SBE 37 · 22, 47

SBE 38 · 70

SBE 39 · 23

SBE 39-IM · 23

SBE 39plus · 23

SBE 39plusIM · 23

SBE 45 · 21, 49

SBE 48 · 23

SBE 49 · 20, 50

SBE 50 · 70

SBE 63 · 70

SBE 911plus · 20, 26

SBE 917plus · 26

SBE Data Processing

Align CTD · 84

ASCII In · 114

ASCII Out · 115

Bin Average · 88

Bottle Summary · 80

Buoyancy · 91

Cell Thermal Mass · 93

Configure · See Configure

creating water bottle files · 77

Data Conversion · 74

Derive · 95

Derive TEOS-10 · 98

File Setup tab · 13

Filter · 101

Getting started · 10

Header View tab · 13

Loop Edit · 104

Mark Scan · 82

module dialog box · 11

modules · 8

problems · 149

Rosette Summary · 80

SeaCalc III · 134

Section · 116

Split · 117

Strip · 118

Translate · 119

use · 10

Wild Edit · 106

window · 10

Window Filter · 108

Sea Plot · 120

SeaCalc III · 134

Seafloor depth · 152

SeaOWL · 71

Seasoft

file extensions · 15

file formats · 15

programs · 6

Section · 116

Sigma-1 · 151

Sigma-2 · 151

Sigma-4 · 151

Sigma-t · 151

Sigma-theta · 151

Software

problems · 149

Solubility · 159

Sound velocity · 55, 154

average · 155

Specific conductivity · 157

Specific volume · 151

Specific volume anomaly · 151

Split · 117

Strip · 118

Summary · 6

Surface PAR · 160

Suspended sediment · 67

Temperature · 53, 56

potential · 156

TEOS-10 · 134

Thermosteric anomaly · 151

Translate · 119

Transmissometer · 67

Troubleshooting · 149

TS plot · 120

Turbidity · 62

Updates · 9

User exponential · 69

User polynomial · 69

Manual revision 7.26.8 Index SBE Data Processing

177

Variable names · 161

Velocity · 160

Voltage sensors · 57

Water bottle files · 77

WETStar · 70

Wild Edit · 106

Window Filter · 108

Zaps · 69

Manual Seassoft Data Processing 7.26.8

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation